Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s
heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know
you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep
brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store®
or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
2021 COMPASS
OWNER’S MANUAL
21_MP_OM_EN_USC
Second Edition
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
2021 COMPASS
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
U. S. Canada
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-
highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon
monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your
vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves
the right to make changes in design and specifications, and⁄or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing
any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc.
used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by
calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s
Manual, Navigation⁄Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S.
residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement
kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using
any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones,
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could
lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a
convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.),
www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can
be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or
use public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your
reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1 INTRODUCTION.............................................................................................................................. 7
2 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE ..................................................................................13
3 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL ....................................................... 65
4 STARTING AND OPERATING ................................................................................................ 86
5 MULTIMEDIA ............................................................................................................................... 138
6 SAFETY ......................................................................................................................................... 212
7 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY ..................................................................................................... 271
8 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................296
9 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ............................................................................................. 351
10 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE ..................................................................................................... 357
11 INDEX .............................................................................................................................................. 361
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 1
2
INTRODUCTION
Symbols Key............................................................ 8
ROLLOVER WARNING ........................................... 8
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS .......... 9
Symbol Glossary..................................................... 9
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS ......................................................................13
Key Fobs ......................................................13
SENTRY KEY ..........................................................15
IGNITION SWITCH .................................................16
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition.....................16
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED .........................17
How To Use Remote Start ...........................17
To Exit Remote Start Mode ........................18
Remote Start Front Defrost Activation — If
Equipped ...................................................... 19
Remote Start Comfort Systems —
If Equipped .................................................. 19
Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer
Activation — If Equipped.............................. 19
Remote Start Abort Message —
If Equipped ................................................... 20
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED....20
To Arm The System ..................................... 20
To Disarm The System ................................21
Rearming Of The System............................. 21
Security System Manual Override ..............21
DOORS................................................................... 21
Manual Door Locks...................................... 21
Power Door Locks........................................ 22
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry........... 22
Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit ................ 25
Child-Protection Door Lock System — Rear
Doors ............................................................ 25
STEERING WHEEL ................................................ 26
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column .............. 26
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped ...... 26
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED... 27
Programming The Memory Feature............ 27
Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless
Entry Key Fob To Memory ........................... 28
Memory Position Recall............................... 28
SEATS ................................................................... 28
Manual Adjustment (Front Seats) — If
Equipped ...................................................... 29
Manual Adjustment (Rear Seats) ............... 30
Power Adjustment (Front Seats) —
If Equipped................................................... 31
Front Heated Seats — If Equipped.............. 33
Front Ventilated Seats — If Equipped......... 33
Head Restraints .......................................... 34
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION....................... 35
Introducing Voice Recognition .................... 35
Basic Voice Commands............................... 36
Get Started................................................... 36
Additional Information................................. 37
MIRRORS...............................................................37
Inside Rearview Mirror ................................ 37
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors........................... 38
Outside Mirrors ........................................... 38
Power Adjustment Mirrors .......................... 38
Folding Mirrors............................................. 39
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped..................... 39
EXTERIOR LIGHTS.................................................40
Multifunction Lever .................................... 40
Headlight Switch.......................................... 40
Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) —
If Equipped................................................... 40
High/Low Beam Switch .............................. 40
Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If
Equipped ...................................................... 40
Flash-To-Pass............................................... 41
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped ......... 41
Headlight Time Delay .................................. 41
Lights-On Reminder..................................... 41
Fog Lights — If Equipped............................. 42
Turn Signals ................................................. 42
Lane Change Assist .................................... 42
Battery Saver Feature ................................. 42
INTERIOR LIGHTS ................................................42
Interior Courtesy Lights ............................... 42
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS .............43
Windshield Wiper Operation ....................... 43
Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped .......... 44
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ..................... 45
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped.... 46
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 2
3
CLIMATE CONTROLS ...........................................46
Automatic Climate Control Descriptions And
Functions......................................................46
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) .......49
Climate Voice Commands ........................... 50
Operating Tips ............................................. 50
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT..............52
Storage ......................................................... 52
USB/AUX Control.......................................... 52
Power Outlets...............................................53
Power Inverter — If Equipped......................54
WINDOWS ............................................................55
Power Window Controls............................... 55
Automatic Window Features ......................55
Reset Auto-Up ..............................................56
Window Lockout Switch .............................. 56
Wind Buffeting ............................................ 56
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE — IF
EQUIPPED .............................................................56
Opening And Closing The Sunroof .............. 57
Venting Sunroof ...........................................57
Opening And Closing The Power
Sunshade .....................................................58
Pinch Protect Feature.................................. 58
Sunroof Maintenance.................................. 58
HOOD .....................................................................59
Opening The Hood ....................................... 59
Closing The Hood......................................... 59
LIFTGATE ............................................................... 59
Unlock/Open The Liftgate .......................... 59
Lock/Close The Liftgate .............................. 60
Power Liftgate — If Equipped ...................... 60
Cargo Area Features ................................... 62
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED ............ 64
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR
INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER ....................................... 65
Instrument Cluster Descriptions................. 67
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY....................... 67
Instrument Cluster Display Location And
Controls ....................................................... 68
Oil Change Reset ......................................... 68
Instrument Cluster Display Menu Items .... 69
Battery Saver On/Battery Saver Mode
Message — Electrical Load Reduction
Actions — If Equipped ................................. 72
TRIP COMPUTER .................................................. 74
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES .................. 74
Red Warning Lights ..................................... 74
Yellow Warning Lights ................................. 78
Yellow Indicator Lights ................................ 81
Green Indicator Lights................................. 82
White Indicator Lights ................................. 83
Blue Indicator Lights.................................... 83
Gray Indicator Lights ................................... 84
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II .......84
Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity ................................. 84
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS ...........................................................84
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE........................................86
Normal Starting .......................................... 86
Cold Weather Operation (Below –22°F Or
−30°C) ........................................................ 87
Extended Park Starting ............................... 87
After Starting — Warming Up The Engine... 87
If Engine Fails To Start ............................... 88
Stopping The Engine ................................... 88
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED ..........88
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS .........89
PARK BRAKE.........................................................89
Electric Park Brake (EPB) ........................... 89
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION ..............................93
Ignition Park Interlock ................................. 94
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock (BTSI)
System.......................................................... 94
Six-Speed Or Nine-Speed Automatic
Transmission ............................................... 94
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION —
IF EQUIPPED..........................................................99
Jeep Active Drive ......................................... 99
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED...................... 100
Mode Selection Guide............................... 100
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 3
4
POWER STEERING............................................. 101
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ........... 102
Autostop Mode...........................................102
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop .....................................................102
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode...........................................................103
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System........................................................104
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System........................................................104
System Malfunction...................................104
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED 104
Cruise Control — If Equipped.....................104
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) —
If Equipped .................................................106
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM — IF
EQUIPPED .......................................................... 116
ParkSense Sensors ...................................116
ParkSense Warning Display......................116
ParkSense Display.....................................116
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense ..........118
Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist
System........................................................118
Cleaning The ParkSense System..............119
ParkSense System Usage Precautions ....119
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED ........................... 120
LaneSense Operation................................120
Turning LaneSense On Or Off ...................121
LaneSense Warning Message ..................121
Changing LaneSense Status.....................124
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA..............124
REFUELING THE VEHICLE..................................126
VEHICLE LOADING ............................................127
Certification Label .....................................127
TRAILER TOWING...............................................128
Common Towing Definitions .....................128
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) .........................................129
Trailer And Tongue Weight........................130
Towing Requirements ...............................130
Towing Tips ................................................133
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME) ...................................................133
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another
Vehicle........................................................133
Recreational Towing — Front-Wheel Drive
(FWD) Models.............................................134
Recreational Towing — 4X4 Models .........134
DRIVING TIPS......................................................134
On-Road Driving Tips .................................134
Off-Road Driving Tips.................................135
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS .......................................138
CYBERSECURITY ...............................................138
UCONNECT SETTINGS........................................139
Customer Programmable Features ..........139
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION.............................. 155
System Overview ......................................155
Drag & Drop Menu Bar..............................157
Safety And General Information ...............157
UCONNECT MODES ........................................... 158
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ................158
Radio Mode ...............................................159
Media Mode ..............................................167
Phone Mode ..............................................169
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® — IF
EQUIPPED........................................................... 181
Android Auto™ ..........................................181
Apple CarPlay®..........................................183
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Tips And
Tricks ..........................................................185
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES —
IF EQUIPPED ...................................................... 186
Is My Vehicle Connected?.........................186
Introduction To Connected Vehicle
Services .....................................................186
Getting Started With Connected Vehicle
Services .....................................................188
Using SiriusXM Guardian™ ......................190
Manage My SiriusXM Guardian™
Account ......................................................204
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 4
5
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQs ......................... 204
Connected Services SOS FAQs ................205
Connected Services Remote Door Lock/
Unlock FAQs ..............................................205
Connected Services Roadside Assistance
FAQs ...........................................................206
Connected Services Send & Go FAQs .....206
Connected Services Vehicle Finder
FAQs ...........................................................206
Connected Services Stolen Vehicle Assistance
FAQs ...........................................................206
Connected Services Remote Vehicle Start
FAQs ...........................................................207
Connected Services Remote Horn & Lights
FAQs............................................................207
Connected Services Account FAQs...........208
Data Collection & Privacy..........................210
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES.... 210
Regulatory And Safety Information...........210
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ............................................ 212
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................212
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) System ...213
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ........................ 221
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped .................................................221
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) With
Mitigation — If Equipped............................225
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) ........................................................227
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS ..................231
Occupant Restraint Systems Features ....231
Important Safety Precautions...................231
Seat Belt Systems .....................................232
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)...240
Child Restraints .........................................255
SAFETY TIPS .......................................................267
Transporting Passengers ..........................267
Transporting Pets ......................................267
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle .......................................................267
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle...................................269
Exhaust Gas ..............................................269
Carbon Monoxide Warnings......................270
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS........................271
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED ....271
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING ........................275
Preparations For Jacking ..........................275
Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage...........276
Jacking Instructions ..................................277
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED ...................280
JUMP STARTING.................................................285
Preparations For Jump Start.....................286
Jump Starting Procedure ..........................287
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF
EQUIPPED ..........................................................288
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS .........................289
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE ........................... 289
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE ............................ 290
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE........................ 292
Without The Key Fob .................................293
Front-Wheel Drive (FWD) Models — With Key
Fob..............................................................293
4x4 Models ................................................293
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped .....293
Tow Eye Usage — If Equipped ..................294
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS) ................................................................ 295
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)....................... 295
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING .................................. 296
Maintenance Plan ..................................... 297
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .................................. 300
2.4L Engine................................................300
Checking Oil Level ....................................301
Adding Washer Fluid ................................301
Maintenance-Free Battery .......................301
Pressure Washing......................................302
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 5
6
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE ................................... 302
Engine Oil ..................................................302
Engine Oil Filter..........................................303
Engine Air Cleaner Filter............................303
Air Conditioner Maintenance ....................303
Body Lubrication........................................304
Wiper Blades .............................................305
Exhaust System ........................................308
Cooling System ..........................................309
Brake System ............................................312
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped ....313
Fuses ..........................................................314
Bulb Replacement ....................................322
TIRES .................................................................. 330
Tire Safety Information .............................330
Tires — General Information .....................337
Tire Types ...................................................341
Spare Tires — If Equipped .........................342
Snow Traction Devices .............................343
Tire Rotation Recommendations .............345
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES .................................... 345
Treadwear ..................................................345
Traction Grades .........................................346
Temperature Grades .................................346
STORING THE VEHICLE ..................................... 346
BODYWORK........................................................ 347
Protection From Atmospheric Agents.......347
Body And Underbody Maintenance ..........347
Preserving The Bodywork..........................348
INTERIORS .........................................................349
Seats And Fabric Parts..............................349
Plastic And Coated Parts...........................350
Leather Surfaces .......................................350
Glass Surfaces ..........................................350
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER.................351
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ................................................351
Torque Specifications................................351
BRAKE SYSTEM..................................................352
FUEL REQUIREMENTS .......................................352
2.4L Engine................................................352
Reformulated Gasoline .............................352
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends ....................353
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles......353
CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications...353
Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese
Tricarbonyl (MMT) In Gasoline ..................353
Materials Added To Fuel ...........................354
Fuel System Cautions................................354
FLUID CAPACITIES .............................................355
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS..................355
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ..............356
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE .................................................. 357
Prepare For The Appointment ..................357
Prepare A List.............................................357
Be Reasonable With Requests.................357
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE .............................. 357
FCA US LLC Customer Center...................357
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center...........357
Mexico ........................................................358
Puerto Rico And US Virgin Islands............358
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) .....................358
Service Contract .......................................358
WARRANTY INFORMATION.............................. 359
MOPAR® PARTS ............................................... 359
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS ........................ 359
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. .......................................359
In Canada...................................................359
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS ........................ 360
General Information.......................................... 360
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 6
7
INTRODUCTION
Congratulations on the purchase of your new Jeep® vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workmanship, distinctive styling, and high quality.
This Owner's Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with the operation and maintenance
of your vehicle. It is supplemented by customer-oriented documents. Within this information, you will find a description of the services that FCA US LLC
offers to its customers as well as the details of the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. Please take the time to read these publications
carefully. Following the instructions and recommendations in this manual will help ensure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual describes all versions of this vehicle. Options and equipment dedicated to specific markets or versions are not expressly indicated
in the text. Therefore, you should only consider the information that is related to the trim level, engine, and version that you have purchased. Any content
introduced throughout the Owner’s Information, which may or may not be applicable to your vehicle, will be identified with the wording “If Equipped”.
All data contained in this publication are intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes
to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact an authorized dealer.
When it comes to service, remember that authorized dealers know your Jeep best, have factory-trained technicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and
care about your satisfaction.
1
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 7
8
SYMBOLS KEY
If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Cautions and Warnings.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of
vehicles. This vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a higher center
of gravity than many passenger vehicles. It is capable of performing better
in a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven in an unsafe manner, all
vehicles can go out of control. Because of the higher center of gravity, if
this vehicle is out of control it may roll over while some other vehicles may
not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneuvers, or other unsafe driving
actions that can cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to operate this
vehicle safely may result in a collision, rollover of the vehicle, and severe
or fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat belts provided is a major
cause of severe or fatal injury. In fact, the US government notes that the
universal use of existing seat belts could cut the highway death toll by
10,000 or more each year and could reduce disabling injuries by two
WARNING!
These statements are against operating proce-
dures that could result in a collision, bodily
injury and/or death.
CAUTION!
These statements are against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
NOTE:
A suggestion which will improve installation,
operation, and reliability. If not followed, may
result in damage.
TIP:
General ideas/solutions/suggestions on easier
use of the product or functionality.
PAGE REFERENCE
ARROW
Follow this reference for additional information
on a particular feature.
FOOTNOTE
Supplementary and relevant information per-
taining to the topic.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 8
9
million annually. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
SYMBOL GLOSSARY
Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating
precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to
follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for the
definition of each symbol Ú page 68.
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could seriously affect its
roadworthiness and safety and may lead to a collision resulting in seri-
ous injury or death.
Red Warning Lights
Air Bag Warning Light
Ú page 74
Brake Warning Light
Ú page 74
Battery Charge Warning Light
Ú page 76
Door Open Warning Light
Ú page 76
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault Warning
Light
Ú page 76
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light
Ú page 76
Engine Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 76
Hood Open Warning Light
Ú page 77
Liftgate Open Warning Light
Ú page 77
Oil Pressure Warning Light
Ú page 77
Oil Temperature Warning Light
Ú page 77
Red Warning Lights
1
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 9
10
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
Ú page 75
Transmission Fault Warning Light
Ú page 77
Transmission Temperature Warning Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 77
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 77
Yellow Warning Lights
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning Light
Ú page 78
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
Ú page 78
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active Warning
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 78
Red Warning Lights
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Warning
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 78
Fuel Cutoff Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 78
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 78
Service LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 78
Low Coolant Level Warning Light
Ú page 79
Low Fuel Warning Light
Ú page 79
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 79
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Warning
Light (MIL)
Ú page 79
Yellow Warning Lights
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 10
11
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
Ú page 79
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Light
— If Equipped
Ú page 80
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 80
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) Warn-
ing Light
Ú page 80
Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 81
Yellow Indicator Lights
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 81
4WD Lock Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 81
Yellow Warning Lights
Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 81
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Indicator Light
— If Equipped
Ú page 81
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) OFF Indicator
Light — If Equipped
Ú page 81
Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical Alarm Indicator
Light
Ú page 81
Green Indicator Lights
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No Tar-
get Detected Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 82
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With Target
Detected Light — If Equipped
Ú page 82
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 82
Yellow Indicator Lights
1
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 11
12
Auto HOLD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 82
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
Ú page 82
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 82
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
Ú page 82
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If Equipped
With A Premium Instrument Cluster
Ú page 82
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 82
White Indicator Lights
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
Ú page 83
Green Indicator Lights
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Ú page 83
Idle Coasting — If Equipped
Ú page 83
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — If
Equipped With A Premium Instrument Cluster
Ú page 83
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If Equipped
With A Base Instrument Cluster
Ú page 83
Blue Indicator Lights
High Beam Indicator Light
Ú page 83
Gray Indicator Lights
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — If
Equipped With A Base Instrument Cluster
Ú page 84
White Indicator Lights
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 12
13
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
KEYS
KEY FOBS
Your vehicle is equipped with a keyless ignition
key fob.
The keyless ignition key fob supports Passive
Entry, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE), Keyless
Enter-N-Go (if equipped), Remote Start (if
equipped), and remote power liftgate operation.
The keyless ignition key fob supports vehicles
equipped with a START/STOP ignition button. The
keyless ignition key fob also includes an
emergency key, which is stored in the rear of the
key fob.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the doors
and liftgate from distances up to approximately
66 ft (20 m). The key fob does not need to be
pointed at the vehicle to activate the system.
NOTE:
The key fob’s wireless signal may be blocked if
the key fob is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop, or other electronic device. This may
result in poor performance.
With the ignition on and the vehicle moving at
2 mph (4 km/h), all RKE commands are
disabled.
Key Fob
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or fully depleted battery. A low key fob battery
can be verified by referring to the instrument
cluster, which will display directions to follow
Ú page 360.
To Unlock/Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Push and release the unlock button on the key
fob once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice
within five seconds to unlock all the doors and
the liftgate. To lock all the doors and the liftgate,
push the lock button once.
When the doors are unlocked, the turn signals
will flash and the illuminated entry system will
be activated. When the doors are locked, the
turn signals will flash and the horn will chirp.
1 — Unlock Button
2 — Liftgate Button
3 — Emergency Key
4 — Lock Button
5 — Remote Start Button
6 — PANIC Button
2
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 13
14 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
All doors can be programmed to unlock on the
first push of the unlock button within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 139.
Replacing The Battery In The Key Fob
The replacement battery is one CR2032
battery.
NOTE:
Customers are recommended to use a
battery obtained from Mopar. Aftermarket
coin battery dimensions may not meet the
original OEM coin battery dimensions.
Perchlorate Material — special handling may
apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate for further informa-
tion.
Do not touch the battery terminals that are
on the back housing or the printed circuit
board.
Key Fob:
1. Remove the emergency key (2) by sliding
the emergency key release (1) on the back
of the key fob and pull the emergency key
out with your other hand.
Emergency Key Removal
2. Separate the key fob halves using a #2 flat
blade screwdriver or a coin, and gently pry
the two halves of the key fob apart. Make
sure not to damage the seal during removal.
Separating Case With A Coin
Key Fob Battery Replacement
3. Remove the back cover to access and
replace the battery. When replacing the
battery, match the (+) sign on the battery to
the (+) sign on the inside of the battery clip,
located on the back cover. Avoid touching
the new battery with your fingers. Skin oils
1 — Emergency Key Release Button
2 — Emergency Key
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 14
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 15
may cause battery deterioration. If you
touch a battery, clean it with rubbing
alcohol.
4. To assemble the key fob case, snap the two
halves together.
Programming And Requesting Additional
Key Fobs
Programming the key fob may be performed by
an authorized dealer.
NOTE:
Once a key fob is programmed to a vehicle, it
cannot be repurposed and reprogrammed to
another vehicle.
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at an
authorized dealer. This procedure consists of
programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
system serviced, bring all vehicle keys with
you to an authorized dealer.
Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut
to match the vehicle locks.
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents
unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the
engine. The system does not need to be armed
or activated. Operation is automatic, regardless
of whether the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
The system uses a key fob, keyless push button
ignition and a Radio Frequency (RF) receiver to
prevent unauthorized vehicle operation.
Therefore, only key fobs that are programmed
to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off
in two seconds if an invalid key fob is used to
start the engine.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON/RUN
position, the vehicle security light will turn on for
three seconds for a bulb check. If the light
remains on after the bulb check, it indicates
that there is a problem with the electronics. In
addition, if the light begins to flash after the
bulb check, it indicates that someone
attempted to start the engine with an invalid key
fob. Either of these conditions will result in the
engine being shut off after two seconds.
If the vehicle security light turns on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle running for
longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there
is a fault in the electronics. Should this occur,
have the vehicle serviced as soon as possible by
an authorized dealer.
All of the key fobs provided with your new
vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle
electronics.
WARNING!
Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always remember to
place the ignition in the OFF mode.
CAUTION!
The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not
compatible with some aftermarket remote
starting systems. Use of these systems may
result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
2
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 15
16 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
NOTE:
A key fob that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key Ú page 360.
IGNITION SWITCH
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — IGNITION
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition with the push of a button as long as the
key fob is in the passenger compartment.
The START/STOP ignition button has three
operating modes. The three modes are OFF,
ON/RUN, and START.
START/STOP Ignition Button
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
The engine is stopped.
Some electrical devices (e.g. Central locking,
alarm, etc.) are still available.
ON/RUN
Driving mode.
All the electrical devices are available (e.g.
climate controls, heated seats, etc.).
START
The engine will start.
NOTE:
If the ignition state/mode does not change with
the push of a button, the key fob may have a low
or depleted battery. In this situation, a back up
method can be used to operate the ignition
switch. Put the nose side (side opposite of the
emergency key) of the key fob against the
START/STOP ignition button and push to
operate the ignition.
Starting The Ignition With Depleted Key Fob Battery
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 16
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 17
(Continued)
NOTE:
For information on normal starting, see
Ú page 86.
When opening the driver's door and the igni-
tion is in the ON/RUN (engine not running)
position, a chime will sound to remind you to
place the ignition in the OFF position. In addi-
tion to the chime, the Vehicle On message
will display in the cluster.
REMOTE START — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from outside
the vehicle while still maintaining
security. The system has a range of
approximately 328 ft (100 m).
Remote start is used to defrost windows in cold
weather and to reach a comfortable climate in
all ambient conditions before the customer
enters the vehicle.
NOTE:
Obstructions between the vehicle and key fob
may reduce this range Ú page 360.
HOW TO USE REMOTE START
Push and release the Remote Start button on
the key fob twice within five seconds. The
vehicle doors will lock, the parking lights will
flash, and the horn will chirp twice (if
programmed). Then, the engine will start, and
the vehicle will remain in the Remote Start
mode for a 15 minute cycle. Pushing the remote
start button a third time shuts the engine off.
To drive the vehicle, push the unlock button and
place the ignition in the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
With Remote Start, the engine will only run
for 15 minutes.
Remote Start can only be used twice.
If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut down
in 10 seconds.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ON/RUN mode. A child could operate
power windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the vehi-
cle and lock all doors when leaving the vehi-
cle unattended.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 17
18 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The park lamps will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
For security, power window and power
sunroof operation (if equipped) are disabled
when the vehicle is in the Remote Start
mode.
The ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN
position before the Remote Start sequence
can be repeated for a third cycle.
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
Gear selector in PARK
Doors closed
Hood closed
Liftgate closed
Hazard switch off
Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not
pushed)
Battery at an acceptable charge level
PANIC button not pushed
System not disabled from previous remote
start event
Vehicle Security system indicator flashing
Ignition in the OFF position
Fuel level meets minimum requirement
Vehicle Security system is not signaling an
intrusion
Malfunction Indicator Light is not illuminated
TO EXIT REMOTE START MODE
To drive the vehicle after starting the Remote
Start system, push and release the START/
STOP ignition button while pressing the brake
pedal prior to the end of the 15 minute cycle. If
the vehicle is not equipped with a START/STOP
ignition button, insert the mechanical key into
the ignition switch and place the ignition in the
ON/RUN position.
The Remote Start system will turn the engine off
with another push and release of the Remote
Start button on the key fob, or if the engine is
allowed to run for the entire 15 minute cycle.
Once the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
position, the climate controls will resume the
previously set operations (temperature, blower
control, etc.).
NOTE:
For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the igni-
tion switch must be in the ON/RUN position
in order to drive the vehicle.
For vehicles not equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Insert Key
and Turn To Run” will show in the instrument
cluster display until you insert the key.
For vehicles equipped with the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry feature, the
message “Remote Start Active — Push Start
WARNING!
Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which is
odorless and colorless. Carbon Monoxide is
poisonous and can cause serious injury or
death when inhaled.
Keep key fobs away from children. Opera-
tion of the Remote Start System, windows,
door locks or other controls could cause
serious injury or death.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 18
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 19
Button” will show in the instrument cluster
display until you push the START/STOP igni-
tion button.
To avoid unintentional shutdowns, the
system will disable for two seconds after
receiving a valid remote start request.
REMOTE START FRONT DEFROST
A
CTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When remote start is active, and the outside
ambient temperature is 40°F (4.5°C) or below,
the system will automatically activate front
defrost for 15 minutes or less. The time is
dependent on the ambient temperature. Once
the timer expires, the system will automatically
adjust the settings depending on ambient
conditions. See “Remote Start Comfort Systems
— If Equipped” in the next section for detailed
operation.
REMOTE START COMFORT SYSTEMS —
I
F EQUIPPED
When remote start is activated, the front and
rear defrost will automatically turn on in cold
weather. The heated steering wheel and driver
heated seat feature will turn on if programmed
in the comfort menu screen within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 139. In warm weather, the
driver vented seat feature will automatically
turn on when the remote start is activated and
is programmed in the comfort menu screen.
The vehicle will adjust the climate control
settings depending on the outside ambient
temperature.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If
Equipped
The climate controls will automatically adjust to
the optimal temperature and mode settings
depending on the outside ambient temperature.
This will occur until the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN position where the climate controls will
resume their previous settings.
Manual Temperature Control (MTC) — If
Equipped
In ambient temperatures of 40°F (4.5°C) or
below, the climate settings will default to
maximum heat, with fresh air entering the
cabin. If the front defrost timer expires, the
vehicle will enter Mix Mode.
In ambient temperatures from 40°F (4.5°C)
to 78°F (26°C), the climate settings will be
based on the last settings selected by the
driver.
In ambient temperatures of 78°F (26°C) or
above, the climate settings will default to
MAX A/C, Bi-Level mode, with Recirculation
on.
For more information on ATC, MTC, and climate
control settings, see Ú page 46.
NOTE:
These features will stay on through the duration
of remote start, or until the ignition is placed in
the ON/RUN position. The climate control
settings will change, and exit the automatic
defaults, if manually adjusted by the driver
while the vehicle is in remote start mode. This
includes turning the climate controls off using
the OFF button.
REMOTE START WINDSHIELD WIPER
D
E–ICER ACTIVATION — IF EQUIPPED
When remote start is active and the outside
ambient temperature is less than 33°F (0.6°C),
the Windshield Wiper De-Icer will activate.
Exiting remote start will resume its previous
operation, except if the Windshield Wiper
De-Icer is active. If the Windshield Wiper De-Icer
is active, the timer and operation will continue.
2
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 19
20 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE START ABORT MESSAGE — IF
E
QUIPPED
The following messages will display in the
instrument cluster display if the vehicle fails to
remote start or exits remote start prematurely:
Remote Start Aborted — Door Open
Remote Start Aborted — Hood Open
Remote Start Aborted — Fuel Low
Remote Start Aborted — Liftgate Open
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To
Reset
Remote Start Aborted — Too Cold
Remote Start Aborted — Time Expired
Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle To
Reset
The message will stay active until the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Vehicle Security system monitors the
vehicle doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition for unauthorized
operation. While the Vehicle Security system is
armed, interior switches for door locks and
liftgate release are disabled. If something
triggers the system, the Vehicle Security system
will provide the following audible and visible
signals:
The horn will pulse
The turn signals will flash
The vehicle security light in the instrument
cluster will flash
NOTE:
The Vehicle Security system is factory
adjusted to standards from different coun-
tries.
The Vehicle Security system is a complemen-
tary security system developed to hinder the
occurrence of vehicle theft and prevent
vandalism. It does not prevent the theft of
your vehicle; the system is a deterrent.
The Vehicle Security system does not monitor
glass breakage or the movement of objects
or people inside the vehicle. The alarm does
not intervene in the case of vehicle tilt varia-
tions when it is parked.
TO ARM THE SYSTEM
Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security
system:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed
in the OFF position.
For vehicles equipped with Keyless Entry,
make sure the vehicle’s keyless ignition
system is OFF.
2. Perform one of the following methods to
lock the vehicle:
Push the lock button on the interior
power door lock switch with the driver
and/or passenger door open.
Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid
key fob available in the same exterior
zone Ú page 22.
Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 20
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 21
When the Vehicle Security system is armed, the
vehicle security light (located in the lower left
portion of the instrument cluster display) will
begin to flash every three seconds until it is
disarmed.
NOTE:
If the system is armed by pushing the lock
button on the interior door panel, the vehicle
security light will flash rapidly for about 15
seconds once the door is closed, then slow
down to every three seconds.
TO DISARM THE SYSTEM
The Vehicle Security system can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
Push the unlock button on the key fob.
Grab the passive entry door handle to unlock
the door Ú page 22.
Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position to
disarm the system.
NOTE:
The driver's door key cylinder and the liftgate
button on the key fob cannot arm or disarm
the Vehicle Security system.
The Vehicle Security system remains armed
during power liftgate entry. Pushing the lift-
gate button will not disarm the Vehicle Secu-
rity system. If someone enters the vehicle
through the liftgate and opens any door, the
alarm will sound.
When the Vehicle Security system is armed,
the interior power door lock switches will not
unlock the doors.
The Vehicle Security system is designed to
protect your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a false
alarm. If one of the previously described arming
sequences has occurred, the Vehicle Security
system will arm regardless of whether you are in
the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle
and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this
occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security system.
If the Vehicle Security system is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the Vehicle
Security system will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the Vehicle Security system.
REARMING OF THE SYSTEM
If something triggers the alarm, and no action is
taken to disarm it, the Vehicle Security system
will turn the horn off after approximately
90 seconds, and then the Vehicle Security
system will rearm itself.
SECURITY SYSTEM MANUAL OVERRIDE
The Vehicle Security system will not arm if you
lock the doors using the manual door lock.
DOORS
MANUAL DOOR LOCKS
The door locks can be manually locked from
inside the vehicle by using the door lock knob.
To lock each door, rotate the door lock knob on
each door trim panel forward until the lock
indicator is shown. To unlock the front doors,
pull the inside door handle to the first detent or
rotate the door lock button until the lock
indicator is hidden. To unlock the rear doors,
rotate the door lock button until the lock
indicator is hidden. If the door lock button is
2
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 21
22 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
locked (lock indicator visible) when you shut the
door, the door will remain locked. Therefore,
make sure the key fob is not inside the vehicle
before closing the door.
NOTE:
Manually locking the vehicle will not arm the
Vehicle Security system.
The manual door locks will not lock or unlock
the liftgate.
POWER DOOR LOCKS
The power door lock switches are located on
each front door panel. Push the switch to lock or
unlock the doors and liftgate.
Power Door Lock Switch
If you push the power door lock switch while the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position, and any door
or the liftgate is open, the power locks will not
operate. This prevents you from accidentally
locking the key fob in the vehicle. Placing the
ignition in the OFF position or closing the doors
and liftgate will allow the locks to operate.
KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE
E
NTRY
The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to
the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system and
a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry.
This feature allows you to lock and unlock the
vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the key
fob lock or unlock buttons.
WARNING!
For personal security and safety in the
event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors
before you drive as well as when you park
and exit the vehicle.
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle. If equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Ignition, always make sure
the keyless ignition is in the OFF position,
remove the key fob from the vehicle and
lock the vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause severe
personal injuries or death.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Ignition the ACC or ON/RUN position. A
child could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 22
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 23
NOTE:
Passive Entry may be programmed on/off
through Uconnect Settings Ú page 139.
The key fob may not be able to be detected by
the Passive Entry system if it is located next
to a mobile phone, laptop or other electronic
device; these devices may block the key fob’s
wireless signal and prevent the Passive Entry
system from locking and unlocking the
vehicle.
If wearing gloves, or if it has been raining/
snowing on the Passive Entry door handle,
the unlock sensitivity can be affected,
resulting in a slower response time.
If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry
and no door is opened within 60 seconds, the
vehicle will re-lock and, if equipped, will arm
the Vehicle Security system.
To Unlock From The Driver's Side Or
Passenger’s Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of either front door handle, grab the
door handle to unlock the door automatically.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is
programmed, all doors and the liftgate will
unlock when you grab hold of the front
driver’s door handle. You can select between
“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” and “Unlock
All Doors 1st Press” within Uconnect Settings
Ú page 139.
All doors and the liftgate will unlock when the
front passenger door handle is grabbed
regardless of the driver’s door unlock prefer-
ence setting.
Frequency Operated Button Integrated Key
(FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature which
will function if the ignition switch is in the OFF
position.
There are three situations that trigger a
FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive Entry vehicle:
A lock request is made by a valid Passive
Entry key fob while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
door handle while a door is open.
A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all
open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search will
be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry key fob
inside the vehicle and it does not find any
Passive Entry key fobs outside the vehicle, then
the vehicle will unlock and alert the customer.
2
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 23
24 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a
valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside
the vehicle. The vehicle will not unlock the doors
when any of the following conditions are true:
The doors are manually locked using the door
lock knobs.
Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then the
doors are closed.
There is a valid Passive Entry key fob outside
the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either
Passive Entry door handle.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key fobs
within 5 ft (1.5 m) of either front door handle,
push the Passive Entry lock button located on
the outside door handle to lock the vehicle
doors and liftgate.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
NOTE:
DO NOT grab the door handle when pushing the
door handle lock button. This could unlock the
door(s).
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking
NOTE:
After pushing the door handle button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock or
unlock the doors, using either Passive Entry
door handle. This is done to allow you to
check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle without the vehicle unlocking.
If Passive Entry is disabled using the
Uconnect settings, the key protection
described in "Frequency Operated Button
Integrated Key (FOBIK-Safe)" remains active/
functional.
The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is depleted.
To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate
The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is built
into the electronic liftgate release handle. With
a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m)
of the liftgate, push the electronic liftgate
release handle to open.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 24
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 25
Electronic Liftgate Release/Liftgate Passive Entry
Location
To Lock The Liftgate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry
lock button located to the right of the electronic
liftgate release handle.
NOTE:
The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will lock all
doors and the liftgate Ú page 360.
AUTOMATIC UNLOCK DOORS ON EXIT
The doors will unlock automatically on vehicles
with power door locks if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit
feature is enabled.
2. All doors are closed.
3. The transmission gear selector was not in
PARK, then is placed in PARK.
4. Any door is opened.
CHILD-PROTECTION DOOR LOCK
S
YSTEM — REAR DOORS
To provide a safer environment for small
children riding in the rear seats, the rear doors
are equipped with a Child-Protection Door Lock
system.
To use the system, open each rear door, use a
flat blade screwdriver (or emergency key) and
rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position.
When the system on a door is engaged, that
door can only be opened by using the outside
door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
NOTE:
When the Child-Protection Door Lock system
is engaged, the door can be opened only by
using the outside door handle even though
the inside door lock is in the unlocked posi-
tion.
After disengaging the Child-Protection Door
Lock system, always test the door from the
inside to make certain it is in the desired
position.
After engaging the Child-Protection Door Lock
system, always test the door from the inside
to make certain it is in the desired position.
For emergency exit with the system engaged,
rotate the door lock button until the lock indi-
2
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 25
26 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
cator is hidden (unlocked position), roll down
the window, and open the door with the
outside door handle.
NOTE:
Always use this device when carrying children.
After engaging the child lock on both rear doors,
check for effective engagement by trying to
open a door with the internal handle. Once the
Child-Protection Door Lock system is engaged,
it is impossible to open the doors from inside
the vehicle. Before getting out of the vehicle, be
sure to check that there is no one left inside.
STEERING WHEEL
TILT/TELESCOPING STEERING COLUMN
This feature allows you to tilt the steering column
upward or downward. It also allows you to
lengthen or shorten the steering column. The tilt/
telescoping lever is located below the steering
wheel at the end of the steering column.
Tilt/Telescoping Lever
To unlock the steering column, push the control
handle downward (toward the floor). To tilt the
steering column, move the steering wheel
upward or downward as desired. To lengthen or
shorten the steering column, pull the steering
wheel outward or push it inward as desired. To
lock the steering column in position, push the
control handle upward until fully engaged.
HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF
E
QUIPPED
The steering wheel contains a heating element
that helps warm your hands in cold weather.
The heated steering wheel has only one
temperature setting. Once the heated steering
wheel has been turned on, it will stay on until
the operator turns it off. The heated steering
wheel may not turn on when it is already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located on the center instrument panel below
the touchscreen, as well as within the climate or
controls screen of the touchscreen.
Press the heated steering wheel button
once to turn the heating element on.
Press the heated steering wheel button a
second time to turn the heating element off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 19.
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a colli-
sion. Remember that the rear doors can only
be opened from the outside when the
Child-Protection locks are engaged (locked).
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while driv-
ing. Adjusting the steering column while driving
or driving with the steering column unlocked,
could cause the driver to lose control of the
vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may
result in serious injury or death.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 26
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 27
DRIVER MEMORY SETTINGS — IF EQUIPPED
Your key fob can be programmed to recall the
same positions when the unlock button is
pushed. This feature allows the driver to store
up to two different memory profiles for easy
recall through a memory switch. Each memory
profile contains desired position settings for the
following features:
Driver seat position
Easy Entry/Exit seat (if equipped)
A set of desired radio station presets
NOTE:
Your vehicle is equipped with two key fobs, one
key fob can be linked to memory position 1 and
the other key fob can be linked to memory posi-
tion 2.
The memory setting switch is located on the
driver’s door trim panel. The switch consists of
three buttons:
The set (S) button, which is used to activate
the memory save function.
The (1) and (2) buttons which are used to
recall either of two pre-programmed memory
profiles.
Memory Switches
PROGRAMMING THE MEMORY FEATURE
To create a new memory profile, perform the
following:
NOTE:
Saving a new memory profile will erase an
existing profile from memory.
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON
position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat and radio station
presets).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch, then push memory button
(1) within five seconds. The instrument
cluster display will display which memory
position is being set.
If desired, a second memory profile can be
stored into memory as follows:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the ON
position.
2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired
preferences (i.e., seat and radio station
presets).
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other phys-
ical conditions must exercise care when
using the steering wheel heater. It may
cause burns even at low temperatures,
especially if used for long periods.
Do not place anything on the steering wheel
that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or steering wheel covers of any type
and material. This may cause the steering
wheel heater to overheat.
2
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 27
28 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch, then push memory button
(2) within five seconds. The instrument
cluster display will display which memory
position is being set.
NOTE:
Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle
in PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to
recall a memory profile.
LINKING AND UNLINKING THE REMOTE
K
EYLESS ENTRY KEY FOB TO MEMORY
Your remote keyless entry key fob can be
programmed to recall one of two
pre-programmed memory profiles with a push
of the unlock button on the key fob.
NOTE:
Before programming your key fob you must
select the “Memory Linked To FOB” feature
through the Uconnect Settings Ú page 139.
To program your key fob, perform the following:
1. Place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
2. Select the desired memory profile (1) or (2).
3. Push and release the set (S) button on the
memory switch, then within five seconds
push and release the button labeled (1) or
(2) accordingly. “Memory Profile Set” (1 or
2) will display in the instrument cluster
display.
4. Push and release the lock button on the key
fob within 10 seconds.
NOTE:
Your key fob can be unlinked to your memory
settings by pushing the set (S) button, followed
by pushing the unlock button on the key fob
within 10 seconds.
MEMORY POSITION RECALL
NOTE:
The vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory
positions. If a recall is attempted when the
vehicle is not in PARK, a message will display in
the instrument cluster display.
To recall the memory settings for driver one,
push memory button (1) or the unlock button
on the key fob linked to memory position 1.
To recall the memory settings for driver two,
push memory button (2) or the unlock button
on the key fob linked to memory position 2.
A recall can be canceled by pushing any of the
memory buttons (S, 1, or 2) during a recall.
When a recall is canceled, the driver seat will
stop moving. A delay of one second will occur
before another recall can be selected.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. In a collision, people riding
in these areas are more likely to be seri-
ously injured or killed.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 28
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 29
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS)
— I
F EQUIPPED
Manual Front Seat Forward/Rearward
Adjustment
Some models may be equipped with a manual
front passenger seat. The seat can be adjusted
forward or rearward by using a bar located by
the front of the seat cushion, near the floor.
Front Seat Adjustment
While sitting in the seat, lift up on the bar and
move the seat forward or rearward. Release the
bar once you have reached the desired position.
Then, using body pressure, move forward and
rearward on the seat to be sure that the seat
adjusters have latched.
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If
Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or
lowered by using a lever, located on the
outboard side of the seat. Pull upward on the
lever to raise the seat height or push downward
on the lever to lower the seat height.
Seat Height Adjustment
Manual Front Seat Recline Adjustment
To adjust the seatback, lift the lever located on
the outboard side of the seat, lean back to the
desired position and release the lever. To return
the seatback, lift the lever, lean forward and
release the lever.
Recline Lever
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while driving may be
dangerous. Moving a seat while driving
could result in loss of control which could
cause a collision and serious injury or
death.
Seats should be adjusted before fastening
the seat belts and while the vehicle is
parked. Serious injury or death could result
from a poorly adjusted seat belt.
2
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 29
30 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Fold-Forward Front Passenger Seat — If
Equipped
This feature allows for extended cargo space.
When the seat is folded flat, it is an extension of
the load floor surface (allowing long cargo to fit
from the rear hatch up to the instrument panel).
The fold-forward seatback has a softback
surface that you cannot use as a work surface
when the seat is folded forward and the vehicle
is not in motion.
Pull upward on the recline lever to fold or unfold
the seat.
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats
are left folded for an extended period of time.
This is normal and by simply opening the seats
to the open position, over time the seat cushion
will return to its normal shape.
MANUAL ADJUSTMENT (REAR SEATS)
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat With
Fold-Flat Feature
To provide additional storage area, each rear
seat can be folded flat. This allows for extended
cargo space and still maintains some rear
seating room.
NOTE:
Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be neces-
sary to position the front seat to its mid-track
position. Also, be sure that the front seats are
fully upright and positioned forward. This will
allow the rear seat to fold down easily.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the
seat could cause you to lose control. Adjust
any seat only while the vehicle is parked.
WARNING!
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
top of the seatback. This could impair visibil-
ity or become a dangerous projectile in a sud-
den stop or collision.
WARNING!
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 30
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 31
To Lower The Rear Seat
1. Pull the seatback release lever located on
either side of the upper outer edge of the
seat.
Rear Seat Release Lever
2. Fold that side of the rear seatback
completely forward.
To Raise The Rear Seat
NOTE:
If interference from the cargo area prevents the
seatback from fully locking, you will have diffi-
culty returning the seat to its proper position.
Raise the seatback and lock it into place.
The release lever will show a red indicator while
in the unlocked position. Once the seat is
locked in, the red indicator will no longer be
visible.
POWER ADJUSTMENT (FRONT SEATS) —
I
F EQUIPPED
Some models may be equipped with a power
driver's seat and/or power passenger seat. The
power seat switch and power seat recliner
switch are located on the outboard side of the
seat near the floor. Use the power seat switch to
adjust seat height, angle, or forward/rearward
position. Use the power seat recline switch to
adjust the angle of the seatback.
Power Seat Switch
Forward Or Rearward Adjustment
The seat can be adjusted both forward and
rearward. Push the seat switch forward or
rearward, the seat will move in the direction of
the switch. Release the switch when the desired
position has been reached.
Height Adjustment
The height of the seats can be adjusted up or
down. Pull upward or push downward on the
seat switch, the seat will move in the direction
of the switch. Release the switch when the
desired position is reached.
1 — Seat Belt Guide
2 — Seatback Release Lever
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position the seat will not
provide the proper stability for child seats
and/or passengers. An improperly latched
seat could cause serious injury.
2
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 31
32 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Tilt Adjustment
The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted
up or down. Pull upward or push downward on
the front of the seat switch and the front of the
seat cushion will move in the direction of the
switch.
Reclining The Seatback Forward Or
Rearward
The seatback can be reclined both forward and
rearward. Push the seat recliner switch forward
or rearward. The seatback will move in the
direction of the switch. Release the switch when
the desired position has been reached.
Power Seat Recliner Switch
Power Lumbar — If Equipped
Vehicles equipped with power driver or
passenger seats may be equipped with power
lumbar. The power lumbar switch is located on
the outboard side of the power seat. Push the
switch forward to increase the lumbar support.
Push the switch rearward to decrease the
lumbar support. Pushing upward or downward
on the switch will raise and lower the position of
the support.
Power Lumbar Switch
Easy Entry/Exit Seat — If Equipped
This feature provides automatic driver seat
positioning to enhance driver mobility when
entering and exiting the vehicle.
The distance the driver seat moves depends on
where you have the driver seat positioned when
you place the vehicle’s ignition in the OFF
position.
When you place the vehicle’s ignition in the
OFF position, the driver seat will move about
2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver
seat position is greater than or equal to
2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. The seat will return to its previously set
position when you place the vehicle’s ignition
in the ACC or RUN position.
WARNING!
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that
the shoulder belt is no longer resting against
your chest. In a collision you could slide under
the seat belt, which could result in serious
injury or death.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 32
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 33
The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled
when the driver seat position is less than
0.9 of an inch (22.7 mm) forward of the rear
stop. At this position, there is no benefit to
the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit or
Easy Entry.
When enabled in Uconnect Settings, Easy Entry
and Easy Exit positions are stored in each
memory setting profile of the Driver Memory
Settings Ú page 27.
NOTE:
The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when
the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The
Easy Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later
disabled) through the programmable features
in the Uconnect Settings Ú page 139.
FRONT HEATED SEATS — IF EQUIPPED
The front heated seats control buttons are
located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control buttons through the
climate screen or the controls screen.
Press the heated seat button once to turn
the HI setting on.
Press the heated seat button a second
time to turn the LO setting on.
Press the heated seat button a third time
to turn the heating elements off.
If your vehicle is equipped with automatic
temperature controls with an integrated center
stack, or manual temperature controls, you’ll
find the heated seat switches on the switch
bank below the radio screen.
If the HI level setting is selected, the system will
automatically switch to LO level after
approximately 60 minutes of continuous
operation. At that time, the display will change
from HI to LO, indicating the change. The LO
level setting will turn off automatically after
approximately 45 minutes.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 19.
FRONT VENTILATED SEATS — IF
E
QUIPPED
Located in the seat cushion and seat back are
fans that draw the air from the passenger
compartment and move air through fine
perforations in the seat cover to help keep the
driver and front passenger cooler in higher
ambient temperatures. The fans operate at two
speeds, HI and LO.
WARNING!
Persons who are unable to feel pain to the
skin because of advanced age, chronic
illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, medica-
tion, alcohol use, exhaustion or other phys-
ical condition must exercise care when
using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if
used for long periods of time.
Do not place anything on the seat or seat-
back that insulates against heat, such as a
blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat
heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat that has
been overheated could cause serious
burns due to the increased surface
temperature of the seat.
2
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 33
34 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The front ventilated seats control buttons are
located within the Uconnect system. You can
gain access to the control buttons through the
climate screen or the controls screen.
Press the ventilated seat button once to
choose HI.
Press the ventilated seat button a second
time to choose LO.
Press the ventilated seat button a third
time to turn the ventilated seat off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the ventilated
seats to operate.
For information on use with the Remote Start
system, see Ú page 19.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk
of injury by restricting head movement in the
event of a rear impact. Head restraints should
be adjusted so that the top of the head restraint
is located above the top of your ear.
NOTE:
Do not reverse the head restraints (making the
rear of the head restraint face forward) in an
attempt to gain additional clearance to the back
of your head.
Front Head Restraint Adjustment
Your vehicle is equipped with front four way
driver and passenger head restraints.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of the head restraint, and push downward
on the head restraint.
Head Restraint Adjustment Button
To adjust the head restraint forward, pull the
top of the head restraint toward the front of the
vehicle as desired and release. To adjust the
head restraint rearward, pull the top of the head
restraint to the forward most position and
release. The head restraint will return to the
rear most position.
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only.
If either of the head restraints require removal,
see an authorized dealer.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 34
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 35
Rear Head Restraints
The rear head restraints have two positions: up
or down. When the center seat is being
occupied, the head restraint should be in the
raised position. When there is no occupant in
the center seat, the head restraint can be
lowered for maximum visibility for the driver.
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the
head restraint. To lower the head restraint,
push the adjustment button, located at the
base of the head restraint, and push downward
on the head restraint.
Outboard Head Restraint Adjustment Button
Center Head Restraint Adjustment Button
NOTE:
The head restraints should only be removed by
qualified technicians, for service purposes only.
If either of the head restraints require removal,
see an authorized dealer.
UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION
INTRODUCING VOICE RECOGNITION
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know to
control your vehicle’s Voice Recognition (VR)
system.
WARNING!
All occupants, including the driver, should
not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s
seat until the head restraints are placed in
their proper positions in order to minimize
the risk of neck injury in the event of a
crash.
Head restraints should never be adjusted
while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a
vehicle with the head restraints improperly
adjusted or removed could cause serious
injury or death in the event of a collision.
WARNING!
ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled
in the vehicle to properly protect the occu-
pants.
2
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 35
36 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
BASIC VOICE COMMANDS
The basic Voice Commands below can be given
at any point while using your Uconnect system.
Push the VR button . After the beep, say:
“Cancel” to stop a current voice session.
“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands.
“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again.
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
Voice Recognition system’s status.
GET STARTED
The VR button is used to activate /deactivate
your Voice Recognition system.
Helpful hints for using Voice Recognition:
Reduce background noise. Wind noise and
passenger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume
while facing straight ahead.
Each time you give a Voice Command, first
push the VR button, wait until after the beep,
then say your Voice Command.
You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pushing the VR button
and saying a Voice Command from the
current category.
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons
1 — Push To Start Or Answer A Phone Call And
Send Or Receive A Text
2 — Push The Voice Recognition Button To Begin
Radio, Media, And Climate Functions
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 36
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 37
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved. Mopar
and Uconnect are registered trademarks and
Mopar Owner Connect is a trademark of FCA US
LLC. Android™ is a trademark of Google Inc.
SiriusXM® and all related marks and logos are
trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
Ú page 360.
For Uconnect system support, call
1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day 7 days a
week) or visit DriveUconnect.com (US) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canada).
MIRRORS
INSIDE REARVIEW MIRROR
Manual Mirror — If Equipped
This is a single ball joint mirror that fixes to the
windshield with a counter clockwise rotation.
No tools are needed for mounting. The rearview
mirror can be adjusted left and right, or tilted up
and down. The mirror should be adjusted to
center on the view through the rear window.
Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be
reduced by moving the small control under the
mirror to the night position (toward the rear of
the vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward the
windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped
This is a single ball joint mirror that fixes to the
windshield button with a counter clockwise
rotation. No tools are needed for mounting. The
rearview mirror can be adjusted left and right, or
tilted up and down. The mirror should be
adjusted to center on the view through the rear
window.
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight
glare from vehicles behind you.
NOTE:
The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is
disabled when the vehicle is in REVERSE to
improve the driver’s rear view. If your vehicle is
equipped with an on/off button on the mirror,
the mirror will be defaulted to on and can be
turned on/off through the touchscreen.
You can turn the Automatic Dimming Mirror
feature on or off by pushing the button at the
base of the mirror (if equipped). If your vehicle
is not equipped with an on/off button, the auto
dimming feature is always on.
Automatic Dimming Button
2
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 37
38 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
ILLUMINATED VANITY MIRRORS
To access an illuminated vanity mirror, flip down
one of the visors and lift the mirror cover.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror Cover
Sun Visor “Slide-On-Rod” Feature — If
Equipped
The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for
additional flexibility in positioning the sun visor
to block out the sun.
1. Fold down the sun visor.
2. Unclip the visor from the center clip.
3. Pivot the sun visor toward the side window.
4. Extend the sun visor for additional sun
blockage.
NOTE:
The sun visor can also be extended while the
sun visor is against the windshield for additional
sun blockage through the front of the vehicle.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
The outside mirror(s) can be adjusted to the
center of the adjacent lane of traffic to achieve
the optimal view.
NOTE:
The passenger side convex outside mirror will
give a much wider view to the rear, and espe-
cially of the lane next to your vehicle.
POWER ADJUSTMENT MIRRORS
The power mirror switch is located on the
driver’s door panel.
To adjust an exterior power mirror, select the
right or left side using the mirror selector switch,
then push the mirror adjustment switch in the
desired direction indicated by the direction
arrows.
NOTE:
To adjust the power mirrors, the ignition must
be in the ON/RUN position.
Once the mirror is adjusted, rotate the
control to the neutral position to avoid acci-
dental movements.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during clean-
ing, never spray any cleaning solution directly
onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a
clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the pas-
senger side convex mirror will look smaller
and farther away than they really are. Relying
too much on your passenger side convex mir-
ror could cause you to collide with another
vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror
when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in the passenger side convex mirror.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 38
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 39
Power Mirror Switch
FOLDING MIRRORS
The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the
mirror to pivot forward or rearward to help avoid
damage. The mirror has three detent positions:
full forward, normal and full rearward.
Folding Exterior Mirror
Power Folding Mirror — If Equipped
Power folding mirrors can be folded rearward
and unfolded into the normal driving position.
The switch for the power folding mirrors is
located between the power mirror switches L
(left) and R (right). Push the switch once and the
mirrors will fold in. Push the switch a second
time and the mirrors will return to the normal
driving position.
Resetting The Power Folding Outside Mirrors
You may need to reset the power folding mirrors
if the following occurs:
The mirrors are accidentally blocked while
folding.
The mirrors are accidentally manually
folded/unfolded (by hand or by pushing the
power folding mirror switch).
The mirrors come out of the unfolded posi-
tion.
The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal
driving speeds.
To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and
unfold them by pushing the button (this may
require multiple attempts). This resets them to
their normal driving position.
Puddle Lamps — If Equipped
Located under the exterior mirrors is a small
lamp that illuminates the ground when the
doors are unlocked with the key fob or when the
doors to the vehicle are open.
HEATED MIRRORS — IF EQUIPPED
These mirrors are heated to melt frost
or ice. This feature will be activated
whenever you turn on the rear window
defroster (if equipped) Ú page 46.
1 — Mirror Selector Switch
2 — Mirror Adjustment Switch
3 — Power Folding Mirror Switch (If Equipped)
2
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 39
40 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
MULTIFUNCTION LEVER
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation
of the turn signals, headlight beam selection
and passing lights. The multifunction lever is
located on the left side of the steering column.
HEADLIGHT SWITCH
The headlight switch is located on the left side
of the instrument panel. This switch controls the
operation of the headlights, parking lights,
automatic headlights (if equipped), instrument
panel lights, interior lights, and fog lights (if
equipped).
Headlight Switch
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the
first detent for parking light and instrument
panel light operation. Rotate the headlight
switch to the second detent for headlight,
parking light and instrument panel light
operation.
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRLS) — IF
E
QUIPPED
The Daytime Running Lights will turn on when
the engine is started and remain on unless the
headlamps are turned on or the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
For vehicles sold in Canada, the Daytime
Running Lights will automatically deactivate
when the front fog lights are turned on.
On some vehicles, the Daytime Running
Lights may deactivate or reduce intensity on
one side of the vehicle (when a turn signal is
activated on that side), or on both sides of
the vehicle (when the hazard warning lights
are activated).
HIGH/LOW BEAM SWITCH
Push the multifunction lever toward the
instrument panel to switch the headlights to
high beams. Pulling the multifunction lever
back will turn the low beams on.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLAMP
C
ONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
system provides increased forward lighting at
night by automating high beam control through
the use of a digital camera mounted on the
windshield. This camera detects vehicle
1 — Rotate Headlight Control
2 — Ambient Lighting Control
3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
4 — Front Fog Light Switch
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 40
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 41
specific light and automatically switches from
high beams to low beams until the approaching
vehicle is out of view.
NOTE:
The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control
can be turned on or off through Uconnect
Settings Ú page 139.
Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and
taillights of vehicles in the field of view will
cause headlights to remain on longer (closer
to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and other
obstructions on the windshield or camera
lens will cause the system to function improp-
erly.
FLASH-TO-PASS
You can signal another vehicle with your
headlights by lightly pulling the multifunction
lever toward you. This will cause the high beam
headlights to turn on, and remain on, until the
lever is released.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
This system automatically turns the headlights
on or off according to ambient light levels. To
turn the system on, rotate the headlight switch
clockwise to the last detent for automatic
headlight operation. When the system is on, the
headlight time delay feature is also on. This
means the headlights will stay on for up to
90 seconds after you place the ignition into the
OFF position. To turn the automatic system off,
move the headlight switch out of the AUTO
position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
HEADLIGHT TIME DELAY
To assist when exiting the vehicle, the headlight
delay feature will leave the headlights on for up
to 90 seconds.
To activate the delay feature, place the ignition
in the OFF position while the headlights are still
on. Then, turn off the headlights within 45
seconds. The delay interval begins when the
headlight switch is turned off.
Headlight delay can be cancelled by either
turning the headlights or parking lights on, or
placing the ignition in the ACC or RUN position.
If you turn the headlights off before the ignition,
they will turn off in the normal manner.
NOTE:
The lights must be turned off within 45
seconds of placing the ignition in the OFF
position to activate this feature. If the head-
light switch is in the AUTO position prior to
placing the ignition in the OFF position, there
is no need to turn the headlight switch to off
to activate Headlight Delay.
The headlight delay timing is programmable
through Uconnect Settings Ú page 139.
LIGHTS-ON REMINDER
If the headlights or parking lights are on after
the ignition is in the OFF position, a chime will
sound to alert the driver when the driver's door
is opened.
2
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 41
42 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
FOG LIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED
The front fog light switch is built into the
headlight switch.
Fog Light Switch
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and
push the fog light button. To turn off the front
fog lights, either push the fog lights button a
second time or turn off the headlight switch.
An indicator light in the instrument cluster
illuminates when the fog lights are turned on.
NOTE:
The fog lights will operate with the low beam
headlights or parking lights on. However,
selecting the high beam headlights will turn off
the fog lights.
TURN SIGNALS
Move the multifunction lever up or down to
activate the turn signals. The arrows on each
side of the instrument cluster display flash to
show proper operation.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash,
or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a
defective outside light bulb.
A “Turn Signal On” message will appear in the
instrument cluster display and a continuous
chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more
than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either turn signal
on.
LANE CHANGE ASSIST
Lightly push the multifunction lever up or down,
without moving beyond the detent, and the turn
signal will flash three times then automatically
turn off.
BATTERY SAVER FEATURE
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn
off automatically 15 minutes after the ignition
switch is placed in the OFF position. This will
occur if the interior lights were switched on
manually or are on because a door is open.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
INTERIOR COURTESY LIGHTS
Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when
the front doors are opened, or when the dimmer
control is rotated to its farthest upward position.
The front map/reading lights are turned on by
the switches in the center of the overhead
console.
Overhead Light Switches
To protect the battery, the interior lights will turn
off automatically 15 minutes after the ignition is
placed in the OFF position. This will occur if the
interior lights were turned on manually or are on
because a door is open. This includes the glove
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 42
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 43
compartment light and the cargo area light. To
restore interior light operation, either place the
ignition in the ON/RUN position, or push the
light switch on and then back off.
Instrument Panel Dimmer Control
The instrument panel dimmer control is part of
the headlight switch and is located on the
driver’s side of the instrument panel.
Rotating the instrument panel dimmer up or
down will adjust the brightness of the
instrument panel lights ONLY when the parking
lights or headlights are turned on, AND ONLY if
the built in cluster light sensor determines that
the ambient light levels are low enough that the
backlighting should be enabled.
Instrument Panel Dimmer
Ambient Light Control — If Equipped
Rotate the ambient dimmer control upward or
downward to increase or decrease the
brightness of the ambient light located in the
overhead console, door handle lights, lights
under the instrument panel, door map pocket
lights, and cubby bin lights.
Ambient lights are only enabled when the
headlights are active.
Ambient Light/Door Handle Light Dimmer
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer controls are
located on the windshield wiper/washer lever
on the right side of the steering column. The
front wipers are operated by rotating a switch,
located on the end of the lever. For information
on the rear wiper/washer, see Ú page 45.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
WINDSHIELD WIPER OPERATION
Rotate the end of the lever to one of the first two
detent positions for intermittent settings. The
first intermittent wiper interval is 10 seconds.
The second intermittent wipe interval is based
on vehicle speed. Rotate to the third detent for
low wiper operation and the fourth detent for
high wiper operation.
2
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 43
44 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Operation
Windshield Washer Operation
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled
while in the intermittent setting, the wipers will
turn on and operate for several wipe cycles after
the lever is released, and then resume the
intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in the
off position, the wipers will operate for several
wipe cycles, then turn off.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if
the switch is held for more than 20 to 30
seconds. Once the lever is released the pump
will resume normal operation.
Mist
Push the lever upward to the MIST position and
release for a single wiping cycle.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed
on the windshield. The wash function must be
used in order to spray the windshield with
washer fluid.
For information on wiper care and replacement,
see Ú page 305.
RAIN SENSING WIPERS — IF EQUIPPED
This feature senses rain or snow fall on the
windshield and automatically activates the
wipers. Rotate the end of the multifunction
lever to one of two detent positions to activate
this feature.
The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted
with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay
position one is the least sensitive, and wiper
delay position two is the most sensitive. Place
the wiper switch in the O (off) position when not
using the system.
NOTE:
The Rain Sensing feature will not operate
when the wiper switch is in the low or
high-speed position.
The Rain Sensing feature may not function
properly when ice, or dried salt water is
present on the windshield.
CAUTION!
Always remove any buildup of snow that pre-
vents the windshield wiper blades from
returning to the “park” position. If the wind-
shield wiper switch is turned off, and the
blades cannot return to the “park” position,
damage to the wiper motor may occur.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the wind-
shield could lead to a collision. You might not
see other vehicles or other obstacles. To
avoid sudden icing of the windshield during
freezing weather, warm the windshield with
the defroster before and during windshield
washer use.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 44
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 45
Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or
silicone may reduce Rain Sensing perfor-
mance.
The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on
and off through Uconnect Settings
Ú page 139.
The Rain Sensing system has protection
features for the wiper blades and arms, and will
not operate under the following conditions:
Change In Ignition Position — If the vehicle is
in Rain Sensing mode and the ignition is
cycled from OFF to ON, the auto wiper will be
suppressed until vehicle speed is greater
than 3 mph (5 km/h), or the wiper switch is
moved out of and back into the Intermittent
wipe position.
Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — The
Rain Sensing system will not operate if the
NEUTRAL gear is selected at speeds of
3 mph (5 km/h) or less unless the wiper
switch is moved or the gear selector is moved
out of NEUTRAL.
Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles
equipped with Remote Starting system, Rain
Sensing wipers are not operational when the
vehicle is in the remote start mode. Once the
operator is in the vehicle and has placed the
ignition switch in the ON/RUN position, Rain
Sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has
been selected, and no other inhibit condi-
tions (mentioned previously) exist.
REAR WINDOW WIPER/WASHER
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on
the windshield wiper/washer lever on the right
side of the steering column. The rear wiper/
washer is operated by rotating a switch, located
at the middle of the lever.
The rear wiper/washer controls are located on
the windshield wiper/washer lever on the right
side of the steering column. The rear wiper has
different operation modes:
Intermittent mode
Synchronous mode (at half speed of the front
window wiper) when the front window wiper
is operating
Continuous mode
Vehicle in REVERSE: If the front wiper is
active and the REVERSE gear is selected, the
wiper will turn on for one wipe
Rotate the center portion of the lever
upward to the first detent for
intermittent operation and to the
second detent for continuous rear
wiper operation.
To use the washer, push the lever
forward and hold while spray is
desired. If the lever is pushed while
the wiper is in the off position, the
wiper will operate for several wipe cycles, then
turn off.
If the lever is pushed while in the intermittent
setting, the wiper will turn on and operate for
several wipe cycles after the end of the lever is
released, and then resume the intermittent
interval previously selected.
NOTE:
As a protective measure, the pump will stop if the
switch is held for more than 20 to 30 seconds.
Once the lever is released the pump will resume
normal operation.
2
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 45
46 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
WINDSHIELD WIPER DE-ICER — IF
E
QUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Windshield
Wiper De-Icer feature that may be activated
under the following conditions:
Activation By Front Defrost — The Windshield
Wiper De-Icer shall be activated automati-
cally in the case of a cold weather manual
start with full front defrost, and when the
ambient temperature is below 41°F (5°C).
Activation By Rear Defrost — The Windshield
Wiper De-Icer shall be activated automati-
cally when the rear defrost is turned on and
when the ambient temperature is below
41°F (5°C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation (If
Equipped) — When remote start is active and
the outside ambient temperature is less than
41°F (5°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer
shall be enabled. On exiting remote start
resume previous operation except, if the
Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and opera-
tion shall continue.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
The Climate Control system allows you to
regulate the temperature, air flow, and direction
of air circulating throughout the vehicle. The
controls are located on the touchscreen (if
equipped) and on the instrument panel below
the radio.
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
D
ESCRIPTIONS AND FUNCTIONS
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Automatic Climate
Controls
Uconnect 4/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Automatic
Climate Controls
MAX A/C Button
Press and release the MAX A/C button
on the touchscreen to change the
current setting to the coldest output
of air. The MAX A/C indicator
illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the
button again will cause the MAX A/C operation
to exit. Pressing other settings will cause the
MAX A/C to exit.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the
touchscreen.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 46
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 47
A/C Button
Press and release the A/C button on
the touchscreen, or push the button
on the faceplate to change the
current setting. The A/C indicator
illuminates when A/C is ON.
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to manually activate or deactivate the
air conditioning system. When the air
conditioning system is turned on, dehumidified
air will flow through the outlets into the cabin.
If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C
condenser (located in front of the radiator), for
an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a
gentle water spray from the front of the radiator
and through the condenser. If the problem
persists, please contact an authorized dealer.
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on
the faceplate, to change the system
between recirculation mode and
outside air mode. The Recirculation indicator
and the A/C indicator illuminate when the
Recirculation button is pressed. Recirculation
can be used when outside conditions such as
smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are
present. Recirculation can be used in all modes.
Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the
touchscreen grayed out) if conditions exist that
could create fogging on the inside of the
windshield. The A/C can be deselected
manually without disturbing the mode control
selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation
mode may make the inside air stuffy and
window fogging may occur. Extended use of this
mode is not recommended.
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may
lead to excessive window fogging. The
Recirculation feature may be unavailable if
conditions exist that could create fogging on the
inside of the windshield.
AUTO Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push the button on the
faceplate, to change the current
setting. The AUTO indicator illuminates
when AUTO is on. This feature automatically
controls the interior cabin temperature by
adjusting distribution and amount of airflow.
Toggling this function will cause the system to
switch between manual override mode and
automatic modes Ú page 49.
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the touchscreen
button, or push and release the
button on the faceplate, to change
the current airflow setting to Defrost
mode. The Front Defrost indicator illuminates
when Front Defrost is on. Air comes from the
windshield and side window demist outlets.
When the defrost button is selected, the blower
level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best
windshield and side window defrosting and
defogging. When toggling the front defrost
mode button, the Climate Control system will
return to the previous setting.
Rear Defrost Button
Press and release the button on the
touchscreen, or push and release the
button on the faceplate, to turn on the
rear window defroster and the heated
outside mirrors (if equipped). The Rear Defrost
indicator illuminates when the rear window
defroster is on. The rear window defroster
automatically turns off after 10 minutes.
2
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 47
48 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
Driver And Passenger Temperature
Control Buttons
These buttons provide the driver and passenger
with independent temperature control.
Push the red button on the faceplate
or touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the red
arrow button on the touchscreen for
warmer temperature settings.
Push the blue button on the faceplate
or touchscreen or press and slide the
temperature bar towards the blue
arrow button on the touchscreen for
cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the
touchscreen to toggle the Sync
feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is
illuminated when SYNC is on. SYNC is
used to synchronize the passenger temperature
setting with the driver temperature setting.
Changing the passenger temperature setting
while in SYNC will automatically exit this
feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touch-
screen.
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the
amount of air forced through the
Climate Control system. There are
seven blower speeds available.
Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode
to switch to manual operation. The speeds can
be selected using either the blower control knob
on the faceplate or the buttons on the
touchscreen.
Faceplate
The blower speed increases as you turn the
blower control knob clockwise from the lowest
blower setting. The blower speed decreases as
you turn the blower control knob
counterclockwise.
Touchscreen
Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower
setting and the large blower icon to increase the
blower setting. Blower can also be selected by
pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Mode Control
Mode Control regulates the airflow
distribution. The airflow distribution
outlets are: instrument panel outlets,
floor outlets, defrost outlets, and
demist outlets.
Faceplate
Push the Mode Button to change the airflow
distribution mode.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
Use care when washing the inside of the
rear window. Do not use abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the
window. Use a soft cloth and a mild
washing solution, wiping parallel to the
heating elements. Labels can be peeled off
after soaking with warm water.
Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or
abrasive window cleaners on the interior
surface of the window.
Keep all objects a safe distance from the
window.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 48
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 49
Touchscreen
Press one of the “MODE” buttons to change the
airflow distribution mode.
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the
instrument panel. Each of these
outlets can be individually adjusted to
direct the flow of air. The air vanes of
the center outlets and outboard outlets can be
moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel
located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust
the amount of airflow from these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel
outlets and floor outlets. A slight
amount of air is directed through the
defrost and side window demister
outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort condi-
tions to provide cooler air out of the panel
outlets and warmer air from the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A
slight amount of air is directed
through the defrost, side window
demister outlets, and panel outboard
outlets.
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor,
defrost, and side window demister
outlets. This setting works best in cold
or snowy conditions that require extra
heat to the windshield. This setting is good for
maintaining comfort while reducing moisture on
the windshield. A slight amount of air is also
directed through the panel outboard outlets.
Climate Control OFF Button
Press and release this button on the
touchscreen, or push and release the
button on the faceplate to turn the
Climate Control ON/OFF.
AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL
(ATC)
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate, or
the AUTO button on the touchscreen (if
equipped) on the Automatic Temperature
Control (ATC) Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would like
the system to maintain by adjusting the
temperature control buttons. Once the
desired temperature is displayed, the
system achieves and automatically
maintains that comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system to
function automatically.
2
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 49
50 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort
as quickly as possible.
The temperature can be displayed in US or
Metric units by selecting the US/Metric
customer-programmable feature.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the
blower fan remains on low until the engine
warms up. The blower increases in speed and
transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of manual
override features. The AUTO symbol in the front
ATC display will be turned off when the system
is being used in the manual mode.
CLIMATE VOICE COMMANDS
Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-free and
keep everyone comfortable while you keep
moving ahead.
Push the VR button on the steering wheel. After
the beep, say one of the following commands:
“Set the driver temperature to 70 degrees”
“Set the passenger temperature to
70 degrees”
Did You Know: Voice Command for Climate may
only be used to adjust the interior temperature
of your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to
adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if
equipped.
OPERATING TIPS
NOTE:
Refer to the chart at the end of this section for
suggested control settings for various weather
conditions.
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide
proper corrosion protection and to protect
against engine overheating. OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and
defroster performance, make sure the engine
cooling system is functioning properly and the
proper amount, type, and concentration of
coolant is used. Use of the Air Recirculation
mode during Winter months is not
recommended, because it may cause window
fogging.
Vacation/Storage
For information on maintaining the Climate
Control system when the vehicle is being stored
for an extended period of time, see
Ú page 346.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear the
windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use the
Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstructions,
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air
intake may reduce airflow, and if they enter the
plenum, they could plug the water drains. In
Winter months, make sure the air intake is clear
of ice, slush, and snow.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 50
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 51
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust and
pollen from the air. Contact an authorized
dealer to service your cabin air filter, and to
have it replaced when needed.
Stop/Start System — If Equipped
While in an Autostop, the Climate Control
system may automatically adjust airflow to
maintain cabin comfort. Customer settings will
be maintained upon return to an engine running
condition.
Windshield Wiper De-Icer — If Equipped
The windshield wiper de-icer is a heating
element located at the base of the windshield.
It operates automatically once the following
conditions are met:
Activation By Front Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically
during a cold weather manual start with full
defrost, and when the ambient temperature
is below 41°F (5°C).
Activation By Rear Defrost
The wiper de-icer activates automatically
when the Rear Defrost is operating and the
ambient temperature is below 41°F (5°C).
Activation By Remote Start Operation
When the Remote Start is activated and the
outside ambient temperature is less than
41°F (5°C) the windshield wiper de-icer is
activated. Upon exiting Remote Start, the
climate control functions will resume their
previous operation except, if the de-icer is
active, the de-icer timer and operation will
continue.
Operating Tips Chart
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
Hot Weather And
Vehicle Interior Is Very
Hot
Set the mode control
to (Panel Mode) ,
(A/C) on, and
blower on high. Roll
down the windows for
a minute to flush out
the hot air. Adjust the
controls as needed to
achieve comfort.
Warm Weather
Turn (A/C) on and
set the mode control
to the (Panel Mode)
position.
Cool Sunny
Operate in (Bi-Level
Mode) position.
Cool & Humid Condi-
tions
Set the mode control
to (Floor Mode)
position and turn on
(A/C) to keep win-
dows clear.
Cold Weather
Set the mode control
to the (Floor Mode)
position. If wind-
shield fogging starts
to occur, move the
control to the (Mix
Mode) position.
WEATHER
CONTROL
SETTINGS
2
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 51
52 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
INTERIOR STORAGE AND EQUIPMENT
STORAGE
Glove Compartment
The glove compartment is located on the
passenger side of the instrument panel.
Glove Compartment
To open the glove compartment, pull the
release handle.
Console Storage Compartment
To open, pull up on the latch and lift the cover.
Center Console
The center console has a storage area which
can hold cell phones, PDAs, and other small
items. The center console can slide forward and
rearward for comfort.
USB/AUX C ONTROL
There is a USB and AUX Jack in the center
console. This feature allows an external device
to be plugged into the USB or AUX ports.
Center Console USB Port
If equipped, there may also be another USB port
located on the back of the center console.
The USB port allows interaction with a
connected smartphone via Android Auto™ or
Apple CarPlay® if the vehicle is equipped with a
Uconnect 4/4C NAV. The port is for charge only
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a glove com-
partment in the open position. Driving with
the glove compartment open may result in
injury in a collision.
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with a console
compartment lid in the open position. Driving
with the console compartment lid open may
result in injury in a collision.
1 — USB Port
2 — AUX Jack
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 52
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 53
(Continued)
if the vehicle is equipped with a Uconnect 4 with
7-inch Display, or Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With
8.4-inch Display.
Charge Only USB Port
POWER OUTLETS
Your vehicle is equipped with 12 Volt (13 Amp)
power outlets that can be used to power cellular
phones, small electronics and other low
powered electrical accessories. The power
outlets are labeled with either a “key” or a
“battery” symbol to indicate how the outlet is
powered. Power outlets labeled with a “key” are
powered when the ignition is in the ON or ACC
position, while the outlets labeled with a
“battery” are connected directly to the battery
and powered at all times.
NOTE:
All accessories connected to the “battery”
powered outlets should be removed or turned
off when the vehicle is not in use to protect the
battery against discharge.
The front power outlet is located on the center
stack of the instrument panel.
Front Power Outlet
In addition to the front power outlet, there may
also be a power outlet located in the rear cargo
area, if equipped.
Rear Cargo Area Power Outlet — If Equipped
NOTE:
If equipped, the rear cargo area power outlet
can be switched from “ignition” only to constant
“battery” powered all the time. See an autho-
rized dealer for details.
CAUTION!
Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object in
the power outlets as this will damage the out-
let and blow the fuse. Improper use of the
power outlet can cause damage not covered
by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Only devices designed for use in this type of
outlet should be inserted into any 12 Volt
outlet.
2
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 53
54 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet
located on the back of the center console to
convert DC current to AC current. This outlet can
power cellular phones, electronics and other
low power devices requiring power up to
150 Watts. Certain high-end game consoles will
exceed this power limit, as will most power
tools.
Power Inverter Location
To turn on the power inverter outlet, simply plug
in the device. The outlet automatically turns off
when the device is unplugged.
The power inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter will
automatically shut down. Once the electrical
device has been removed from the outlet the
inverter should automatically reset. To avoid
overloading the circuit, check the power ratings
on electrical devices prior to using the inverter.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use and while
driving the vehicle.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery, even
when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.).
Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle's battery will discharge sufficiently
to degrade battery life and/or prevent the
engine from starting.
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will
degrade the battery even more quickly.
Only use these intermittently and with
greater caution.
WARNING! (Continued)
After the use of high power draw accesso-
ries, or long periods of the vehicle not being
started (with accessories still plugged in),
the vehicle must be driven a sufficient
length of time to allow the generator to
recharge the vehicle's battery.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 54
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 55
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOW CONTROLS
The window controls on the driver's door control
all the door windows.
Power Window Controls
The passenger door windows can also be
operated by using the single window controls on
the passenger door trim panel. The window
controls will operate only when the ignition is in
the ON/RUN position.
To open the window part way, push the window
switch down briefly and release it when you
want the window to stop.
NOTE:
The power window switches will remain active
for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is placed
in the OFF position. Opening either front door
will cancel this feature.
The time is programmable within Uconnect
Settings Ú page 139.
AUTOMATIC WINDOW FEATURES
Auto-Down Feature
The driver and front passenger door power
window switches have an Auto-Down feature.
Push the window switch down for a short period
of time, then release, and the window will go
down automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way down
during the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the
switch briefly.
Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection
Lift the window switch up for a short period of
time and release; the window will go up
automatically.
To stop the window from going all the way up
during the Auto-Up operation, push down on the
switch briefly.
To close the window part way, lift the window
switch briefly and release it when you want the
window to stop.
If the window runs into any obstacle during
auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then
go back down. Remove the obstacle and use
the window switch again to close the window.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
Do not insert any objects into the recepta-
cles.
Do not touch with wet hands.
Close the lid when not in use.
If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a vehicle.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle or
in a location accessible to children, and do not
leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with
Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. Occu-
pants, particularly unattended children, can
become entrapped by the windows while oper-
ating the power window switches. Such entrap-
ment may result in serious injury or death.
2
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 55
56 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
Any impact due to rough road conditions may
trigger the auto-reverse function unexpectedly
during auto-closure. If this happens, pull the
switch lightly and hold to close the window
manually.
RESET AUTO-UP
Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the
window probably needs to be reset. To reset
Auto-Up:
1. Pull the window switch up to close the
window completely and continue to hold
the switch up for an additional two seconds
after the window is closed.
2. Push the window switch down firmly to open
the window completely and continue to hold
the switch down for an additional two
seconds after the window is fully open.
WINDOW LOCKOUT SWITCH
The window lockout switch on the driver's door
trim panel allows you to disable the window
controls on the rear passenger doors. To
disable the window controls, push and release
the window lockout switch (the indicator light on
the switch will turn on). To enable the window
controls, push and release the window lockout
switch again (the indicator light on the switch
will turn off).
Window Lockout Switch
WIND BUFFETING
Wind buffeting can be described as the
perception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your vehicle
may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows
down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open
or partially open positions. This is a normal
occurrence and can be minimized. If the
buffeting occurs with the rear windows open,
open the front and rear windows together to
minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof
opening to minimize the buffeting or open any
window.
POWER SUNROOF WITH POWER SHADE —
IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switches are located between
the sun visors on the overhead console.
Power Sunroof Switches
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. To avoid personal
injury be sure to clear your arms, hands, fin-
gers and all objects from the window path
before closing.
1 — Power Shade Switch
2 — Front Panel Open/Close Switch
3 — Front Panel Vent Switch
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 56
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 57
(Continued)
OPENING AND CLOSING THE SUNROOF
The sunroof has two programmed open
positions, comfort stop position and full open
position. The comfort stop position has been
optimized to minimize wind buffeting when
driving with side windows closed and sunroof
open. If the sunshade is in the closed position
when initiating a sunroof open or vent
command the sunshade will automatically open
to the half open position prior to the sunroof
opening.
Express Open/Close
Push the switch to open and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will open to the
comfort stop (partially opened) position and
automatically stop. Push the switch and release
it again, and the sunroof will open to the full
open position then automatically stop.
Pull the switch to close and release it within
one-half second and the sunroof will completely
close automatically from any position.
During Express Open or Express Close
operation, any movement of the sunroof switch
will stop the sunroof.
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the switch to open. The sunroof
will open to the comfort stop (partially opened)
position and automatically stop. Push the
switch and hold it again, and the sunroof will
open to the full open position then
automatically stop.
Pull and hold the switch to completely close the
sunroof from any position.
Any release of the switch during open or close
operation will stop the sunroof movement. The
sunroof will remain in a partially opened
position until the switch is operated and held
again.
VENTING SUNROOF
Push and release the vent switch within
one-half second and the sunroof will move from
the closed position to the vent position. This is
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near
the vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children. Do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particu-
larly unattended children, can become
entrapped by the power sunroof while oper-
ating the power sunroof switch. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
In a collision, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof.
You could also be seriously injured or killed.
Always fasten your seat belt properly and
make sure all passengers are also properly
secured.
Do not allow small children to operate the
sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other
body parts, or any object, to project through
the sunroof opening. Injury may result.
Do not use the sunroof and its related parts
for supporting and/or grabbing purposes.
Serious personal injury may result to
fingers and other body parts as well as
damage to the sunroof.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 57
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
called “Express Vent.” During Express Vent
operation, any movement of the switch will stop
the sunroof.
NOTE:
When the sunroof is in a full open or a partial
open position, Express Vent operation is not
available. You must push and hold the vent
switch to cycle the sunroof from a slide open
position to the vent position. Sunroof move-
ment will stop if the switch is released prior to
the sunroof reaching the vent position.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE POWER
S
UNSHADE
The sunshade has two programmed open
positions: half open and full open. When
opening the sunshade from the closed position,
the sunshade will always stop at the half open
position regardless of express or manual
operation. The switch must be pushed again to
continue on to full open position.
Express Open/Close
Push the sunshade switch to open and release
it within one-half second and the sunshade will
open to the half open position and stop
automatically. Push the switch and release it
again, and the sunshade will open to the full
open position and stop automatically.
Pull the sunshade switch to close and release it
within one-half second. If the sunroof is in
closed position, the sunshade will full close
automatically from any position. If the sunroof is
open or vented, the sunshade cannot be closed
beyond the half open position. Pulling the
sunshade switch when the sunshade is in the
half open position will automatically close
sunroof prior to the sunshade closing.
During Express Open or Express Close
operation, any movement of the sunshade
switch will stop the shade.
Manual Open/Close
Push and hold the sunshade switch to open.
The sunshade will open to the half open
position and stop automatically. Push and hold
the switch again, and the sunshade will open to
the full open position.
Pull and hold the sunshade switch to close. If
the sunroof is in closed position, the sunshade
will fully close from any position. If the sunroof
is open or vented, the sunshade will close to the
half open position and stop. Pulling and holding
the switch again will close both the sunroof and
sunshade completely.
Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunshade will remain in a
partially opened position until the switch is
pushed again.
PINCH PROTECT FEATURE
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
opening of the sunroof during Express Close
operation. If an obstruction in the path of the
sunroof is detected, the sunroof will
automatically retract. Remove the obstruction if
this occurs. Next, pull the sunroof close switch
and release to Express Close.
NOTE:
If three consecutive sunroof close attempts
result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect
will disable and the sunroof must be closed in
Manual Mode.
SUNROOF MAINTENANCE
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth
to clean the glass panel. Periodically check for
and clear out any debris that may have
collected in the tracks.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 58
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 59
HOOD
OPENING THE HOOD
Two latches must be released to open the hood.
1. Pull the hood release lever located
underneath the driver’s side of the
instrument panel.
Hood Release Location (Underneath Instrument Panel)
2. Move to the outside of the vehicle. The
safety latch release lever is located behind
the front edge of the hood at the center.
Reach in at the center of the hood with a
palm facing the ground. Once contact is
made with the safety latch release lever,
push it toward the passenger side of the
vehicle to fully release the hood.
Hood Safety Latch Release Lever Location
CLOSING THE HOOD
Hoods equipped with gas props are closed from
the point where the props no longer hold the
hood open.
LIFTGATE
UNLOCK/OPEN THE LIFTGATE
The liftgate may be released in one of several
ways:
Key fob
Outside handle
Button on overhead console
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before driv-
ing your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is in
motion and block your vision. Failure to follow
this warning could result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the
hood to close it. Lower hood to approximately
12 inches (30 cm) and drop the hood to
close. Make sure hood is fully closed for both
latches. Never drive vehicle unless hood is
fully closed, with both latches engaged.
2
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 59
60 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
The overhead console switch and key fob (if
equipped) will release the liftgate when the
liftgate is unlocked or locked. The outside
handle requires the liftgate to be unlocked.
Liftgate Entry
To Unlock The Liftgate
Use the key fob or the interior door unlock
button on the door panel to unlock the liftgate.
The manual door locks on the doors will not
unlock the liftgate.
LOCK/CLOSE THE LIFTGATE
To manually close the liftgate, grab the liftgate
closing handle and pull in a downward motion to
close the liftgate.
Liftgate Pull Handle/Closing Liftgate
NOTE:
Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in
possession of the key because the liftgate may
be locked.
To Lock The Liftgate
Use the key fob or the interior door lock button
on the door panel to lock the liftgate. The
manual door locks on the doors will not lock the
liftgate.
POWER LIFTGATE — IF EQUIPPED
The power liftgate may be opened by
pushing the liftgate button on the key
fob. Push the liftgate button on the
key fob twice within five seconds to
open or close the power liftgate. You can also
open the liftgate by pushing the electronic
liftgate release handle Ú page 22.
Using any of the above ways:
When the liftgate is fully closed, the liftgate
will open.
When the liftgate is fully open, the liftgate will
close.
When the liftgate is moving, the liftgate will
reverse.
The power liftgate may also be opened or closed
by pushing the liftgate button located on the
front overhead console. If the liftgate is fully
open, the liftgate can be closed by pushing the
liftgate button located on the left rear trim
panel. If the liftgate is in motion, pushing the
button again will reverse the liftgate.
When the liftgate button on the key fob is
pushed two times, the turn signals will flash
twice to signal that the liftgate is opening or
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poi-
sonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You
and your passengers could be injured by
these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed when
you are operating the vehicle.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 60
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 61
(Continued)
closing, and an audible chime can be heard (if
enabled in the Uconnect Settings Ú page 139).
The key fob and the overhead console switch
will open the liftgate when the liftgate is locked.
The outside handle requires the liftgate to be
unlocked. If the vehicle is equipped with
Passive Entry, and a valid Passive Entry key fob
is within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the liftgate, pulling the
outside handle will unlock and open the liftgate.
NOTE:
Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in
possession of the key because the liftgate
may be locked.
Use the interior door lock/unlock button on
the door panel or the key fob to lock and
unlock the liftgate. The manual door locks on
the doors and the exterior door lock cylinder
will not lock and unlock the liftgate.
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is
programmed in Uconnect Settings, all doors
will unlock with a handle activation. If
“Unlock Driver Door 1st Press” is
programmed in Uconnect Settings, only the
liftgate will unlock.
The power liftgate buttons will not operate if
the vehicle is in gear or the vehicle speed is
above 0 mph (0 km/h).
The power liftgate will not operate in
temperatures below −22°F (−30°C) or
temperatures above 150°F (65°C). Be sure
to remove any buildup of snow or ice from the
liftgate before pushing any of the power lift-
gate switches.
If anything obstructs the power liftgate while
it is closing or opening, the liftgate will auto-
matically reverse to the closed or open posi-
tion. After multiple obstructions in the same
cycle, the liftgate will automatically stop and
must be opened or closed manually.
There are also pinch sensors attached to the
side of the liftgate. Light pressure anywhere
along these strips will cause the liftgate to
return to the open position.
The power liftgate must be in the full open
position in order for the rear liftgate close
button, on the left rear trim near the liftgate
opening, to operate. If the liftgate is not fully
open, push the liftgate button on the key fob
to fully open the liftgate and then push it
again to close.
If the electronic liftgate release handle is
pushed a second time while the power lift-
gate is opening, the liftgate motor will disen-
gage to allow manual operation.
If your liftgate is power closing and you put
the vehicle in gear, the liftgate will continue
to power close. However, vehicle movement
may result in the detection of an obstruction.
Lock The Vehicle
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Passive Entry
lock button located to the right of the electronic
liftgate release handle will lock the vehicle.
WARNING!
Driving with the liftgate open can allow
poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle.
You and your passengers could be injured
by these fumes. Keep the liftgate closed
when you are operating the vehicle.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are
closed, and the climate control blower
switch is set at high speed. Do not use the
recirculation mode.
2
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 61
62 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Load Floor
The cargo load floor system has a load capacity
of 400 lbs (181 kg).
Cargo Load Floor Positions
The cargo load floor can be adjusted to three
different levels to create more space in the
cargo area. These positions are: upper, center,
and lower.
NOTE:
The lower position is not available in vehicles
equipped with either a compact spare tire, or a
full size spare tire. The center position is not
available in vehicles equipped with a full size
spare tire.
To change the level of the load floor, pull
upward on the load floor handle, pull the floor
outward, and place the back of the floor into the
desired position. Lower the front of the floor into
place.
Cargo Load Floor Positions
Raising The Load Floor
To raise the load floor for access to the Tire
Service Kit, or spare tire (if equipped), pull
upward on the load floor handle.
Do not raise the floor beyond the point of
resistance. In vehicles equipped with a power
liftgate, forcing the floor upward can damage
the floor and vehicle’s trim panel.
Raised Load Floor — (Power Liftgate)
To fully raise the load floor, pull upward on the
floor handle, pull the floor outward, then
position the floor upright with the bottom fitting
on top of the floor positioning brackets. Push
the top of the floor down firmly to secure it in
this position.
During power operation, personal injury or
cargo damage may occur. Ensure the lift-
gate travel path is clear. Make sure the lift-
gate is closed and latched before driving
away.
Personal injury or cargo damage may occur
if caught in the path of the liftgate. Make
sure the liftgate path is clear before acti-
vating the liftgate
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — Upper Position
2 — Center Position
3 — Lower Position
1 — Raised Floor Maximum Height
2 — Raised Load Floor
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 62
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 63
(Continued)
Fully Raised Load Floor Position
To provide additional storage area, each rear
seat can be folded flat. This allows for extended
cargo space and still maintains some rear
seating room Ú page 28.
Cargo Tie-Down Hooks And Loops
The tie-downs located on the cargo area floor
should be used to secure loads safely when the
vehicle is moving.
Cargo tie-down loops are located on the trim
panels.
Rear Storage Bins
The rear storage bins are located in the rear of
the vehicle on the sides of the load floor.
Rear Storage Bin
WARNING!
Cargo tie-downs are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or
accident, a tie-down could pull loose and
allow the child seat to come loose. A child
could be badly injured. Use only the
anchors provided for child seat tethers.
To help protect against personal injury,
passengers should not be seated in the
rear cargo area. The rear cargo space is
intended for load carrying purposes only,
not for passengers, who should sit in seats
and use seat belts.
The weight and position of cargo and passen-
gers can change the vehicle center of gravity
and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control
resulting in personal injury, follow these
guidelines for loading your vehicle:
Do not carry loads that exceed the load
limits described on the label attached to
the left door or left door center pillar.
Always place cargo evenly on the cargo
floor. Put heavier objects as low and as far
forward as possible.
Place as much cargo as possible in front of
the rear axle. Too much weight or improp-
erly placed weight over or behind the rear
axle can cause the vehicle to sway.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
top of the seatback. This could impair visi-
bility or become a dangerous projectile in a
sudden stop or accident.
WARNING! (Continued)
2
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 63
64 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
(Continued)
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The load carried on the roof, when equipped
with a luggage rack, must not exceed 150 lbs
(68 kg), and it should be uniformly distributed
over the cargo area.
Crossbars should always be used whenever
cargo is placed on the roof rack. Check the
straps frequently to be sure that the load
remains securely attached.
NOTE:
Crossbars can be purchased at your authorized
dealer through Mopar parts.
External racks do not increase the total load
carrying capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the
total occupant and luggage load inside the
vehicle, plus the load on the luggage rack, do
not exceed the maximum vehicle load capacity.
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied down before driv-
ing your vehicle. Improperly secured loads
can fly off the vehicle, particularly at high
speeds, resulting in personal injury or prop-
erty damage. Follow the roof rack cautions
when carrying cargo on your roof rack.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the roof rack and
vehicle, do not exceed the maximum roof
rack load capacity. Always distribute heavy
loads as evenly as possible and secure the
load appropriately.
Long loads, which extend over the wind-
shield, should be secured to both the front
and rear of the vehicle.
Place a blanket or other protection
between the surface of the roof and the
load.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners
carefully when carrying large or heavy loads
on the roof rack. Wind forces, due to
natural causes or nearby truck traffic, can
add sudden upward lift. It is recommended
to not carry large flat loads, such as wood
panels or surfboards, which may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
Load should always be secured to cross-
bars first, with tie down loops used as addi-
tional securing points if needed. Tie loops
are intended as supplementary tie down
points only. Do not use ratcheting mecha-
nisms with the tie loops. Check the straps
frequently to be sure that the load remains
securely attached.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 64
65
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
Base Instrument Cluster
3
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 65
66 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Premium Instrument Cluster
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 66
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 67
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Tachometer
Indicates the engine speed in revolutions
per minute (RPM x 1000).
2. Instrument Cluster Display
The instrument cluster display features a
driver interactive display Ú page 68.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
3. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
4. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine
coolant temperature. Any reading within
the normal range indicates that the engine
cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
The pointer will likely indicate a higher
temperature when driving in hot weather
or up mountain grades. It should not be
allowed to exceed the upper limits of the
normal operating range.
5. Fuel Gauge
The gauge shows the level of fuel in the
fuel tank when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN position.
The fuel pump symbol points to the
side of the vehicle where the fuel door
is located.
NOTE:
The hard telltales will illuminate for a bulb check
when the ignition is first cycled.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
Your vehicle is equipped with an instrument
cluster display, which offers useful information
to the driver. With the ignition in the OFF mode,
opening/closing of a door will activate the
display for viewing, and display the total miles,
or kilometers, in the odometer. Your instrument
cluster display is designed to display important
information about your vehicle’s systems and
features. Using a driver interactive display
located on the instrument panel, your
instrument cluster display can show you how
systems are working and give you warnings
when they aren’t. The steering wheel mounted
controls allow you to scroll through and enter
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous.
You or others could be badly burned by steam
or boiling coolant. It is recommended to call
an authorized dealer for service if your vehi-
cle overheats.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system
could damage your vehicle. If the tempera-
ture gauge reads “H” pull over and stop the
vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air condi-
tioner turned off until the pointer drops back
into the normal range. If the pointer remains
on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately
and call an authorized dealer for service.
3
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 67
68 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the main menus and submenus. You can
access the specific information you want and
make selections and adjustments.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY
L
OCATION AND CONTROLS
The instrument cluster display features a driver
interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
The instrument cluster display menu items
consist of the following as equipped:
Speedometer
Vehicle Info
Driver Assist
Fuel Economy
Trip
Stop/Start (If Equipped)
Audio
Messages
Screen Setup
Vehicle Settings
The systems allow the driver to select
information by pushing the following buttons
mounted on the steering wheel:
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
Up Arrow Button
Push and release the up arrow button to
scroll upward through the main menu and
submenus.
Down Arrow Button
Push and release the down arrow button
to scroll downward through the main menu
and submenus.
Right Arrow Button
Push and release the right arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
Left Arrow Button
Push and release the left arrow button to
access the information screens or submenu
screens of a main menu item.
OK Button
Push the OK button to access/select the
information screens or submenu screens of a
main menu item. Push and hold the OK
button for one second to reset displayed/
selected features that can be reset.
OIL CHANGE RESET
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil
change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Due” message will display in the instrument
cluster display for five seconds after a single
chime has sounded, to indicate the next
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 69
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based,
which means the engine oil change interval
may fluctuate, dependent upon your
personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time the ignition is cycled to the
ON/RUN position.
To reset the oil change indicator after
performing the scheduled maintenance, refer
to the following procedure:
1. Without pressing the brake pedal, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button and cycle the
ignition to the ON/RUN position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly,
three times within ten seconds.
3. Place the ignition in the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY MENU
I
TEMS
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display menu items
display in the center of the instrument cluster.
Menu items may vary depending on your vehicle
features Ú page 68.
Speedometer
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Speedometer Menu item is
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the OK button to change the
speedometer scale from MPH to km/h (or vice
versa).
Vehicle Info (Customer Information
Features)
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Vehicle Info Menu item is
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the left or right arrow
button to cycle through the Vehicle Info
submenus and follow the prompts on each
screen as needed.
1. Tire Pressure
If tire pressure is OK for all tires a vehicle
ICON is displayed with tire pressure
values in each corner of the ICON.
If one or more tires have low pressure,
“Inflate Tire To XX” is displayed with the
vehicle ICON and the tire pressure values
in each corner of the ICON with the pres-
sure value of the low tire displayed in a
different color than the other tire pres-
sure value.
If the Tire Pressure system requires
service, “Service Tire Pressure System” is
displayed.
Tire PSI is an information only function
and cannot be reset Ú page 227.
2. Coolant Temperature
Displays the actual coolant temperature.
3. Transmission Temperature — Automatic
Transmission Only
Displays the actual transmission tempera-
ture.
3
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 69
70 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
4. Oil Temperature
Displays the level of oil temperature.
5. Battery Voltage
Displays the actual battery voltage
Fuel Economy
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Fuel Economy menu title is
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Push and hold the OK button to reset average
fuel economy feature.
Range – The display shows the estimated
distance (mi or km) that can be traveled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. When the
Range value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the Range
display will change to a “LOW FUEL”
message. Adding a significant amount of fuel
to the vehicle will turn off the “LOW FUEL”
message and a new Range value will display.
Range cannot be reset through the OK
button.
NOTE:
Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable
distance of the vehicle, regardless of the Range
displayed value.
Average – This display shows the average
fuel economy (MPG, or L/100 km, or km/L)
since the last reset.
Current – This display shows the current fuel
economy (MPG, or L/100 km, or km/L) while
driving.
Idle Coasting (If Equipped) – The Idle
Coasting feature saves fuel by allowing
engine speeds to drop to idle. When Idle
Coasting is active, the Idle Coasting Indicator
Light is shown in the Instrument Cluster
Display.
Sport Mode (If Equipped) – Selecting Sport
mode will activate the configuration for
typical enthusiast driving. The Transmission,
Stability Control, Steering, and Suspension
systems are all set to their Sport settings.
Driver Assist
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Driver Assist menu title is
displayed and highlighted in the instrument
cluster display.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu — If
Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the
current ACC system settings. The information
displayed depends on ACC system status. Push
the ACC on/off button (located on the steering
wheel) until one of the following displays in the
instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.” Push and
release the SET + or the SET- button (located on
the steering wheel) and the following will display
in the instrument cluster display:
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 70
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 71
ACC SET
When ACC is set, the set speed will display in
the instrument cluster.
The ACC screen may display once again if any
ACC activity occurs, which may include any of
the following:
Distance Setting Change
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
NOTE:
The instrument cluster display will return to the
last display selected after five seconds of no
ACC display activity Ú page 106.
LaneSense — If Equipped
The instrument cluster display displays the
current LaneSense system settings. The
information displayed depends on LaneSense
system status and the conditions that need to
be met Ú page 120.
Trip Info
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trip menu title is displayed in
the instrument cluster display. Toggle the
left or right arrow button to select Trip A
or Trip B. The Trip information will display the
following:
Distance – Shows the total distance (mi or
km) traveled for Trip A or Trip B since the last
reset.
Average Fuel Economy – Shows the average
fuel economy (MPG or L/100 km or km/L) of
Trip A or Trip B since the last reset.
Elapsed Time – Shows the total elapsed time
of travel since Trip A or Trip B has been reset.
Hold the OK button to reset feature information.
Stop/Start – If Equipped
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Stop/Start menu title is
displayed in the instrument cluster display.
Audio
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Audio menu title is displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
Stored Messages
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Messages Menu Icon is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
This feature shows the number of stored
warning messages. Pushing the left or
right arrow button will allow you to scroll
through the stored messages.
Screen Setup
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Screen Setup Menu Icon/Title is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display.
Push and release the OK button to enter the
submenus and follow the prompts on the
screen as needed. The Screen Setup feature
allows you to change what information is
displayed in the instrument cluster as well as
the location that information is displayed.
3
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 71
72 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Screen Setup Driver Selectable Items
Upper Left
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Date
Time
Ignition State
Range
Fuel Economy Average
Fuel Economy Current
Upper Right
None
Compass
Outside Temp
Date
Time
Ignition State
Range
Fuel Economy Average
Restore Defaults (Restores All Settings To
Default Settings)
Yes
No
Current Gear — If Equipped
On
Off
Center
None
Compass
Menu Title
Date
Outside Temp
Time
Range
Fuel Economy Average
Audio Info
Trip A Distance
Trip B Distance
Speedometer
BATTERY SAVER ON/BATTERY SAVER
M
ODE MESSAGE — ELECTRICAL LOAD
R
EDUCTION ACTIONS — IF EQUIPPED
This vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Battery Sensor (IBS) to perform additional
monitoring of the electrical system and status
of the vehicle battery.
In cases when the IBS detects charging system
failure, or the vehicle battery conditions are
deteriorating, electrical load reduction actions
will take place to extend the driving time and
distance of the vehicle. This is done by reducing
power to or turning off non-essential electrical
loads.
Load reduction is only active when the engine is
running. It will display a message if there is a
risk of battery depletion to the point where the
vehicle may stall due to lack of electrical supply,
or will not restart after the current drive cycle.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 72
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 73
When load reduction is activated, the message
“Battery Saver On” or “Battery Saver Mode” will
appear in the instrument cluster display.
These messages indicate the vehicle battery
has a low state of charge and continues to lose
electrical charge at a rate that the charging
system cannot sustain.
NOTE:
The charging system is independent from
load reduction. The charging system
performs a diagnostic on the charging
system continuously.
If the Battery Charge Warning Light is on it
may indicate a problem with the charging
system Ú page 76.
The electrical loads that may be switched off (if
equipped), and vehicle functions which can be
effected by load reduction:
Heated Seat/Vented Seats/Heated Wheel
Heated/Cooled Cup Holders — If Equipped
Rear Defroster And Heated Mirrors
HVAC System
150W Power Inverter System
Audio and Telematics System
Loss of the battery charge may indicate one or
more of the following conditions:
The charging system cannot deliver enough
electrical power to the vehicle system
because the electrical loads are larger than
the capability of charging system. The
charging system is still functioning properly.
Turning on all possible vehicle electrical
loads (e.g. HVAC to max settings, exterior and
interior lights, overloaded power outlets +12
Volts, 150W, USB ports) during certain
driving conditions (city driving, towing,
frequent stopping).
Installing options like additional lights,
upfitter electrical accessories, audio
systems, alarms and similar devices.
Unusual driving cycles (short trips separated
by long parking periods).
The vehicle was parked for an extended
period of time (weeks, months).
The battery was recently replaced and was
not charged completely.
The battery was discharged by an electrical
load left on when the vehicle was parked.
The battery was used for an extended period
with the engine not running to supply radio,
lights, chargers, +12 Volts portable appli-
ances like vacuum cleaners, game consoles
and similar devices.
What to do when an electrical load reduction
action message is present (“Battery Saver On”
or “Battery Saver Mode”)
During a trip:
Reduce power to unnecessary loads if
possible:
Turn off redundant lights (interior or exte-
rior)
Check what may be plugged in to power
outlets +12 Volts, 150W, USB ports
Check HVAC settings (blower, tempera-
ture)
Check the audio settings (volume)
3
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 73
74 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
After a trip:
Check if any aftermarket equipment was
installed (additional lights, upfitter electrical
accessories, audio systems, alarms) and
review specifications if any (load and Ignition
Off Draw currents).
Evaluate the latest driving cycles (distance,
driving time and parking time).
The vehicle should have service performed if
the message is still present during consecutive
trips and the evaluation of the vehicle and
driving pattern did not help to identify the cause.
TRIP COMPUTER
Push and release the up or down arrow
button until the Trip A or Trip B icon is
highlighted in the instrument cluster display
(Toggle left or right to select Trip A or Trip
B). Push and release the OK button to display
the Trip information.
Trip A
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip A
since the last reset.
Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip A
since the last reset.
Trip B
Shows the total distance traveled for Trip B
since the last reset.
Shows the elapsed time traveled for Trip B
since the last reset.
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the
last reset when the ignition switch is in the ACC
position. Elapsed time will increment when the
ignition switch is in the ON/START position.
To Reset A Trip Function
Reset will only occur while a resettable function
is selected (highlighted). Push and hold the OK
button to clear the resettable function being
displayed.
WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
the instrument panel together with a dedicated
message and/or acoustic signal when
applicable. These indications are indicative and
precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative to
the information contained in the Owner’s
Manual, which you are advised to read carefully
in all cases. Always refer to the information in
this chapter in the event of a failure indication.
All active telltales will display first if applicable.
The system check menu may appear different
based upon equipment options and current
vehicle status. Some telltales are optional and
may not appear.
RED WARNING LIGHTS
Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault with the air bag, and
will turn on for four to eight seconds
as a bulb check when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position. This light will illuminate with a single
chime when a fault with the air bag has been
detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared.
If the light is either not on during startup, stays
on, or turns on while driving, have the system
inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various
brake functions, including brake fluid
level and parking brake application. If
the brake light turns on it may indicate
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 74
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 75
that the parking brake is applied, that the brake
fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the Anti-Lock Brake System reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake
has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at the
full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it
indicates a possible brake hydraulic system
malfunction or that a problem with the Brake
Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) system. In this case, the light will remain on
until the condition has been corrected. If the
problem is related to the brake booster, the ABS
pump will run when applying the brake, and a
brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each
stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in either
half of the dual brake system is indicated by the
Brake Warning Light, which will turn on when
the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level
conditions. The vehicle should have service
performed, and the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is
necessary.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Electronic
Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the event of
an EBD failure, the Brake Warning Light will turn
on along with the ABS Light. Immediate repair to
the ABS system is required.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from the
OFF position to the ON/RUN position. The light
should illuminate for approximately two
seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is
detected. If the light does not illuminate, have
the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in the
ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the
driver or passenger seat belt is
unbuckled. When the ignition is first
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and if the driver’s seat belt is
unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will
turn on. When driving, if the driver or front
passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on
continuously and a chime will sound
Ú page 231.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may
have failed. It will take longer to stop the vehi-
cle. You could have a collision. Have the vehi-
cle checked immediately.
3
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 75
76 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the battery is not charging properly. If
it stays on while the engine is running,
there may be a malfunction with the
charging system. Contact an authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a
door is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
Electric Power Steering (EPS) Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when
there's a fault with the EPS system
Ú page 101.
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning
Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a problem with the ETC
system. If a problem is detected while
the vehicle is running, the light will
either stay on or flash depending on the nature of
the problem. Cycle the ignition when the vehicle
is safely and completely stopped and the
transmission is placed in the PARK position. The
light should turn off. If the light remains on with
the vehicle running, your vehicle will usually be
drivable; however, see an authorized dealer for
service as soon as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the vehicle is
running, immediate service is required and you
may experience reduced performance, an
elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your
vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and remain on briefly as a
bulb check. If the light does not come on during
starting, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
Engine Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
warn of an overheated engine
condition. If the engine coolant
temperature is too high, this light will
illuminate and a single chime will sound.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over
and stop the vehicle. If the Air Conditioning
(A/C) system is on, turn it off. Also, shift the
transmission into NEUTRAL (N) and idle the
vehicle. If the temperature reading does not
return to normal, turn the engine off immediately
and call for service Ú page 289.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist could
pose a safety risk to yourself and others. Ser-
vice should be obtained as soon as possible.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 76
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 77
Hood Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the hood is left open and not fully
closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Liftgate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when
the liftgate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a single
chime.
Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate low engine oil pressure. If the
light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle, shut off the engine as soon as
possible, and contact an authorized dealer. A
chime will sound when this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the engine oil temperature is
high. If the light turns on while driving,
stop the vehicle and shut off the
engine as soon as possible. Wait for oil
temperature to return to normal levels.
Transmission Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate (together with
a message in the instrument cluster
display and a buzzer) to indicate a
transmission fault. Contact an
authorized dealer if the message remains after
restarting the engine.
Transmission Temperature Warning Light
— If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
warn of a high transmission fluid
temperature. This may occur with
strenuous usage such as trailer
towing. If this light turns on, stop the vehicle and
run the engine at idle or slightly faster, with the
transmission in PARK or NEUTRAL, until the
light turns off. Once the light turns off, you may
continue to drive normally.
Vehicle Security Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for
approximately 15 seconds when the
Vehicle Security system is arming,
and then will flash slowly until the
vehicle is disarmed.
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning Light
is illuminated you could cause the fluid to boil
over, come in contact with hot engine or
exhaust components and cause a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated will
eventually cause severe transmission dam-
age or transmission failure.
3
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 77
78 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
YELLOW WARNING LIGHTS
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
This warning light monitors the ABS.
The light will turn on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position and may stay on for as
long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and service is
required as soon as possible. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warning
Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, have the brake system inspected
by an authorized dealer.
Electronic Park Brake Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate the Electronic Park Brake is
not functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized
dealer.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Active
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when
the ESC system is Active. The ESC
Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN
position, and when ESC is activated. It should go
out with the engine running. If the ESC Indicator
Light comes on continuously with the engine
running, a malfunction has been detected in the
ESC system. If this warning light remains on after
several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been
driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds
greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an
authorized dealer as soon as possible to have
the problem diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light and the ESC Indi-
cator Light come on momentarily each time
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/
ON/RUN position.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.
This light will come on when the vehicle is in
an ESC event.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the ESC is
off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on, even
if it was turned off previously.
Fuel Cutoff Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate after
an accident has occurred, and the
system has shut the fuel off.
LaneSense Warning Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense Warning Light will be
solid yellow when the vehicle is
approaching a lane marker. The
warning light will flash when the
vehicle is crossing the lane marker.
Service LaneSense Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the LaneSense system is not
operating and requires service.
Please see an authorized dealer.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 78
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 79
Low Coolant Level Warning Light
This telltale will turn on to indicate the
vehicle coolant level is low
Ú page 309.
Low Fuel Warning Light
Depending on whether the tank size is
13.5 gal (51 L) or 15.8 gal (60 L), the
Low Fuel Indicator Light will turn on
when the fuel level goes below 1.5 gal
(5.6 L) or 1.7 gal (6.6 L) respectively.
Low Washer Fluid Warning Light — If
Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the windshield washer fluid is low.
Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Warning Light (MIL)
The MIL is a part of an Onboard
Diagnostic System called OBD II that
monitors engine and automatic
transmission control systems. This
warning light will illuminate when the ignition is
in the ON/RUN position before engine start. If
the bulb does not come on when turning the
ignition switch from OFF to ON/RUN, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate
the light after engine start. The vehicle should
be serviced if the light stays on through several
typical driving styles. In most situations, the
vehicle will drive normally and will not require
towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may flash
to alert serious conditions that could lead to
immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be
serviced by an authorized dealer as soon as
possible if this occurs.
Service Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Warning Light — If Equipped
This light will turn on when a ACC is
not operating and needs service
Ú page 106.
Service 4WD Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
signal a fault with the 4WD system. If
the light stays on or comes on during
driving, it means that the 4WD system
is not functioning properly and that service is
required. We recommend you drive to the
nearest service center and have the vehicle
serviced immediately.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as refer-
enced above, can reach higher temperatures
than in normal operating conditions. This can
cause a fire if you drive slowly or park over
flammable substances such as dry plants,
wood, cardboard, etc. This could result in
death or serious injury to the driver, occu-
pants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indica-
tor Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the
vehicle control system. It also could affect
fuel economy and driveability. If the MIL is
flashing, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
3
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 79
80 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Service Forward Collision Warning (FCW)
Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to
indicate a fault in the Forward
Collision Warning System. Contact an
authorized dealer for service
Ú page 225.
Service Stop/Start System Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when
the Stop/Start system is not
functioning properly and service is
required. Contact an authorized
dealer for service.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a
message is displayed to indicate that
the tire pressure is lower than the
recommended value and/or that slow
pressure loss is occurring. In these cases,
optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may
not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your
vehicle has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the
proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a TPMS that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale when one or more of
your tires is significantly underinflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your
tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to
the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Underinflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and
may affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for
proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure,
even if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The TPMS
malfunction indicator is combined with the low
tire pressure telltale. When the system detects
a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain
continuously illuminated. This sequence will
continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as
long as the malfunction exists. When the
malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system
may not be able to detect or signal low tire
pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may
occur for a variety of reasons, including the
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more flat
tires as handling may be compromised. Stop
the vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steer-
ing. If a tire puncture occurs, repair immedi-
ately using the dedicated tire repair kit and
contact an authorized dealer as soon as pos-
sible.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 80
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 81
installation of replacement or alternate tires or
wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS
from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure
that the replacement or alternate tires and
wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
Towing Hook Breakdown Warning Light — If
Equipped
This light illuminates when there is a
failure with the tow hook. Contact an
authorized dealer for service.
YELLOW INDICATOR LIGHTS
4WD Low Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the 4WD Low mode. The
front and rear driveshafts are
mechanically locked together forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed. Low range provides a greater gear
reduction ratio to provide increased torque at
the wheels Ú page 99.
4WD Lock Indicator Light — If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the
vehicle is in the 4WD LOCK mode. The
front and rear driveshafts are
mechanically locked together, forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the same
speed Ú page 99.
Auto HOLD! Fault Indicator Light — If
Equipped
Auto HOLD! keeps your vehicle at a
complete stop without you having to
keep your food on the brake pedal. If
a fault is detected, it will be indicated
by a yellow ‘HOLD!’ indicator light that will stay
on as long as the fault condition exists.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Indicator
Light — If Equipped
This telltale will turn on to warn you of
a possible collision with the vehicle in
front of you.
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Off
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light illuminates to
indicate that Forward Collision
Warning is off.
Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical Alarm
Indicator Light
This telltale will illuminate when the
Vehicle Security system has detected
an attempt to break into the vehicle.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures
and warning have been established for the
tire size equipped on your vehicle. Undesir-
able system operation or sensor damage may
result when using replacement equipment
that is not of the same size, type, and/or
style. Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor
damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is recom-
mended that you take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer to have your sensor func-
tion checked.
3
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 81
82 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
After cycling the ignition to the ON/RUN posi-
tion, the Vehicle Security Warning Light could
illuminate if a problem with the system is
detected. This condition will result in the engine
being shut off after two seconds.
GREEN INDICATOR LIGHTS
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With No
Target Detected Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will turn on when the
Adaptive Cruise Control is set and
there is no vehicle in front detected
Ú page 106.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Set With
Target Detected Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This light will turn on when the
Adaptive Cruise Control is SET and a
vehicle in front is detected
Ú page 106.
Auto HOLD Indicator Light — If Equipped
Auto HOLD keeps your vehicle at a
complete stop without you having to
keep your food on the brake pedal. Once
engaged a green “HOLD” indicator will appear
in the Instrument Cluster Display.
Automatic High Beam Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator shows that the
automatic high beam headlights are
on Ú page 40.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
The LaneSense indicator light
illuminates solid green when both
lane markings have been detected
and the system is “armed” and ready
to provide visual and torque warnings if an
unintentional lane departure occurs.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If
Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate
when the Cruise Control is set to the
desired speed Ú page 104.
Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the front fog lights are on
Ú page 40.
Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate
when the park lights or headlights are
turned on.
Sport Mode Indicator Light
This light will turn on when Sport
Mode is active.
Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If
Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate
when the Stop/Start function is in
“Autostop” mode.
Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is
activated, the turn signal indicator will
flash independently and the
corresponding exterior turn signal
lamps will flash. Turn signals can be activated
when the multifunction lever is moved down
(left) or up (right).
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 82
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 83
NOTE:
A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is
driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with either
turn signal on.
Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if
either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
WHITE INDICATOR LIGHTS
Hill Descent Control (HDC) Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This indicator shows when the HDC
feature is turned on. The lamp will be
on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can
only be armed when the transfer case
is in the 4WD Low position and the vehicle
speed is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these
conditions are not met while attempting to use
the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light will
flash on/off.
Idle Coasting — If Equipped
The Idle Coasting feature saves fuel
by allowing engine speeds to drop to
idle. When Idle Coasting is active, the
Idle Coasting Indicator Light is shown
in the Instrument Cluster Display.
LaneSense Indicator Light — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is ON,
but not armed, the LaneSense
indicator light illuminates solid white.
This occurs when only left, right, or
neither lane line has been detected. If a single
lane line is detected, the system is ready to
provide only visual warnings if an unintentional
lane departure occurs on the detected lane line
Ú page 120.
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — If
Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This light will turn on when the Cruise
Control has been turned on, but not
set Ú page 104.
Cruise Control SET Indicator Light — If
Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate
when the Cruise Control is set
Ú page 104.
Speed Warning Indicator Light — If
Equipped
When Set Speed Warning is turned on
and when the set speed is exceeded,
a single chime will sound along with a
pop-up message of “Speed Warning
Exceeded.” Speed Warning can be turned on
and off in the instrument cluster display.
The number “55” is only an example of a speed
that can be set.
BLUE INDICATOR LIGHTS
High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to
indicate that the high beam
headlights are on. With the low beams
activated, push the multifunction
lever forward (toward the front of the vehicle) to
turn on the high beams. Pull the multifunction
lever rearward (toward the rear of the vehicle) to
turn off the high beams. If the high beams are
off, pull the lever toward you for a temporary
high beam on, “flash to pass” scenario.
3
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 83
84 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
GRAY INDICATOR LIGHTS
Cruise Control Ready Indicator Light — If
Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when the Cruise
Control has been turned on, but not
set Ú page 104.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II. This
system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and automatic transmission
control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide
excellent performance and fuel economy, as
well as emissions well within current
government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD
II system will turn on the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL). It will also store diagnostic codes
and other information to assist your service
technician in making repairs. Although your
vehicle will usually be drivable and not need
towing, see an authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM
(OBD II) C
YBERSECURITY
Your vehicle is required to have OBD II and a
connection port to allow access to information
related to the performance of your emissions
controls. Authorized service technicians may
need to access this information to assist with
the diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system Ú page 138.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement
to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
emissions control system. Failure to pass could
prevent vehicle registration.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must
be serviced before any emissions tests can
be performed.
If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter damage
and power loss will soon occur. Immediate
service is required.
WARNING!
ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
If unauthorized equipment is connected to
the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems, could
be impaired or a loss of vehicle control
could occur that may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
Access, or allow others to access, infor-
mation stored in your vehicle systems,
including personal information.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 84
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 85
For states that require an Inspection
and Maintenance (I/M), this check
verifies the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II
system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The
OBD II system may not be ready if your vehicle
was recently serviced, recently had a depleted
battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II
system should be determined not ready for the
I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test
station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II system
is ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position,
but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will have to
start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
the ON position, you will see the
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two
things will happen:
The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds
and then return to being fully illuminated
until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is not ready and you
should not proceed to the I/M station.
The MIL will not flash at all and will
remain fully illuminated until you place
the ignition in the off position or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's
OBD II system is ready and you can
proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your
vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery
failure or replacement, you may need to do
nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
normally would in order for your OBD II system
to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated
during normal vehicle operation you should
have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/
M station. The I/M station can fail your vehicle
because the MIL is on with the engine running.
3
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 85
86
(Continued)
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and
fasten your seat belts.
Start the engine with the gear selector in the
NEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brake
before shifting to any driving range.
NORMAL STARTING
Place the ignition switch in the START position
and release when the engine starts. If the
engine fails to start within 10 seconds, place
the ignition switch in the LOCK/OFF position,
wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal
Starting” procedure.
Tip Start Feature
Place the ignition switch in the START position
and release it as soon as the starter engages.
The starter motor will continue to run, and will
automatically disengage itself when the engine
is running. If the engine fails to start, place the
ignition switch in the OFF position, wait 10 to
15 seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
Automatic Transmission
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or
PARK position before you can start the engine.
Apply the brakes before shifting into any driving
gear.
WARNING!
When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock your
vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury or
death.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 86
STARTING AND OPERATING 87
Keyless Enter-N-Go Functions — Using The
ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
3. The system starts the vehicle. If the vehicle
fails to start, the starter will disengage
automatically after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, push the
ENGINE START/STOP button again.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — With Driver’s Foot OFF
The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or NEUTRAL Position)
The Keyless Enter-N-Go feature operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has three
positions, OFF, RUN, and START. To change the
ignition switch positions without starting the
vehicle and use the accessories follow these
steps starting with the ignition switch in the OFF
position:
1. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button
once to change the ignition switch to the
RUN position.
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to change the ignition switch to
the OFF position.
COLD WEATHER OPERATION (BELOW
–22°F O
R −30°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these
temperatures, use of an externally powered
electric engine block heater (available from an
authorized dealer) is recommended.
EXTENDED PARK STARTING
NOTE:
Extended Park condition occurs when the
vehicle has not been started or driven for at
least 30 days.
1. Install a battery charger or jumper cables
to the battery to ensure a full battery
charge during the crank cycle.
2. Place the ignition in the START position and
release it when the engine starts.
3. If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds,
place the ignition in the OFF position, wait
5 seconds to allow the starter to cool, then
repeat the “Extended Park Starting”
procedure.
4. If the engine fails to start after 8 attempts,
allow the starter to cool for at least
10 minutes, then repeat the procedure.
AFTER STARTING — WARMING UP THE
E
NGINE
The idle speed is controlled automatically and it
will decrease as the engine warms up.
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not
crank continuously for more than 10 seconds
at a time. Wait 10 to 15 seconds before trying
again.
4
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 87
88 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
IF ENGINE FAILS TO START
If the engine fails to start after you have
followed the “Normal Starting” procedure, and
has not experienced an extended park
condition as identified in “Extended Park
Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than
15 seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in
case the engine is flooded. Leave the ignition
key in the RUN position, release the accelerator
pedal and repeat the “Normal Starting”
procedure.
STOPPING THE ENGINE
Vehicles Equipped With Electronic Key (Keyless
Enter-N-Go):
To shut off the engine with vehicle speed
greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), you must push
and hold the ignition or push the ENGINE
START/STOP button three times consecutively
within a few seconds. The engine will shut
down, and the ignition will be placed in the RUN
position.
Turning off the car (placing the ignition from the
RUN position to the OFF position), the power
supply to the accessories are maintained for a
period of three minutes.
Opening the driver side door with the ignition in
RUN will sound a short chime that reminds the
driver to place the ignition to OFF.
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the
window switches remains active for three
minutes. Opening a front door will cancel this
function.
After severe driving, idle the engine to allow the
temperature inside the engine compartment to
cool before shutting off the engine.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED
The engine block heater warms the engine and
permits quicker starts in cold weather.
Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC electrical
outlet with a grounded, three-wire extension
cord.
For ambient temperatures below 0°F (-18°C),
the engine block heater is recommended. For
ambient temperatures below -20°F (-29°C),
the engine block heater is required.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not con-
tinuously crank the engine for more than
25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds
before trying again.
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid
into the throttle body air inlet opening in an
attempt to start the vehicle. This could result
in flash fire causing serious personal injury.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle
to get it started. Vehicles equipped with an
automatic transmission cannot be started
this way. Unburned fuel could enter the
catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter
and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery,
booster cables may be used to obtain a
start from a booster battery or the battery in
another vehicle. This type of start can be
dangerous if done improperly Ú page 285.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 88
STARTING AND OPERATING 89
The engine block heater cord is routed under
the hood, behind to the driver’s side headlamp.
NOTE:
The engine block heater cord is a factory
installed option. If your vehicle is not
equipped, heater cords are available from an
authorized Mopar dealer.
The engine block heater will require 110 Volts
AC and 6.5 Amps to activate the heater
element.
The engine block heater must be plugged in
at least one hour to have an adequate
warming effect on the engine.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the
engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle) in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles (100 km),
speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are
desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contributes
to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle
acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and
should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the
factory is a high-quality energy conserving type
lubricant. Oil changes should be consistent with
anticipated climate conditions under which
vehicle operations will occur. For the
recommended viscosity and quality grades
Ú page 355.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during its
first few thousand miles (kilometers) of opera-
tion. This should be considered a normal part of
the break-in and not interpreted as a problem.
PARK BRAKE
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB)
Your vehicle is equipped with an EPB system
that offers simple operation, and some
additional features that make the parking brake
more convenient and useful.
The parking brake is primarily intended to
prevent the vehicle from rolling while parked.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the
parking brake is applied. Also, be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK.
You can engage the parking brake in two ways:
Manually, by applying the parking brake
switch.
Automatically, by enabling the Auto Park
Brake feature in the customer programmable
features section of the Uconnect settings
Ú page 139.
WARNING!
Remember to disconnect the engine block
heater cord before driving. Damage to the
110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause elec-
trocution.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Min-
eral Oil in the engine or damage may result.
4
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 89
90 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
The parking brake switch is located in the
center console.
Electric Park Brake Switch
To apply the parking brake manually, pull up on
the switch momentarily. You may hear a sound
from the back of the vehicle while the parking
brake engages. Once the parking brake is fully
engaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster and an indicator on the
switch will illuminate. If your foot is on the brake
pedal while you apply the parking brake, you
may notice a small amount of brake pedal
movement. The parking brake can be applied
even when the ignition switch is OFF. The
BRAKE warning lamp will not illuminate and can
only be released when the ignition switch is in
the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the EPB
switch is held for longer than 60 seconds in
either the released or applied position. The light
will extinguish upon releasing the switch.
If the Auto Park Brake feature is enabled, the
parking brake will automatically engage
whenever the transmission is placed into PARK.
If your foot is on the brake pedal, you may notice
a small amount of brake pedal movement while
the parking brake is engaging.
The parking brake will release automatically
when the ignition switch is ON, the transmission
is in DRIVE or REVERSE, the driver seat belt is
buckled, and an attempt is made to drive away.
To release the parking brake manually, the
ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position.
Put your foot on the brake pedal, then push the
parking brake switch down momentarily. You
may hear a sound from the back of the car while
the parking brake disengages. You may also
notice a small amount of movement in the
brake pedal. Once the parking brake is fully
disengaged, the BRAKE warning lamp in the
instrument cluster and the LED indicator on the
switch will extinguish.
NOTE:
When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the
front wheels toward the curb on a downhill
grade and away from the curb on an uphill
grade. Apply the parking brake before placing
the gear selector in PARK, otherwise the load on
the transmission locking mechanism may make
it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.
The parking brake should always be applied
whenever the driver is not in the vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not rely on the parking brake to operate
effectively if the rear brakes have been
immersed in water or mud.
Never use the PARK position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when parked to guard
against vehicle movement and possible
injury or damage
When leaving the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the ignition and lock your
vehicle.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 90
STARTING AND OPERATING 91
If exceptional circumstances should make it
necessary to engage the parking brake while
the vehicle is in motion, maintain upward
pressure on the EPB switch for as long as
engagement is desired. The BRAKE warning
lamp will illuminate, and a continuous chime
will sound. The rear stop lamps will also be
illuminated automatically while the vehicle
remains in motion.
To disengage the parking brake while the
vehicle is in motion, release the switch. If the
vehicle is brought to a complete stop using the
parking brake, when the vehicle reaches
approximately 3 mph, (5 km/h) the parking
brake will remain engaged.
In the unlikely event of a malfunction of the EPB
system, a yellow EPB fault lamp will illuminate.
This may be accompanied by the BRAKE warning
lamp flashing. In this event, urgent service of the
EPB system is required. Do not rely on the
parking brake to hold the vehicle stationary.
Auto Park Brake
The EPB can be programmed to be applied
automatically whenever the vehicle speed is
below 1.9 mph (3 km/h) and the transmission
is placed in PARK. Auto Park Brake is enabled
and disabled by customer selection through the
Customer Programmable Features section of
the Uconnect Settings Ú page 139.
Any single Auto Park Brake application can be
bypassed by pushing the EPB switch to the
release position while the transmission is
placed in PARK and the ignition is in the ON/
RUN position.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the gear selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren, and do not leave the ignition of a
vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-
gaged before driving; failure to do so can
lead to brake failure and a collision.
Always fully apply the parking brake when
leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and
cause damage or injury. Also be certain to
leave the transmission in PARK. Failure to
do so may allow the vehicle to roll and
cause damage or injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on
with the parking brake released, a brake sys-
tem malfunction is indicated. Have the brake
system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately.
WARNING!
Driving the vehicle with the parking brake
engaged, or repeated use of the parking
brake to slow the vehicle may cause serious
damage to the brake system; failure to do so
can lead to brake failure and a collision.
4
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 91
92 STARTING AND OPERATING
SafeHold
SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB system
that will engage the parking brake automatically
if the vehicle is left unsecured while the ignition
switch is in ON/RUN.
For automatic transmissions, the EPB will
automatically engage if all of the following
conditions are met:
Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).
There is no attempt to press the brake pedal
and accelerator pedal.
The seat belt is unbuckled.
The driver door is open.
The vehicle is not in the PARK position.
SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by
pushing the EPB switch while the driver door is
open and the brake pedal is pressed. Once
manually bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled
again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph
(20 km/h) or the ignition is turned to the OFF
position and back to ON/RUN again.
Brake Service Mode
We recommend having your brakes serviced by
an authorized dealer.
You should only make repairs for which you
have the knowledge and the right equipment.
You should only enter Brake Service Mode
during brake service.
When servicing your rear brakes, it may be
necessary for you or your technician to push the
rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With the
EPB system, this can only be done after
retracting the EPB actuator. The actuator
retraction can be done easily by entering the
Brake Service Mode through the Uconnect
Settings in your vehicle. This menu based
system will guide you through the steps
necessary to retract the EPB actuator in order to
perform rear brake service.
Service Mode has requirements that must be
met in order to be activated:
The vehicle must be at a standstill.
The parking brake must be disabled.
The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
The EPB switch not activated.
The vehicle in ignition ON/RUN position.
The brake pedal not pressed.
While in service mode, the EPB fault lamp will
flash continuously while the ignition switch is
ON/RUN.
NOTE:
A dedicated message will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display if Brake Service Mode
cannot be activated.
When brake service work is complete, the
following steps must be followed to reset the
parking brake system to normal operation:
Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.
Press the brake pedal with moderate force.
Apply the EPB Switch.
NOTE:
A dedicated message will appear in the instru-
ment cluster display if Brake Service Mode
cannot be deactivated.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only that service
work for which you have the knowledge and
the right equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 92
STARTING AND OPERATING 93
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
You must press and hold the brake pedal while
shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK (P) position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the trans-
mission is in PARK before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL (N) if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.
You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
The vehicle may not engage a newly
selected gear when shifting between PARK,
REVERSE (R), or DRIVE (D) if the vehicle is
moving while shifting.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if the
following precautions are not observed:
Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only
after the vehicle has come to a complete
stop.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 93
94 STARTING AND OPERATING
IGNITION PARK INTERLOCK
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to be
in PARK (P) before the ignition can be turned to
the OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without placing
the transmission in PARK. This system also
locks the transmission in PARK whenever the
ignition is in the OFF mode.
BRAKE/TRANSMISSION SHIFT
I
NTERLOCK (BTSI) S YSTEM
This vehicle is equipped with a BTSI that holds
the transmission gear selector in PARK (P)
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the ignition must be
in the ON/RUN mode (whether the engine is
running or not), and the brake pedal must be
pressed. The brake pedal must also be pressed
to shift from NEUTRAL (N) into DRIVE (D) or
REVERSE (R) when the vehicle is stopped or
moving at low speeds.
SIX-SPEED OR NINE-SPEED AUTOMATIC
T
RANSMISSION
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with a six-speed
or nine-speed automatic transmission,
depending on model. This section describes
operation of both the six-speed and nine-speed
transmission.
The transmission gear range (PRND) is
displayed both beside the gear selector and in
the instrument cluster. To select a gear range,
push the lock button on the gear selector and
move the selector rearward or forward. You
must also press the brake pedal to shift the
transmission out of PARK (P) (or NEUTRAL (N),
when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low
speeds). Select the DRIVE (D) range for normal
driving.
NOTE:
The transmission electronics are self-cali-
brating; therefore, the first few shifts on a
new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is
a normal condition, and precision shifts will
develop within a few hundred miles (kilome-
ters).
In the event of a mismatch between the gear
selector position and the actual transmission
gear (for example, driver selects REVERSE
(R) while driving forward), the position indi-
cator will blink continuously until the selector
is returned to the proper position, or the
requested shift can be completed.
The electronically-controlled transmission
adapts its shift schedule based on driver inputs,
along with environmental and road conditions.
The nine-speed transmission has been
developed to meet the needs of current and
future FWD/AWD vehicles. Software and
calibration is refined to optimize the customer’s
driving experience and fuel economy. By design,
some vehicle and driveline combinations utilize
NINTH gear only in very specific driving
situations and conditions.
Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE
when the accelerator pedal is released and the
vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your foot on
the brake pedal when shifting between these
gears.
Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 94
STARTING AND OPERATING 95
(Continued)
The transmission gear selector provides PARK,
REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick (+/-)
shift positions. Manual shifts can be made
using the AutoStick shift control Ú page 97.
Moving the gear selector into the AutoStick
(+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position)
activates AutoStick mode, providing manual
shift control and displaying the current gear in
the instrument cluster (as 1, 2, 3, etc.). Toggling
the gear selector forward (-) or rearward (+)
while in the AutoStick position will manually
select the transmission gear.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position (when
pushed forward) it is probably in the AutoStick
(+/-) position (beside the DRIVE position). In
AutoStick mode, the transmission gear (1, 2, 3,
etc.) is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Move the gear selector to the right (into the
DRIVE [D] position) for access to PARK,
REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
Gear Selector
Gear Ranges
Do not press the accelerator pedal when
shifting out of PARK or NEUTRAL.
NOTE:
After selecting any gear range, wait a moment
to allow the selected gear to engage before
accelerating. This is especially important when
the engine is cold.
PARK (P)
This range supplements the parking brake by
locking the transmission. The engine can be
started in this range. Never attempt to use
PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle in this
range.
When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake
before shifting the transmission to PARK,
otherwise the load on the transmission locking
mechanism may make it difficult to move the
gear selector out of PARK. As an added
precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the
curb on an uphill grade.
When exiting the vehicle, always:
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK.
3. Turn the engine off.
4. Remove the key fob from the vehicle.
NOTE:
Block the wheels with a wedge or a stone if the
vehicle is parked on a steep slope.
WARNING!
Never use the PARK (P) position as a substi-
tute for the parking brake. Always apply the
parking brake fully when exiting the vehicle
to guard against vehicle movement and
possible injury or damage.
4
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 95
96 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
(Continued)
The following indicators should be used to
ensure that you have properly engaged the
transmission into the PARK position:
When shifting into PARK, push the lock
button on the gear selector, and firmly move
the selector all the way forward until it stops
and is fully seated.
Your vehicle could move and injure you and
others if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to
move the gear selector out of PARK with the
brake pedal released. Make sure the trans-
mission is in PARK before exiting the
vehicle.
It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL (N) if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could
accelerate quickly forward or in reverse.
You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear
when the engine is idling normally and your
foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
The vehicle may not engage a newly
selected gear when shifting between PARK,
REVERSE (R), or DRIVE (D) if the vehicle is
moving while shifting.
WARNING! (Continued)
Unintended movement of a vehicle could
injure those in or near the vehicle. As with
all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle
while the engine is running. Before exiting a
vehicle, always come to a complete stop,
then apply the parking brake, shift the
transmission into PARK, and turn the igni-
tion OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF
mode, the transmission is locked in PARK,
securing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
When leaving the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or
with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle unat-
tended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seriously
or fatally injured. Children should be
warned not to touch the parking brake,
brake pedal or the transmission gear
selector.
WARNING! (Continued)
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to chil-
dren), and do not leave the ignition in the
ON/RUN mode. A child could operate power
windows, other controls, or move the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Before moving the transmission gear
selector out of PARK, you must turn the igni-
tion to the ON/RUN mode, and also press
the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the
gear selector could result.
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from
PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range,
as this can damage the drivetrain.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 96
STARTING AND OPERATING 97
Look at the transmission gear position
display and verify that it indicates the PARK
position (P).
With brake pedal released, verify that the
gear selector will not move out of PARK.
REVERSE (R)
This range is for moving the vehicle backward.
Shift into REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop.
NEUTRAL (N)
Use this range when the vehicle is standing for
prolonged periods with the engine running. The
engine may be started in this range. Apply the
parking brake and shift the transmission into
PARK if you must exit the vehicle.
DRIVE (D)
This range should be used for most city and
highway driving. It provides the smoothest
upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel
economy. The transmission automatically
upshifts through all forward gears.
When frequent transmission shifting occurs
(such as when operating the vehicle under
heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain,
traveling into strong head winds, or while towing
a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick shift control
to select a lower gear Ú page 97. Under these
conditions, using a lower gear will improve
performance and extend transmission life by
reducing excessive shifting and heat build-up.
If the transmission temperature exceeds
normal operating limits, the transmission
controller may modify the transmission shift
schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or expand
the range of torque converter clutch
engagement. This is done to prevent
transmission damage due to overheating.
If the transmission becomes extremely hot, the
"Transmission Temperature Warning Light" may
illuminate, and the transmission may operate
differently until the transmission cools down.
During cold temperatures, transmission
operation may be modified depending on
engine and/or transmission temperature as
well as vehicle speed. This feature improves
warm up time of the engine and transmission to
achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of
the torque converter clutch (and, for the
nine-speed, shifts into EIGHTH or NINTH gear),
are inhibited until the engine and/or
transmission is warm. Normal operation will
resume once the temperature(s) have risen to a
suitable level.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving
you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick
allows you to maximize engine braking,
eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
WARNING!
Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off
the ignition to coast down a hill. These are
unsafe practices that limit your response to
changing traffic or road conditions. You might
lose control of the vehicle and have a colli-
sion.
CAUTION!
Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any
other reason with the transmission in NEU-
TRAL can cause severe transmission dam-
age.
For Recreational Towing Ú page 133.
For Towing A Disabled Vehicle Ú page 292.
4
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 97
98 STARTING AND OPERATING
and improve overall vehicle performance. This
system can also provide you with more control
during passing, city driving, cold slippery
conditions, mountain driving, trailer towing, and
many other situations.
Operation
When the gear selector is in the AutoStick
position (beside the DRIVE (D) position), it can
be moved forward and rearward. This allows the
driver to manually select the transmission gear
being used. Moving the gear selector forward (-)
triggers a downshift and rearward (+) an
upshift. The current gear is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will shift up
or down when the driver moves the gear
selector rearward (+) or forward (-), unless an
engine lugging or overspeed condition would
result. It will remain in the selected gear until
another upshift or downshift is chosen, except
as described below.
Six-speed transmissions will automatically
upshift when necessary to prevent engine
over-speed.
The transmission will automatically down-
shift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine
lugging) and will display the current gear.
The transmission will automatically down-
shift to FIRST gear when coming to a stop.
After a stop, the driver should manually
upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle is
accelerated.
You can start out, from a stop, in FIRST or
SECOND gear (or THIRD gear, in six-speed
models, or in 4WD Low, SNOW mode, or
SAND mode, where available). Tapping (+) (at
a stop) will allow starting in SECOND gear.
Starting out in SECOND gear can be helpful in
snowy or icy conditions.
If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.
The system will ignore attempts to upshift at
too low of a vehicle speed.
Transmission shifting will be more noticeable
when AutoStick is enabled.
The system may revert to automatic shift
mode if a fault or overheat condition is
detected.
NOTE:
When Selec-Speed or Hill Descent Control is
enabled, AutoStick is not active.
To disengage AutoStick, return the gear selector
to the DRIVE position. You can shift in or out of
the AutoStick position at any time without
taking your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Transmission Limp Home Mode
Transmission function is monitored
electronically for abnormal conditions. If a
condition is detected that could result in
transmission damage, Transmission Limp
Home Mode is activated. In this mode, the
transmission may operate only in a fixed gear,
or may remain in NEUTRAL (N). The Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated. Limp
Home Mode may allow the vehicle to be driven
to an authorized dealer for service without
damaging the transmission.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine brak-
ing on a slippery surface. The drive wheels
could lose their grip and the vehicle could
skid, causing a collision or personal injury.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 98
STARTING AND OPERATING 99
In the event of a momentary problem, the
transmission can be reset to regain all forward
gears by performing the following steps:
1. Stop the vehicle.
2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), if
possible. If not, shift the transmission to
NEUTRAL.
3. Push and hold the ignition until the engine
turns off.
4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.
5. Restart the engine.
6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the
problem is no longer detected, the
transmission will return to normal
operation.
NOTE:
Even if the transmission can be reset, we
recommend that you visit an authorized dealer
at your earliest possible convenience. An autho-
rized dealer has diagnostic equipment to
assess the condition of your transmission. If the
transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer
service is required.
Torque Converter Clutch
A feature designed to improve fuel economy
has been included in the automatic
transmission on your vehicle. A clutch within the
torque converter engages automatically at
calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly
different feeling or response during normal
operation in the upper gears. When the vehicle
speed drops or during some accelerations, the
clutch automatically disengages.
NOTE:
The torque converter clutch will not engage until
the engine and/or transmission is warm
(usually after 1 to 3 miles [2 to 5 km] of driving).
Because the engine speed is higher when the
torque converter clutch is not engaged, it may
seem as if the transmission is not shifting prop-
erly when the vehicle is cold. This is normal. The
torque converter clutch will function normally
once the powertrain is sufficiently warm.
FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF
EQUIPPED
JEEP ACTIVE DRIVE
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Power
Transfer Unit (PTU). This system is automatic
with no driver inputs or additional driving skills
required. Under normal driving conditions, the
front wheels provide most of the traction. If the
front wheels begin to lose traction, power is
shifted automatically to the rear wheels. The
greater the front wheel traction loss, the greater
the power transfer to the rear wheels.
Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy
throttle input (where one may have no wheel
spin), torque will be sent to the rear in a
preemptive effort to improve vehicle launch and
performance characteristics.
Four Wheel Drive (4x4)
The four-wheel drive (4WD) is fully automatic in
normal driving mode.
NOTE:
It is not possible to carry out the change of
mode when the vehicle exceeds the speed of
75 mph (120 km/h).
CAUTION!
All wheels must have the same size and type
tires. Unequal tire sizes must not be used.
Unequal tire size may cause failure of the
power transfer unit.
4
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 99
100 STARTING AND OPERATING
Enabling Four Wheel Drive (4x4)
The buttons for the activation of four-wheel
drive are located on the device Selec-Terrain
and allow you to select the following:
4WD LOCK
4WD LOW — (Trailhawk models only)
Active Drive Control — If Equipped
4WD LOCK Switch
The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) is locked to
ensure immediate availability of torque to the
rear drive axles. This feature is selectable in
AUTO mode and automatic in the other driving
mode. 4WD LOCK can be enabled by the
following ways:
When the 4WD LOCK button is pushed.
When the Selec-Terrain switch is rotated
from AUTO to any other off-road modes.
Active Drive With Low Control — (Trailhawk
models only)
4WD LOW Button (Trailhawk)
The 4WD LOW mode helps to improve the
off-road performance in all modes. To enable
4WD LOW, please follow the steps below:
Enabling 4WD LOW
With the vehicle stationary, the ignition in the
ON/RUN position or with the engine running,
push the 4WD LOW button once . The
instrument cluster will display the message
"4WD LOW" once the shift is complete.
NOTE:
Both LOCK and LOW LED lights will blink and
then become active on the Selec-Terrain
switch until the shift is complete.
The instrument cluster display will illuminate
the "4WD LOW" icon.
Disabling 4WD LOW
To disable the 4WD LOW mode, the vehicle
must be stationary. Push the 4WD LOW button
once.
SELEC-TERRAIN — IF EQUIPPED
Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of the
vehicle control systems, along with driver input,
to provide the best performance for all terrains.
MODE SELECTION GUIDE
Rotate the Selec-Terrain knob to select the
desired mode.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 100
STARTING AND OPERATING 101
Selec-Terrain Knob
Selec-Terrain Knob (Trailhawk)
AUTO: This four-wheel drive operation is a
continuous operation, is fully automatic and
can be used on and off-road. This mode
balances traction to ensure maneuverability
and acceleration improvement compared to
a vehicle with two wheel drive. This mode
also reduces fuel consumption, since it
allows the disconnect of the drive shaft
where conditions permit.
SNOW: This mode allows you to have greater
stability under conditions of bad weather. For
use on and off-road on surfaces with poor
traction, such as roads covered with snow.
When in SNOW mode (depending on certain
operating conditions), the transmission may
use SECOND gear (rather than FIRST gear)
during launches, to minimize wheel slippage.
SAND: For off-road driving or use on surfaces
with poor traction, such as dry sand. The
transmission is set to provide maximum trac-
tion.
MUD: For off-road driving or use on surfaces
with poor traction, such as roads covered by
mud or wet grass.
ROCK (Trailhawk only): This mode is only
available in 4WD LOW range. The device sets
the vehicle to maximize traction and allow
the highest steering capacity for off-road
surfaces. This mode gives you the maximum
performance off-road. Use for low speed
obstacles such as large rocks, deep ruts, etc.
NOTE:
ROCK mode is only available on the vehicles
equipped with the Off-Road package.
Activate the Hill Descent Control for steep
downhill control Ú page 213.
POWER STEERING
The electric power steering system will provide
increased vehicle response and ease of
maneuverability. The power steering system
adapts to different driving conditions.
If the “SERVICE POWER STEERING" OR "POWER
STEERING ASSIST OFF - SERVICE SYSTEM”
message and a steering wheel icon are
displayed on the instrument cluster display, it
indicates that the vehicle needs to be taken to
the dealer for service. It is likely the vehicle has
lost power steering assistance Ú page 68.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and oth-
ers. Service should be obtained as soon as
possible.
4
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 101
102 STARTING AND OPERATING
If the “POWER STEERING SYSTEM HOT -
PERFORMANCE MAY BE LIMITED” message and
an icon are displayed on the instrument cluster
display, it indicates that extreme steering
maneuvers may have occurred, which caused
an over temperature condition in the power
steering system. You will lose power steering
assistance momentarily until the over
temperature condition no longer exists. Once
driving conditions are safe, then pull over and
let vehicle idle for a few moments until the light
turns off Ú page 68.
NOTE:
Even if the power steering assistance is no
longer operational, it is still possible to steer
the vehicle. Under these conditions there will
be a substantial increase in steering effort,
especially at low speeds and during parking
maneuvers.
If the condition persists, see an authorized
dealer for service.
STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The Stop/Start function is developed to reduce
fuel consumption. The system will stop the
engine automatically during a vehicle stop if the
required conditions are met. Releasing the
brake pedal or pressing the accelerator pedal
will automatically re-start the engine.
This vehicle has been upgraded with a heavy
duty starter, enhanced battery, and other
upgraded engine parts, to handle the additional
engine starts.
AUTOSTOP MODE
The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every
normal customer engine start. At that time, the
system will go into STOP/START READY.
To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following
Must Occur:
The system must be in STOP/START READY
state. A STOP/START READY message will be
displayed in the instrument cluster display
within the Stop/Start section Ú page 68.
The vehicle must be completely stopped.
The gear selector must be in a forward gear
and the brake pedal pressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
move to the zero position and the Stop/Start
telltale will illuminate indicating you are in
Autostop. Customer settings will be maintained
upon return to an engine running condition.
POSSIBLE REASONS THE ENGINE DOES
N
OT AUTOSTOP
Prior to engine shut down, the system will check
many safety and comfort conditions to see if
they are fulfilled. Detailed information about the
operation of the Stop/Start system may be
viewed in the instrument cluster display Stop/
Start Screen. In the following situations the
engine will not stop:
Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
Driver’s door is not closed.
Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 102
STARTING AND OPERATING 103
Battery charge is low.
The vehicle is on a steep grade.
Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an
acceptable cabin temperature has not been
achieved.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high
blower speed.
HVAC set to MAX A/C.
Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
The transmission is not in a forward gear.
Hood is open.
Vehicle is in 4WD Low transfer case mode.
Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient
pressure.
Accelerator pedal input.
Engine temp too high.
5 mph (8 km/h) threshold not achieved from
previous AUTOSTOP.
Steering angle beyond threshold.
Adaptive Cruise Control is on and speed is
set.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the Stop/Start system
going into a STOP/START READY state under
more extreme conditions of the items listed
above.
TO START THE ENGINE WHILE IN
A
UTOSTOP MODE
While in a forward gear, the engine will start
when the brake pedal is released or the throttle
pedal is pressed. The transmission will
automatically re-engage upon engine restart.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
The transmission selector is moved out of
DRIVE (D).
To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted.
Battery voltage drops too low.
Stop/Start OFF switch is pressed.
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
Vehicle is in 4WD Low transfer case mode.
Conditions That Force An Application Of The
Electric Park Brake While In Autostop Mode:
The driver’s door is open and brake pedal
released.
The driver’s door is open and the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled.
The engine hood has been opened.
A Stop/Start system error occurs.
If the Electric Park Brake (EPB) is applied with
the engine off, the engine may require a manual
restart and the EPB may require a manual
release (press brake pedal and press EPB
switch) Ú page 68.
4
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 103
104 STARTING AND OPERATING
TO MANUALLY TURN OFF THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Stop/Start OFF Switch
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will
illuminate. The “STOP/START OFF” message
will appear in the instrument cluster display and
the autostop mode will be disabled Ú page 68.
NOTE:
The Stop/Start system will reset itself back to
an ON condition every time the ignition is turned
off and back on.
TO MANUALLY TURN ON THE STOP/
S
TART SYSTEM
Push the Stop/Start OFF switch (located on the
switch bank). The light on the switch will turn off.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If there is a malfunction in the Stop/Start
system, the system will not shut down the
engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display Ú page 68.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message appears in the instrument cluster
display, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEMS — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cruise
Control system, or the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) system:
Cruise Control for cruising at a constant
preset speed.
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) for maintaining
a set distance between you and the vehicle
ahead using Fixed Speed Cruise Control to
automatically adjust the preset speed.
NOTE:
In vehicles equipped with ACC, if an ACC
distance is not set, Fixed Speed Cruise Control
will not detect vehicles directly ahead of you.
Always be aware of the mode selected.
CRUISE CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, the Cruise Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
20 mph (32 km/h).
The Cruise Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
Cruise Control Buttons
NOTE:
In order to ensure proper operation, the Cruise
Control system has been designed to shut down
if multiple Cruise Control functions are operated
1 — On/Off
2 — CANC/Cancel
3 — SET (+)/Accel
4 — RES/Resume
5 — SET (-)/Decel
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 104
STARTING AND OPERATING 105
at the same time. If this occurs, the Cruise
Control system can be reactivated by pushing
the Cruise Control on/off button and resetting
the desired vehicle set speed.
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Cruise
Control. “CRUISE CONTROL READY” will appear
in the instrument cluster display to indicate the
Cruise Control is on. To turn the system off,
push the on/off button a second time. “CRUISE
CONTROL OFF” will appear in the instrument
cluster display to indicate the Cruise Control is
off. The system should be turned off when not
in use.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Cruise Control on. When the vehicle
has reached the desired speed, push and
release the SET (+) or SET (-) button. Release
the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at
the selected speed. Once a speed has been set,
a message “CRUISE CONTROL SET TO MPH
(km/h)” will appear indicating the set speed. A
cruise indicator lamp, along with set speed will
also appear and stay on in the instrument
cluster when the speed is set.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
When the Cruise Control is set, you can increase
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in
an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust until the button
is released, then the new set speed will be
established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the condi-
tions, and you could lose control and have an
accident. Do not use Cruise Control in heavy
traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
WARNING!
Leaving the Cruise Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could acciden-
tally set the system or cause it to go faster
than you want. You could lose control and
have an accident. Always turn the system OFF
when you are not using it.
4
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 105
106 STARTING AND OPERATING
Using Cruise Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
The Cruise Control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal. On steep hills, a
greater speed loss or gain may occur so it may
be preferable to drive without Cruise Control.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RES
button and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A tap on the brake pedal, or pushing the CANC
button, or normal brake pressure will deactivate
the Cruise Control system without erasing the
set speed from memory.
The following conditions will also deactivate the
Cruise Control without erasing the set speed
from memory:
Vehicle parking brake is applied
Stability event occurs
Gear selector is moved out of DRIVE
Engine overspeed occurs
Pushing the on/off button or placing the ignition
in the OFF position, will erase the set speed
from memory.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — I F
E
QUIPPED
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) increases the
driving convenience provided by Cruise Control
while traveling on highways and major
roadways. However, it is not a safety system
and not designed to prevent collisions. The
Cruise Control function performs differently if
your vehicle is not equipped with ACC
Ú page 104.
ACC will allow you to keep Cruise Control
engaged in light to moderate traffic conditions
without the constant need to reset your speed.
ACC utilizes a radar sensor and a forward facing
camera designed to detect a vehicle directly
ahead of you to maintain a set speed.
NOTE:
If the ACC sensor detects a vehicle ahead,
ACC will apply limited braking or accelerate
(not to exceed the original set speed) auto-
matically to maintain a preset following
distance, while matching the speed of the
vehicle ahead.
Any chassis / suspension or tire size modifi-
cations to the vehicle will affect the perfor-
mance of the Adaptive Cruise Control and
Forward Collision Warning system.
Fixed Speed Cruise Control alone (an ACC
distance not set) will not detect vehicles
directly ahead of you. Always be aware of the
mode selected Ú page 360.
WARNING!
Cruise Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the condi-
tions, and you could lose control and have an
accident. Do not use Cruise Control in heavy
traffic or on roads that are winding, icy,
snow-covered or slippery.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 106
STARTING AND OPERATING 107
(Continued)
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Operation
The buttons on the right side of the steering
wheel operate the ACC system.
Adaptive Cruise Control Buttons
WARNING!
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a conve-
nience system. It is not a substitute for
active driver involvement. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to be attentive of
road, traffic, and weather conditions,
vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle
ahead; and, most importantly, brake opera-
tion to ensure safe operation of the vehicle
under all road conditions. Your complete
attention is always required while driving to
maintain safe control of your vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision and death or serious personal
injury.
The ACC system:
Does not react to pedestrians,
oncoming vehicles, and stationary
objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a
traffic jam or a disabled vehicle).
Cannot take street, traffic, and weather
conditions into account, and may be
limited upon adverse sight distance
conditions.
Does not always fully recognize
complex driving conditions, which can
result in wrong or missing distance
warnings.
You should turn the ACC system off:
When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy
snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex
driving situations (i.e., in highway construc-
tion zones).
When entering a turn lane or highway off
ramp; when driving on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or
have steep uphill or downhill slopes.
When towing a trailer up or down steep
slopes.
When circumstances do not allow safe
driving at a constant speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — CANC/Cancel
2 — Fixed Speed Cruise Control On/Off
3 — Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) On/Off
4 — Distance Decrease Button
5 — SET (+)/Accel
6 — RES/Resume
7 — SET (-)/Decel
8 — Distance Increase Button
4
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 107
108 STARTING AND OPERATING
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Menu
The instrument cluster display will show the
current ACC system settings. The information it
displays depends on ACC system status.
Push the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button until one of the following appears in the
instrument cluster display:
Adaptive Cruise Control Off
When ACC is deactivated, the display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control Off.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Ready
When ACC is activated, but the vehicle speed
setting has not been selected, the display will
read “Adaptive Cruise Control Ready.”
Adaptive Cruise Control Set
When the SET (+) or the SET (-) button is
pushed, the display will read “ACC SET.”
When ACC is set, the set speed will show in the
instrument cluster display.
The ACC screen may display once again if any of
the following ACC activity occurs:
System Cancel
Driver Override
System Off
ACC Proximity Warning
ACC Unavailable Warning
The instrument cluster display will return to the
last display selected after five seconds of no
ACC display activity.
Activating Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
The minimum set speed for the ACC system is
20 mph (32 km/h).
When the system is turned on and in the ready
state, the instrument cluster display will read
“ACC Ready.”
When the system is off, the instrument cluster
display will read “Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
Off.”
NOTE:
You cannot engage ACC under the following
conditions:
When in 4WD Low
When the brakes are applied
When the parking brake is applied
When the automatic transmission is in PARK,
REVERSE or NEUTRAL
When the vehicle speed is below the
minimum speed range
When the brakes are overheated
When the driver’s door is open at low speeds
When the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled at
low speeds
When there is a stationary vehicle in front of
your vehicle in close proximity
ESC Full Off Mode is active
To Activate/Deactivate
Push and release the Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) on/off button. The ACC menu in the
instrument cluster display will read “ACC
Ready.”
To turn the system off, push and release the
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off button
again. At this time, the system will turn off and
the instrument cluster display will read
“Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Off.”
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 108
STARTING AND OPERATING 109
To Set A Desired Speed
When the vehicle reaches the speed desired,
push the SET (+) button or the SET (-) button
and release. The instrument cluster display will
show the set speed.
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control can be used without
an ACC distance set. To change between the
different modes, push the ACC on/off button
which turns the ACC and the Fixed Speed Cruise
Control off. Pushing the Fixed Speed Cruise
Control on/off button will result in turning on
(changing to) Fixed Speed Cruise Control mode.
If ACC is set when the vehicle speed is below
20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed will default to
20 mph (20 km/h).
NOTE:
Fixed Speed Cruise Control cannot be set below
20 mph (32 km/h).
If either system is set when the vehicle speed is
above 20 mph (32 km/h), the set speed shall
be the current speed of the vehicle.
NOTE:
Keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal
can cause the vehicle to continue to accel-
erate beyond the set speed. If this occurs, the
message “DRIVER OVERRIDE” will display in
the instrument cluster display.
If you continue to accelerate beyond the set
speed while an ACC distance is also set, the
system will not be controlling the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
The vehicle speed will only be determined by
the position of the accelerator pedal.
To Cancel
The following conditions cancel the ACC or Fixed
Speed Cruise Control systems:
The brake pedal is applied
The CANC (cancel) button is pushed
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) activates
The gear selector is removed from the DRIVE
position
WARNING!
Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) sys-
tem on when not in use is dangerous. You
could accidentally set the system or cause it
to go faster than you want. You could lose
control and have a collision. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
WARNING!
In the Normal (Fixed Speed) Cruise Control
mode, the system will not react to vehicles
ahead. In addition, the proximity warning
does not activate and no alarm will sound
even if you are too close to the vehicle ahead
since neither the presence of the vehicle
ahead nor the vehicle-to-vehicle distance is
detected. Be sure to maintain a safe distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.
Always be aware which mode is selected.
4
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 109
110 STARTING AND OPERATING
The Electronic Stability Control/Traction
Control System (ESC/TCS) activates
The vehicle parking brake is applied
The Trailer Sway Control (TSC) activates
The driver switches ESC to Full Off mode
The braking temperature exceeds normal
range (overheated)
The following conditions will only cancel the ACC
system:
Driver seat belt is unbuckled at low speeds
Driver door is opened at low speeds
To Turn Off
The system will turn off and clear the set speed
in memory if:
The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) on/off
button is pushed
The Fixed Speed Cruise Control on/off button
is pushed
The ignition is placed in the OFF position
4WD Low is engaged
To Resume
If there is a set speed in memory, push the RES
(resume) button and remove your foot from the
accelerator pedal. The instrument cluster
display will show the last set speed.
Resume can be used at any speed above
20 mph (32 km/h) when only Fixed Speed
Cruise Control is being used.
Resume can be used at any speed above 0 mph
(0 km/h) when ACC is active.
NOTE:
While in ACC mode when the vehicle comes
to a complete stop longer than two seconds,
the system will cancel. The driver will have to
apply the brakes to keep the vehicle at a
standstill.
ACC cannot be resumed if there is a
stationary vehicle in front of your vehicle in
close proximity.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Or Decrease The Set Speed
After setting a speed, you can increase the set
speed by pushing the SET (+) button, or
decrease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
U.S. Speed (mph)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 mph speed adjustment. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
adjustment of 1 mph.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 5 mph incre-
ments until the button is released. The new
set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
WARNING!
The Resume function should only be used if
traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming
a set speed that is too high or too low for pre-
vailing traffic and road conditions could
cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate
too sharply for safe operation. Failure to fol-
low these warnings can result in a collision
and death or serious personal injury.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 110
STARTING AND OPERATING 111
Metric Speed (km/h)
Pushing the SET (+), or SET (-) button once
will result in a 1 km/h speed adjustment.
Each subsequent tap of the button results in
an adjustment of 1 km/h.
If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to adjust in 10 km/h
increments until the button is released. The
new set speed is reflected in the instrument
cluster display.
NOTE:
When you override and push the SET (+) button
or SET (-) button, the new set speed will be the
current speed of the vehicle.
When An ACC Distance Is Also Set:
When you use the SET (-) button to decel-
erate, if the engine’s braking power does not
slow the vehicle sufficiently to reach the set
speed, the brake system will automatically
slow the vehicle.
The ACC system decelerates the vehicle to a
full stop when following the vehicle in front. If
your vehicle follows the vehicle in front to a
standstill, after two seconds the driver will
either have to push the RES (resume) button,
or apply the accelerator pedal to reengage
the ACC to the existing set speed.
The ACC system maintains set speed when
driving uphill and downhill. However, a slight
speed change on moderate hills is normal. In
addition, downshifting may occur while
climbing uphill or descending downhill. This
is normal operation and necessary to main-
tain set speed. When driving uphill and down-
hill, the ACC system will cancel if the braking
temperature exceeds normal range (over-
heated).
Setting The Following Distance In ACC
The specified following distance for ACC can be
set by varying the distance setting between four
bars (longest), three bars (long), two bars
(medium) and one bar (short). Using this
distance setting and the vehicle speed, ACC
calculates and sets the distance to the vehicle
ahead. This distance setting will show in the
instrument cluster display.
Distance Settings
To increase the distance setting, push the
Distance Increase button and release. Each
time the button is pushed, the distance setting
increases by one bar (longer).
To decrease the distance setting, push the
Distance Decrease button and release. Each
time the button is pushed, the distance setting
decreases by one bar (shorter).
If a slower moving vehicle is detected in the
same lane, the instrument cluster display will
show the ACC Set With Target Detected Light.
1 — Longest Distance Setting (Four Bars)
2 — Long Distance Setting (Three Bars)
3 — Medium Distance Setting (Two Bars)
4 — Short Distance Setting (One Bar)
4
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 111
112 STARTING AND OPERATING
The system will then adjust vehicle speed
automatically to maintain the distance setting,
regardless of the set speed.
The vehicle will then maintain the set distance
until:
The vehicle ahead accelerates to a speed
above the set speed.
The vehicle ahead moves out of your lane or
view of the sensor.
The distance setting is changed.
The system disengages Ú page 108.
The maximum braking applied by ACC is limited;
however, the driver can always apply the brakes
manually, if necessary.
NOTE:
The brake lights will illuminate whenever the
ACC system applies the brakes.
A Proximity Warning will alert the driver if ACC
predicts that its maximum braking level is not
sufficient to maintain the set distance. If this
occurs, a visual alert “BRAKE” will flash in the
instrument cluster display and a chime will
sound while ACC continues to apply its
maximum braking force.
NOTE:
The “BRAKE!” screen in the instrument cluster
display is a warning for the driver to take action
and does not necessarily mean that the
Forward Collision Warning system is applying
the brakes autonomously.
Overtake Aid
When driving with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
engaged and following a vehicle, the system will
provide an additional acceleration up to the ACC
set speed to assist in passing the vehicle. This
additional acceleration is triggered when the
driver utilizes the left turn signal and will only be
active when passing on the left hand side.
ACC Operation At Stop
In the event that the ACC system brings your
vehicle to a standstill while following the vehicle
in front, your vehicle will resume motion,
without any driver interaction, if the vehicle in
front starts moving within two seconds of your
vehicle coming to a standstill.
If the vehicle in front does not start moving within
two seconds of your vehicle coming to a standstill,
the driver will either have to push the RES
(resume) button, or apply the accelerator pedal to
reengage the ACC to the existing set speed.
NOTE:
After the ACC system holds your vehicle at a
standstill for approximately three consecutive
minutes, the parking brake will be activated,
and the ACC system will be cancelled.
While ACC is holding your vehicle at a standstill,
if the driver seat belt is unbuckled or the driver
door is opened, the parking brake will be
activated, and the ACC system will be cancelled.
Display Warnings And Maintenance
“Wipe Front Radar Sensor In Front Of Vehicle”
Warning
The “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning will display and a chime will
sound when conditions temporarily limit system
performance.
WARNING!
When the ACC system is resumed, the driver
must ensure that there are no pedestrians,
vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle.
Failure to follow these warnings can result in a
collision and death or serious personal injury.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 112
STARTING AND OPERATING 113
This most often occurs at times of poor visibility,
such as in snow or heavy rain. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt or ice. In these
cases, the instrument cluster display will display
the above message and the system will
deactivate.
This message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in highly reflective areas (i.e. ice
and snow, or tunnels with reflective tiles). The
ACC system will recover after the vehicle has left
these areas. Under rare conditions, when the
radar is not tracking any vehicles or objects in
its path this warning may temporarily occur.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front Radar
Sensor” warning is active, Fixed Speed Cruise
Control is still available.
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the sensor. It may require
cleaning or removal of an obstruction. The
sensor is located in the center of the vehicle
behind the lower grille.
To keep the ACC System operating properly, it is
important to note the following maintenance
items:
Always keep the sensor clean. Carefully wipe
the sensor lens with a soft cloth. Be cautious
not to damage the sensor lens.
Do not remove any screws from the sensor.
Doing so could cause an ACC system
malfunction or failure and require a sensor
realignment.
If the sensor or front end of the vehicle is
damaged due to a collision, see an autho-
rized dealer for service.
Do not attach or install any accessories near
the sensor, including transparent material or
aftermarket grilles. Doing so could cause an
ACC system failure or malfunction.
When the condition that deactivated the system
is no longer present, the system will return to
the “Adaptive Cruise Control Off” state and will
resume function by simply reactivating it.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Unavailable Wipe Front
Radar Sensor” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without
any snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction,
have the radar sensor realigned at an autho-
rized dealer.
Installing a snow plow, front-end protector,
an aftermarket grille or modifying the grille is
not recommended. Doing so may block the
sensor and inhibit ACC/FCW operation.
“Clean Front Windshield” Warning
The “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” warning will display and a
chime will sound when conditions temporarily
limit system performance. This most often
occurs at times of poor visibility, such as in
snow or heavy rain and fog. The ACC system
may also become temporarily blinded due to
obstructions, such as mud, dirt, or ice on
windshield and fog on the inside of glass. In
these cases, the instrument cluster display will
read “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” and the system will have
degraded performance.
This message can sometimes be displayed
while driving in adverse weather conditions. The
ACC/FCW system will recover after the vehicle
has left these areas. Under rare conditions,
when the camera is not tracking any vehicles or
objects in its path this warning may temporarily
occur.
4
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 113
114 STARTING AND OPERATING
If weather conditions are not a factor, the driver
should examine the windshield and the camera
located on the back side of the inside rearview
mirror. They may require cleaning or removal of
an obstruction.
When the condition that created limited
functionality is no longer present, the system
will return to full functionality.
NOTE:
If the “ACC/FCW Limited Functionality Clean
Front Windshield” message occurs frequently
(e.g. more than once on every trip) without any
snow, rain, mud, or other obstruction, have the
windshield and forward facing camera
inspected at an authorized dealer.
Service ACC/FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster display reads “ACC/FCW Unavailable
Service Required” or “Cruise/FCW Unavailable
Service Required”, there may be an internal
system fault or a temporary malfunction that
limits ACC functionality. Although the vehicle is
still drivable under normal conditions, ACC will
be temporarily unavailable. If this occurs, try
activating ACC again later, following an ignition
cycle. If the problem persists, see an authorized
dealer.
Precautions While Driving With ACC
In certain driving situations, ACC may have
detection issues. In these cases, ACC may
brake late or unexpectedly. The driver needs to
stay alert and may need to intervene. The
following are examples of these types of
situations:
Towing A Trailer
Towing a trailer is not advised when using ACC.
Offset Driving
ACC may not detect a vehicle in the same lane
that is offset from your direct line of travel, or a
vehicle merging in from a side lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
The offset vehicle may move in and out of the
line of travel, which can cause your vehicle to
brake or accelerate unexpectedly.
Offset Driving Condition Example
Turns And Bends
When driving on a curve with ACC engaged, the
system may increase or decrease the vehicle
speed for stability, with no vehicle ahead
detected. Once the vehicle is out of the curve the
system will resume your original set speed. This
is a part of normal ACC system functionality.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 114
STARTING AND OPERATING 115
NOTE:
On tight turns ACC performance may be limited.
Turn Or Bend Example
Using ACC On Hills
ACC performance may be limited when driving
on hills. ACC may not detect a vehicle in your
lane depending on the speed, vehicle load,
traffic conditions, and the steepness of the hill.
ACC Hill Example
Lane Changing
ACC may not detect a vehicle until it is
completely in the lane in which you are
traveling. In the lane changing example below,
ACC has not yet detected the vehicle changing
lanes and it may not detect the vehicle until it's
too late for the ACC system to take action. ACC
may not detect a vehicle until it is completely in
the lane. There may not be sufficient distance to
the lane-changing vehicle. Always be attentive
and ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Lane Changing Example
Narrow Vehicles
Some narrow vehicles, such as motorcycles,
traveling near the outer edges of the lane or
merging into the lane are not detected until they
have moved to the center of the lane. There may
not be sufficient distance to the vehicle ahead.
Narrow Vehicle Example
4
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 115
116 STARTING AND OPERATING
Stationary Objects And Vehicles
ACC does not react to stationary objects and
stationary vehicles. For example, ACC will not
react in situations where the vehicle you are
following exits your lane and the vehicle ahead
is stopped in your lane. Always be attentive and
ready to apply the brakes if necessary.
Stationary Object And Stationary Vehicle Example
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST SYSTEM —
IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides
visual and audible indications of the distance
between the rear fascia and a detected obstacle
when backing up (e.g. during a parking
maneuver). For limitations of this system and
recommendations see, Ú page 119.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition cycle
when the ignition is changed to the ON/RUN
position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE. The system will remain
active until the vehicle speed is increased to
approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. While
in REVERSE and above the system's operating
speed, a warning will appear in the instrument
cluster display indicating the vehicle speed is too
fast. The system will become active again if the
vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less than
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
PARKSENSE SENSORS
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear
fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind the
vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of view.
The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depending
on the location, type and orientation of the
obstacle.
PARKSENSE WARNING DISPLAY
The ParkSense Warning screen will only be
displayed if “Sound and Display” is selected
from the Customer - Programmable Features
section of the Uconnect system Ú page 139.
The ParkSense Warning screen is located within
the instrument cluster display Ú page 68. It
provides visual warnings to indicate the
distance between the rear fascia/bumper and
the detected obstacle.
PARKSENSE DISPLAY
When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the instrument
cluster display will show the park assist system
status.
The system will indicate a detected obstacle by
showing a single arc in one or more regions
based on the obstacle’s distance and location
relative to the vehicle.
If an obstacle is detected in the center rear
region, the display will show a single solid arc in
the center rear region. As the vehicle moves
closer to the obstacle, the display will show the
single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the
audible chime increases as the objects get
close to the vehicle.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 116
STARTING AND OPERATING 117
If an obstacle is detected in the left and /or right rear region, the display will show a single flashing arc in the left and/or right rear region. As the vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the display will show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the audible chime increases as the objects get close
to the vehicle.
Rear ParkSense Arcs
1 — Continuous Tone/Flashing Arc 4 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
2 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 5 — Slow Tone/Solid Arc
3 — Fast Tone/Flashing Arc 6 — Single 1/2 Second Tone/Solid Arc
4
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 117
118 STARTING AND OPERATING
The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone. The following chart shows the
warning alert operation when the system is detecting an obstacle:
NOTE:
ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio,
if on, when the system is sounding an audio
tone.
ENABLING AND DISABLING PARKSENSE
ParkSense can be enabled and
disabled with the ParkSense switch,
located on the switch panel below the
Uconnect display.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster
display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for approximately five seconds.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service. The
ParkSense switch LED will be off when the
system is enabled. If the ParkSense switch is
pushed, and requires service, the ParkSense
switch LED will blink momentarily, and then the
LED will be on.
SERVICE THE PARKSENSE REAR PARK
A
SSIST SYSTEM
During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense
Rear Park Assist System has detected a faulted
condition, the instrument cluster display will
actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle,
and it will display the “PARKSENSE
WARNING ALERTS
Rear Distance
(inches/cm)
Greater than
79 inches
(200 cm)
79-59 inches
(200-150 cm)
59-47 inches
(150-120 cm)
47-39 inches
(120-100 cm)
39-25 inches
(100-65 cm)
25-12 inches
(65-30 cm)
Less than
12 inches
(30 cm)
Arcs — Left None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Center None 6th Solid 5th Solid 4th Solid 3rd Flashing 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Arcs — Right None None None None None 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing
Audible Alert
Chime
None
Single, 1/2 sec-
ond, audible
chime is heard.
Audible chime increases as the objects get close to the vehicle. Continuous
Radio Volume
Reduced
No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 118
STARTING AND OPERATING 119
UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS” or the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message. Under this condition,
ParkSense will not operate.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR
SENSORS” appears in the instrument cluster
display make sure the outer surface and the
underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean
and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other
obstruction and then cycle the ignition. If the
message continues to appear, see your
authorized dealer.
If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” appears in the instrument cluster
display, see an authorized dealer.
CLEANING THE PARKSENSE SYSTEM
Clean the Rear Park Assist sensors with water,
car wash soap and a soft cloth. Do not use
rough or hard cloths. In washing stations, clean
sensors quickly keeping the vapor jet/high
pressure washing nozzles at least 4 inches
(10 cm) from the sensors. Do not scratch or
poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could damage
the sensors.
PARKSENSE SYSTEM USAGE
P
RECAUTIONS
Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the Park-
Sense system operating properly.
Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibra-
tions could affect the performance of Park-
Sense.
When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument
cluster display will read “PARKSENSE OFF.”
Furthermore, once you turn ParkSense off, it
remains off until you turn it on again, even if
you cycle the ignition.
ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume
of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly,
taking care not to scratch or damage them.
The sensors must not be covered with ice,
snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do
so can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not detect
an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it
could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
Use the ParkSense switch to turn the Park-
Sense system off if objects such as bicycle
carriers, etc. are attached to the rear fascia/
bumper. Failure to do so can result in the
system misinterpreting a close object as a
sensor problem, causing the “PARKSENSE
UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED” message
to be displayed in the instrument cluster
display.
NOTE:
If any objects are attached to the bumper within
a 6.5 ft (2 m) field of view, they will interfere and
cause false alerts and possibly blockage.
The operation of the rear sensors is automat-
ically deactivated when the trailer's electric
plug is inserted in the vehicle's tow hook
socket. The rear sensors are automatically
reactivated when the trailer's cable plug is
removed.
4
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 119
120 STARTING AND OPERATING
LANESENSE — IF EQUIPPED
LANESENSE OPERATION
The LaneSense system is operational at speeds
above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h). The LaneSense system uses a
forward looking camera to detect lane markings
and measure vehicle position within the lane
boundaries.
When both lane markings are detected and the
driver drifts out of the lane (no turn signal
applied), the LaneSense system provides a
haptic warning in the form of torque applied to
the steering wheel, as well as a visual warning
in the instrument cluster display, to prompt the
driver to remain within the lane boundaries.
The driver may manually override the haptic
warning by applying torque into the steering
wheel at any time.
When only a single lane marking is detected
and the driver drifts across the lane marking (no
turn signal applied), the LaneSense system
provides a visual warning through the
instrument cluster display to prompt the driver
to remain within the lane. When only a single
lane marking is detected, a haptic (torque)
warning will not be provided.
NOTE:
When operating conditions have been met, the
LaneSense system will monitor if the driver’s
hands are on the steering wheel and provide an
audible and visual warning to the driver if
removed. The system will cancel if the driver
does not return their hands to the wheel.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always check
carefully behind your vehicle, look behind
you, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, and
blind spots before backing up. You are
responsible for safety and must continue to
pay attention to your surroundings. Failure
to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly be disconnected from
the vehicle when the vehicle is not used for
towing. Failure to do so can result in injury
or damage to vehicles or obstacles
because the hitch ball will be much closer
to the obstacle than the rear fascia when
the vehicle sounds the continuous tone.
Also, the sensors could detect the ball
mount and hitch ball assembly, depending
on its size and shape, giving a false indica-
tion that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle,
including small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above or
below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to stop
in time when an obstacle is detected. It is
recommended that the driver looks over
his/her shoulder when using ParkSense.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 120
STARTING AND OPERATING 121
TURNING LANESENSE ON OR OFF
The LaneSense button is located on
the switch panel below the Uconnect
display.
To turn the LaneSense system on, push the
LaneSense button (LED turns off). A
“LaneSense On” message is shown in the
instrument cluster display.
To turn the LaneSense system off, push the
LaneSense button once (LED turns on).
NOTE:
The LaneSense system will retain the last
system state on or off from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is changed to the ON/
RUN position.
LANESENSE WARNING MESSAGE
The LaneSense system will indicate the current
lane drift condition through the instrument
cluster display.
Base Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries
have not been detected and the LaneSense
telltale is solid white.
System On With Gray Lines/White Telltale
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-
Sense telltale is solid white when only the
left lane marking has been detected and the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left lane line flashes from
white to gray and the LaneSense telltale
changes from solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached With Flashing White To Gray Line/
Flashing Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only
the right lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
both of the lane markings have been
detected. The LaneSense telltale is solid
green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to
provide visual warnings in the instrument
cluster display and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane depar-
ture occurs.
4
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 121
122 STARTING AND OPERATING
Lanes Sensed With White Lines/Green Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the left lane line turns solid
white. The LaneSense telltale changes
from solid green to solid yellow. At this time
torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: if approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
Lane Sensed With Solid White Line/Solid Yellow
Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left lane line flashes from
white to gray, and the LaneSense telltale
changes from solid yellow to flashing yellow.
At this time torque is applied to the steering
wheel in the opposite direction of the lane
boundary.
For example: if approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
Lane Approached With Flashing White To Gray Line/
Flashing Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
Premium Instrument Cluster Display — If
Equipped
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines are gray when both of the lane boundaries
have not been detected and the LaneSense
telltale is solid white.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 122
STARTING AND OPERATING 123
System On With Gray Lines/White Telltale
Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the Lane-
Sense telltale is solid white when only the
left lane marking has been detected and the
system is ready to provide visual warnings in
the instrument cluster display if an uninten-
tional lane departure occurs.
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left lane line flashes yellow
and the LaneSense telltale changes from
solid white to flashing yellow.
Lane Approached With Flashing Yellow Line/Flashing
Yellow Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure when only
the right lane marking has been detected.
Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected
When the LaneSense system is on, the lane
lines turn from gray to white to indicate that
both of the lane markings have been
detected. The LaneSense telltale is solid
green when both lane markings have been
detected and the system is “armed” to
provide visual warnings in the instrument
cluster display and a torque warning in the
steering wheel if an unintentional lane depar-
ture occurs.
Lanes Sensed With White Lines/Green Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses a lane
drift situation, the left lane line turns solid
yellow. The LaneSense telltale changes
from solid green to solid yellow. At this time
torque is applied to the steering wheel in the
opposite direction of the lane boundary.
For example: if approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
4
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 123
124 STARTING AND OPERATING
Lane Sensed With Solid Yellow Line/Solid Yellow
Telltale
When the LaneSense system senses the lane
has been approached and is in a lane depar-
ture situation, the left lane line flashes
yellow. The LaneSense telltale stays solid
yellow. At this time torque is applied to the
steering wheel in the opposite direction of
the lane boundary.
For example: if approaching the left side of
the lane the steering wheel will turn to the
right.
Lane Approached With Flashing Yellow/Solid Yellow
Telltale
NOTE:
The LaneSense system operates with similar
behavior for a right lane departure.
CHANGING LANESENSE STATUS
The LaneSense system has settings to adjust
the intensity of the torque warning (Low/
Medium/High) and the warning zone sensitivity
(Early/Medium/Late) that you can configure
through the Uconnect system Ú page 139.
NOTE:
When enabled the system operates above
37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph
(180 km/h).
The warnings are disabled with the use of the
turn signal.
The system will not apply torque to the
steering wheel whenever a safety system
engages (Anti-Lock Brakes, Traction Control
System, Electronic Stability Control, Forward
Collision Warning, etc.).
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows you
to see an on-screen image of the rear
surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear
selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be
displayed on the Navigation/Multimedia radio
display screen along with a caution note to
“Check Entire Surroundings” across the top of
the screen. After five seconds this note will
disappear. The ParkView camera is located on
the rear of the vehicle above the rear license
plate.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned off), the rear camera
mode is exited and the previous screen
appears.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 124
STARTING AND OPERATING 125
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera
1. Press the “Controls” button located on the
bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the “Backup Camera” button to turn
the Rear View Camera system on.
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has
programmable modes of operation that may be
selected through the Uconnect system
Ú page 139.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned off), the rear camera
mode is exited and the previous screen
appears. When the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE (with camera delay turned on), the
camera image will continue to be displayed for
up to 10 seconds unless the following
conditions occur: The vehicle speed exceeds
8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into
PARK, the vehicle’s ignition is placed in the OFF
position, or the user presses “X” to exit out of
the camera video display.
When enabled, active guidelines are overlaid on
the image to illustrate the width of the vehicle
and its projected backup path based on the
steering wheel position. A dashed center line
overlay indicates the center of the vehicle to
assist with parking or aligning to a hitch/
receiver. Different colored zones indicate the
distance to the rear of the vehicle. The following
table shows the approximate distances for each
zone:
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
Zoom View
When the Rear View Camera image is being
displayed, and the vehicle speed is below 8 mph
(13 km/h) while in any gear, Zoom View is
available. By pressing the “magnifying glass”
icon in the upper left of the display screen, the
image will zoom in to four times the standard
view. Pressing the icon a second time will return
the view to the standard Back Up Camera
display.
Zone
Distance To The Rear
Of The Vehicle
Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)
Yellow
1 ft - 6.5 ft
(30 cm - 2 m)
Green
6.5 ft or greater
(2 m or greater)
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the ParkView Rear Back Up
Camera. Always check carefully behind your
vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians,
animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind
spots before backing up. You are responsible
for the safety of your surroundings and must
continue to pay attention while backing up.
Failure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
CAUTION!
To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should
only be used as a parking aid. The ParkView
camera is unable to view every obstacle or
object in your drive path.
To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must
be driven slowly when using ParkView to be
able to stop in time when an obstacle is
seen. It is recommended that the driver
look frequently over his/her shoulder when
using ParkView.
4
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 125
126 STARTING AND OPERATING
When Zoom View is selected while the vehicle is
in REVERSE, then shifted to DRIVE, the camera
delay view will display the standard Back Up
Camera view. If the vehicle is then returned to
REVERSE gear from DRIVE, the Zoom View
selection will automatically resume.
Shifting to NEUTRAL from any gear will maintain
the selected view (Zoom or Standard) as long as
the vehicle is below 8 mph (13 km/h).
If the vehicle is in PARK, Zoom View is available
until the gear selector is placed in DRIVE or
REVERSE and speeds are at or above 8 mph
(13 km/h).
NOTE:
If the vehicle is in DRIVE, NEUTRAL, or
REVERSE, and speed is greater than or equal
to 8 mph (13 km/h), Zoom View is unavail-
able and the icon will appear grey.
While in Zoom View, the guidelines will not be
visible.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
There is no fuel filler cap. Two flapper doors
inside the pipe seal the system.
1. Open the fuel filler door by pushing on the
outer edge of the fuel door.
Fuel Filler Door
Fuel Filler Pipe
2. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the filler pipe;
the nozzle opens and holds the flapper door
while refueling.
3. Fill the vehicle with fuel, and when the fuel
nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is
full.
4. Keep the nozzle in the filler for five seconds
after nozzle clicks to allow fuel to drain from
the nozzle.
5. Remove the fuel nozzle and close the fuel
door.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 126
STARTING AND OPERATING 127
VEHICLE LOADING
CERTIFICATION LABEL
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration regulations, your vehicle has a
certification label affixed to the driver's side
door or pillar.
This label contains the month and year of
manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR), front and rear Gross Axle Weight Rating
(GAWR), and Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is
included on this label and indicates the Month,
Day and Hour of manufacture. The bar code
that appears on the bottom of the label is your
VIN.
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your
vehicle including driver, passengers, vehicle,
options and cargo. The label also specifies
maximum capacities of front and rear Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Total load must be
limited so GVWR and front and rear GAWR are
not exceeded.
Payload
The payload of a vehicle is defined as the
allowable load weight a truck can carry,
including the weight of the driver, all
passengers, options and cargo.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on
the front and rear axles. The load must be
distributed in the cargo area so that the GAWR
of each axle is not exceeded.
Each axle GAWR is determined by the
components in the system with the lowest load
carrying capacity (axle, springs, tires or wheels).
Heavier axles or suspension components
sometimes specified by purchasers for
increased durability does not necessarily
increase the vehicle's GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label
represents the actual tire size on your vehicle.
Replacement tires must be equal to the load
capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire
size listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your
vehicle for all loading conditions up to full
GAWR.
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the
total weight of the vehicle with all fluids,
including vehicle fuel, at full capacity
conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb
weight values are determined by weighing your
vehicle on a commercial scale before any
occupants or cargo are added.
Loading
The actual total weight and the weight of the
front and rear of your vehicle at the ground can
best be determined by weighing it when it is
loaded and ready for operation.
The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a
commercial scale to insure that the GVWR has
not been exceeded. The weight on the front and
rear of the vehicle should then be determined
separately to be sure that the load is properly
distributed over the front and rear axle.
Weighing the vehicle may show that the GAWR
of either the front or rear axles has been
4
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 127
128 STARTING AND OPERATING
exceeded but the total load is within the
specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted
from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate
until the specified weight limitations are met.
Store the heavier items down low and be sure
that the weight is distributed equally. Stow all
loose items securely before driving.
Improper weight distributions can have an
adverse effect on the way your vehicle steers
and handles and the way the brakes operate.
TRAILER TOWING
In this section you will find safety tips and
information on limits to the type of towing you
can reasonably do with your vehicle. Before
towing a trailer, carefully review this information
to tow your load as efficiently and safely as
possible.
To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty
coverage, follow the requirements and
recommendations in this manual concerning
vehicles used for trailer towing.
COMMON TOWING DEFINITIONS
The following trailer towing related definitions
will assist you in understanding the following
information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your
vehicle. This includes driver, passengers, cargo
and tongue weight. The total load must be
limited so that you do not exceed the GVWR
Ú page 127.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
weight of all cargo, consumables and
equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in
or on the trailer in its "loaded and ready for
operation" condition.
The recommended way to measure GTW is to
put your fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale.
The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front
and rear axles. Distribute the load over the front
and rear axles evenly. Make sure that you do
not exceed either front or rear GAWR
Ú page 127.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The TW is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this
as part of the load on your vehicle.
Trailer Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height
multiplied by the maximum width of the front of
a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
The TSC can be a mechanical telescoping link
that can be installed between the hitch receiver
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWR.
If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles.
This could cause you to lose control. Also
overloading can shorten the life of your vehi-
cle.
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the
maximum front or rear GAWR. A dangerous
driving condition can result if either rating is
exceeded. You could lose control of the vehi-
cle and have a collision.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 128
STARTING AND OPERATING 129
and the trailer tongue that typically provides
adjustable friction associated with the
telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted
trailer swaying motions while traveling.
If equipped, the electronic TSC recognizes a
swaying trailer and automatically applies
individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine
power to attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer
tongue weight, just as if it were luggage located
at a hitch ball or some other connecting point of
the vehicle. These kinds of hitches are
commonly used to tow small and medium sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are
typically used for heavier loads to distribute
trailer tongue weight to the tow vehicle's front
axle and the trailer axle(s). When used in
accordance with the manufacturer's directions,
it provides for a more level ride, offering more
consistent steering and brake control thereby
enhancing towing safety. The addition of a
friction/hydraulic sway control also dampens
sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and
contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer
stability. Trailer sway control and a weight
distributing (load equalizing) hitch are
recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW)
and may be required depending on vehicle and
trailer configuration/loading to comply with
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) requirements.
TRAILER TOWING WEIGHTS (MAXIMUM TRAILER WEIGHT RATINGS)
WARNING!
An improperly adjusted Weight Distributing
Hitch system may reduce handling,
stability, braking performance, and could
result in a collision.
Weight Distributing Systems may not be
compatible with Surge Brake Couplers.
Consult with your hitch and trailer manufac-
turer or a reputable Recreational Vehicle
dealer for additional information.
Engine/Transmission Model
Maximum GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Maximum Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
2.4L / 6 Speed Auto FWD Trailer towing is not recommended.
2.4L / 9 Speed Auto FWD or 4WD 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)
When towing a trailer, the technically permissible laden weight may be exceeded by not more than 10% or 220 lbs (100 kg), whichever is lower pro-
vided that the operating speed is restricted to 62 mph (100 km/h) or less.
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds and loads.
4
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 129
130 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER AND TONGUE WEIGHT
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight
stamped on your trailer hitch.
Weight Distribution
Consider the following items when computing
the weight on the front/rear axles of the vehicle:
The trailer tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or
equipment put in or on your vehicle.
The weight of the driver and all passengers.
NOTE:
Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also,
additional factory-installed options, or autho-
rized dealer-installed options, must be consid-
ered as part of the total load on your vehicle.
Refer to the tire loading information placard
located on the driver’s door pillar for the
maximum combined weight of occupants and
cargo for your vehicle.
TOWING REQUIREMENTS
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle
drivetrain components, the following guidelines
are recommended.
Towing limits quoted represent the maximum towing ability of the vehicle at its Gross Combined Mass to restart on a 12 percent gradient at sea level.
The performance and economy of all models will be reduced when used for towing.
Engine/Transmission Model
Maximum GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Maximum Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
CAUTION!
Do not tow a trailer at all during the first
500 miles (805 km) the new vehicle is
driven. The engine, axle or other parts could
be damaged.
Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km)
that a trailer is towed, do not drive over
50 mph (80 km/h) and do not make starts
at full throttle. This helps the engine and
other parts of the vehicle wear in at the
heavier loads.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 130
STARTING AND OPERATING 131
(Continued)
Perform the maintenance listed in Scheduled
Servicing and the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 296. When towing a trailer, never
exceed the GAWR or GCWR ratings.
Towing Requirements — Tires
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a
compact spare tire.
Do not drive more than 50 mph (80 km/h)
when towing while using a full size spare tire.
Proper tire inflation pressures are essential
to the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle.
Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation
pressures before trailer usage.
Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire
damage before towing a trailer.
Replacing tires with a higher load carrying
capacity will not increase the vehicle's GVWR
and GAWR limits.
For further information Ú page 330.
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake
system or vacuum system of your vehicle
with that of the trailer. This could cause inad-
equate braking and possible personal injury.
An electronically actuated trailer brake
controller is required when towing a trailer
with electronically actuated brakes. When
towing a trailer equipped with a hydraulic
surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers
over 1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for
trailers in excess of 2,000 lbs (907 kg).
WARNING!
Make certain that the load is secured in the
trailer and will not shift during travel. When
trailering cargo that is not fully secured,
dynamic load shifts can occur that may be
difficult for the driver to control. You could
lose control of your vehicle and have a colli-
sion.
When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do
not overload your vehicle or trailer. Over-
loading can cause a loss of control, poor
performance or damage to brakes, axle,
engine, transmission, steering, suspension,
chassis structure or tires.
Safety chains must always be used
between your vehicle and trailer. Always
connect the chains to the hook retainers of
the vehicle hitch. Cross the chains under
the trailer tongue and allow enough slack
for turning corners.
Vehicles with trailers should not be parked
on a grade. When parking, apply the
parking brake on the tow vehicle. Put the
tow vehicle transmission in PARK. For
four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure the
transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,
block or "chock" the trailer wheels.
GCWR must not be exceeded.
Total weight must be distributed between
the tow vehicle and the trailer such that the
following four ratings are not exceeded:
GVWR
GTW
GAWR
Tongue weight rating for the trailer
hitch utilized.
WARNING! (Continued)
4
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 131
132 STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And
Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the
trailer size, stoplights and turn signals on the
trailer are required for motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and
seven-pin wiring harness. Use a factory
approved trailer harness and connector.
NOTE:
Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
The electrical connections are all complete to
the vehicle but you must mate the harness to a
trailer connector. Refer to the following
illustrations.
NOTE:
Disconnect trailer wiring connector from the
vehicle before launching a boat (or any other
device plugged into vehicle’s electrical
connect) into water.
Be sure to reconnect once clear from water
area.
Four-Pin Connector
WARNING!
Do not connect trailer brakes to your
vehicle's hydraulic brake lines. It can over-
load your brake system and cause it to fail.
You might not have brakes when you need
them and could have an accident.
Towing any trailer will increase your stop-
ping distance. When towing, you should
allow for additional space between your
vehicle and the vehicle in front of you.
Failure to do so could result in an accident.
CAUTION!
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do
this could lead to accelerated brake lining
wear, higher brake pedal effort, and longer
stopping distances.
1 — Ground
2 — Park
3 — Left Stop/Turn
4 — Right Stop/Turn
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 132
STARTING AND OPERATING 133
Seven-Pin Connector
TOWING TIPS
Before towing, practice turning, stopping, and
backing up the trailer in an area located away
from heavy traffic.
Automatic Transmission
Select the DRIVE (D) range when towing. The
transmission controls include a drive strategy to
avoid frequent shifting when towing. For
increased engine braking on steep downhill
grades, select the LOW range.
Cruise Control — If Equipped
Do not use on hilly terrain or with heavy
loads.
When using the Cruise Control, if you experi-
ence speed drops greater than 10 mph
(16 km/h), disengage until you can get back
to cruising speed.
Use Cruise Control in flat terrain and with
light loads to maximize fuel efficiency.
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME)
TOWING THIS VEHICLE BEHIND ANOTHER VEHICLE
1 — Battery
2 — Backup Lamps
3 — Right Stop/Turn
4 — Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
TOWING CONDITION WHEELS OFF THE GROUND FRONT WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD)
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Dolly Tow
REAR NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
FRONT OK NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL BEST METHOD OK
4
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 133
134 STARTING AND OPERATING
(Continued)
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow
applicable state and provincial laws. Contact
state and provincial Highway Safety offices
for additional details.
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake
feature is disabled before towing this vehicle,
to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake
engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is
enabled or disabled via the customer
programmable features in the Uconnect
Settings.
RECREATIONAL TOWING —
F
RONT-WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) M ODELS
Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the front
wheels are OFF the ground. This may be
accomplished using a tow dolly (front wheels off
the ground) or vehicle trailer (all four wheels off
the ground). If using a tow dolly, follow this
procedure:
1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,
following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
2. Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.
3. Apply the Electric Park Brake (EPB). Place
the transmission in PARK (P). Turn the
engine off.
4. Properly secure the front wheels to the
dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's
instructions.
5. Turn the ignition to the ON/RUN position,
but do not start the engine.
6. Press and hold the brake pedal.
7. Release the EPB.
8. Turn the ignition OFF, remove the key fob,
and release the brake pedal.
RECREATIONAL TOWING — 4X4
M
ODELS
Recreational towing (with all four wheels on the
ground, or using a towing dolly) is NOT
ALLOWED. This vehicle may be towed on flatbed
or vehicle trailer provided all four wheels are
OFF the ground.
DRIVING TIPS
ON-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
Utility vehicles have higher ground clearance
and a narrower track to make them capable of
performing in a wide variety of off-road
CAUTION!
Towing with the front wheels on the ground
will cause severe transmission damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remains released, while
being towed.
Do not use a bumper mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The fascia/bumper
face will be damaged.
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels on
the ground can cause severe transmission
and/or power transfer unit damage. Damage
from improper towing is not covered under
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 134
STARTING AND OPERATING 135
applications. Specific design characteristics
give them a higher center of gravity than
conventional passenger cars.
An advantage of the higher ground clearance is
a better view of the road, allowing you to
anticipate problems. They are not designed for
cornering at the same speeds as conventional
passenger cars any more than low-slung sports
cars are designed to perform satisfactorily in
off-road conditions. Avoid sharp turns or abrupt
maneuvers. As with other vehicles of this type,
failure to operate this vehicle correctly may
result in loss of control or vehicle rollover.
OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS
When To Use 4WD LOW Range
When off-road driving, shift to 4WD LOW for
additional traction and control on slippery or
difficult terrain, ascending or descending steep
hills, and to increase low-speed pulling power
Ú page 99. This range should be limited to
extreme situations such as deep snow, mud, or
sand where additional low speed pulling power
is needed. Vehicle speeds in excess of 25 mph
(40 km/h) should be avoided when in 4WD LOW
range.
Driving Through Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving
through water, there are a number of
precautions that must be considered before
entering the water:
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to
ensure safety and prevent damage to your
vehicle. If you must drive through water, try to
determine the depth and the bottom condition
(and location of any obstacles) prior to entering.
Proceed with caution and maintain a steady
controlled speed less than 5 mph (8 km/h) in
deep water to minimize wave effects.
Flowing Water
If the water is swift flowing and rising (as in
storm run-off) avoid crossing until the water
level recedes and/or the flow rate is reduced. If
you must cross flowing-water, avoid depths in
excess of 9 inches (22 cm). The flowing water
can erode the streambed causing your vehicle
to sink into deeper water. Determine exit
point(s) that are downstream of your entry point
to allow for drifting.
Standing Water
Avoid driving in standing water deeper than
16 inches (40.5 cm), and reduce speed
appropriately to minimize wave effects.
Maximum speed in 16 inches (40.5 cm) of
water is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
(Trailhawk only): Avoid driving in standing water
deeper than 19 inches (48 cm), and reduce
speed appropriately to minimize wave effects.
Maximum speed in 19 inches (48 cm) of water
is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
CAUTION!
When driving through water, do not exceed
5 mph (8 km/h). Always check water depth
before entering as a precaution, and check all
fluids afterward. Driving through water may
cause damage that may not be covered by
the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
4
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 135
136 STARTING AND OPERATING
Maintenance
After driving through deep water, inspect your
vehicle fluids and lubricants (engine,
transmission, Power Transfer Unit, and Rear
Drive Module) to ensure they have not been
contaminated. Contaminated fluids and
lubricants (milky, foamy in appearance) should
be flushed/changed as soon as possible to
prevent component damage.
Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand
In heavy snow, when pulling a load, or for
additional control at slower speeds, shift the
transmission to a low gear and shift the 4WD
system to the appropriate terrain mode, using
4WD LOW if necessary Ú page 99. Do not shift
to a lower gear than necessary to maintain
headway. Over-revving the engine can spin the
wheels and traction will be lost.
Avoid abrupt downshifts on icy or slippery roads
because engine braking may cause skidding
and loss of control.
Hill Climbing
NOTE:
Before attempting to climb a hill, determine the
conditions at the crest and/or on the other side.
Before climbing a steep hill, shift the
transmission to a lower gear and shift the 4WD
System to 4WD LOW. Use FIRST gear and 4WD
LOW for very steep hills.
NOTE:
Brakes should be applied at increased slippage,
but before coming to a stop to avoid digging into
the loose surface and rendering the operator of
the vehicle stuck/immobile.
If you stall or begin to lose headway while
climbing a steep hill, allow your vehicle to come
to a stop and immediately apply the brakes.
Once stopped, shift to REVERSE. Back slowly
down the hill allowing the compression braking
of the engine to help regulate your speed. If the
brakes are required to control vehicle speed,
apply them lightly and avoid locking or skidding
the tires.
NOTE:
Remember, never drive diagonally across a hill
- drive straight up or down.
If the wheels start to slip as you approach the
crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and
maintain headway by turning the front wheels
slowly left and right. This may provide a fresh
“bite” into the surface and may provide traction
to complete the climb.
WARNING!
If the engine stalls or you lose headway or
cannot make it to the top of a steep hill or
grade, never attempt to turn around. To do so
may result in tipping and rolling the vehicle.
Always back straight down a hill in REVERSE
gear carefully. Never back down a hill in NEU-
TRAL using only the brake.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 136
STARTING AND OPERATING 137
Traction Downhill
Shift the transmission into a low gear and the
4WD System to 4WD LOW range or select Hill
Descent Control (if equipped) Ú page 218. Let
the vehicle go slowly down the hill with all four
wheels turning against engine compression
drag. This will permit you to control the vehicle
speed and direction.
When descending mountains or hills, repeated
braking can cause brake fade with loss of
braking control. Avoid repeated heavy braking
by downshifting the transmission whenever
possible.
After Driving Off-Road
Off-road operation puts more stress on your
vehicle than does most on-road driving. After
going off-road, it is always a good idea to check
for damage.
Completely inspect the underbody of your
vehicle. Check tires, body structure, steering,
suspension, and exhaust system for damage.
Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and
clean as required.
Check threaded fasteners for looseness,
particularly on the chassis, drivetrain compo-
nents, steering, and suspension. Retighten
them, if required, and torque to the values
specified in the Service Manual.
Check for accumulations of plants or brush.
These things could be a fire hazard. They
might hide damage to fuel lines, brake hoses,
axle pinion seals, and propeller shafts.
After extended operation in mud, sand,
water, or similar dirty conditions, have the
radiator, fan, brake rotors, wheels, brake
linings, and axle yokes inspected and
cleaned as soon as possible.
Impacted material can cause wheel imbal-
ance. Freeing the wheels of impacted mate-
rial will likely rectify imbalance condition.
WARNING!
Abrasive material in any part of the braking
system may cause excessive wear or unpre-
dictable braking performance. Full braking
power may not be available to prevent a colli-
sion. If you have been operating your vehicle
in dirty conditions, inspect and clean the
braking components as soon as possible.
4
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 137
138
MULTIMEDIA
UCONNECT SYSTEMS
For detailed information about your Uconnect
4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display system,
refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wireless
networks. These networks allow your vehicle to
send and receive information. This information
allows systems and features in your vehicle to
function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain
security features to reduce the risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to vehicle
systems and wireless communications. Vehicle
software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,
evaluates and takes appropriate steps as
needed. Similar to a computer or other devices,
your vehicle may require software updates to
improve the usability and performance of your
systems or to reduce the potential risk of
unauthorized and unlawful access to your
vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to
your vehicle systems may still exist, even if the
most recent version of vehicle software (such as
Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
It is not possible to know or to predict all of
the possible outcomes if your vehicle’s
systems are breached. It may be possible
that vehicle systems, including safety
related systems, could be impaired or a
loss of vehicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
ONLY insert media (e.g., USB or CD) into
your vehicle if it came from a trusted
source. Media of unknown origin could
possibly contain malicious software, and if
installed in your vehicle, it may increase the
possibility for vehicle systems to be
breached.
As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to your
nearest authorized dealer immediately.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 138
MULTIMEDIA 139
NOTE:
FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com
(US Residents) or www.driveuconnect.ca
(Canadian Residents) to learn about
available Uconnect software updates.
Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired
communications cannot be assured. Third
parties may unlawfully intercept information
and private communications without your
consent Ú page 84.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system uses a combination of
buttons on the touchscreen and buttons on the
faceplate located in the center of the
instrument panel. These buttons allow you to
access and change Programmable Features.
Many features can vary by vehicle and
packages.
Buttons on the faceplate are located below
and/or beside the Uconnect system in the
center of the instrument panel. In addition,
there is a Scroll/Enter control knob below and
to the right of the screen. Turn the control knob
to scroll through menus and change settings.
Push the center of the control knob one or more
times to select or change a setting.
Your Uconnect system may also have Screen
Off and Mute buttons on the faceplate.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to
turn off the Uconnect screen. Push the button
again or tap the screen to turn the screen on.
Press the Back Arrow button to exit out of a
Menu or certain option on the Uconnect system.
CUSTOMER PROGRAMMABLE FEATURES
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display Buttons
On Faceplate And Soft Buttons On Touchscreen
For the Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display and the
Uconnect 4/4C/4C NAV With 8.4-inch Display
Press the Apps button, then press the
Settings button on the touchscreen to display
the menu setting screen. In this mode, the
Uconnect system allows you to access
programmable features.
1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen
2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 139
140 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicle’s options, feature
settings may vary.
All settings should be changed with the igni-
tion in the ON/RUN position.
When making a selection, only press one button
at a time to enter the desired menu. Once in the
desired menu, press and release the preferred
setting “option” until a check mark appears
next to the setting, showing that setting has
been selected. Once the setting is complete,
press the X button on the touchscreen to close
out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or
Down Arrow button on the right side of the
screen will allow you to toggle up or down
through the available settings.
Language
When the Language button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different language options. Once an option is selected, the system
will display the chosen language. The available setting is:
Display
When the Display button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system will display the options related to the theme (if equipped), brightness, and color of
the touchscreen. The available settings are:
Setting Name Description
Language
This setting will change the language of the Uconnect system. The avail-
able languages are English, Français, and Español.
Setting Name Description
Display Mode
This setting will allow you to set the brightness manually or have the sys-
tem set it automatically. The “Auto” setting has the system automatically
adjust the display brightness. The “Manual” setting will allow the user to
adjust the brightness of the display.
Display Brightness With Headlights ON
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
on. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 140
MULTIMEDIA 141
Display Brightness With Headlights OFF
This setting will allow you to set the brightness when the headlights are
off. To access this setting, Display Mode must be set to Manual. The “+”
setting will increase the brightness; the “-” will decrease the brightness.
Set Theme This setting will allow you to change the display theme.
Keyboard
This setting will change the keyboard type on the display. The selectable
keyboards are “ABCDEF Keyboard”, “QWERTY Keyboard”, and “AZERTY
Keyboard”.
Touchscreen Beep This setting will allow you to turn the touchscreen beep on or off.
Control Screen Timeout
This setting allows you to set the Control Screen to turn off automatically
after five seconds or stay open until manually closed.
Navigation Next Turn Pop-ups Displayed in Cluster
This setting will display navigation prompts in the Instrument Cluster Dis-
play.
Phone Pop-ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will display smartphone notifications and messages in the
Instrument Cluster Display.
Setting Name Description
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 141
142 MULTIMEDIA
Units
When the Units button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different measurement options. The selected unit of measurement will
display in the instrument cluster display and Navigation system (if equipped). The available settings are:
Voice
When the Voice button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s Voice Recognition feature.
Setting Name Description
US This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to US.
Metric This setting will change the unit of measurement on the display to Metric.
Custom
This setting changes the “Speed” (MPH or km/h), “Distance” (mi or km),
“Fuel Consumption” (MPG [US], MPG [UK], L/100 km, or km/L), “Pres-
sure” (psi, kPa, or bar), and “Temperature” (°C or °F) units of measure-
ment independently.
Setting Name Description
Voice Response Length
This setting will change the response length for the Voice Recognition
system. The “Brief” setting provides a shortened audio description from
the system. The “Detailed” setting provides the full audio description
from the system.
Show Command List
This setting will allow you to turn the Command List on or off. The
“Always” setting will always show the Command List. The “With Help” set-
ting will show the Command List and provide a brief description of what
the command does. The “Never” setting will turn the Command List off.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 142
MULTIMEDIA 143
Clock
When the Clock button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the different options related to the vehicle’s internal clock.
Setting Name Description
Sync Time With GPS
This setting will sync the time to the GPS receiver in the system. The sys-
tem will control the time via the GPS location.
Time Format
This setting will allow you to set the time format (AM/PM). Sync Time With
GPS must be off for this setting to be available. The “12 hrs” setting will
set the time to a 12-hour format. The “24 hrs” setting will set the time to
a 24-hour format.
Set Time Hours
This setting will allow you to set the hours. Sync Time With GPS must be
off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the hours.
The “-” setting will decrease the hours.
Set Time Minutes
This setting will allow you to set the minutes. Sync Time With GPS must
be off for this setting to be available. The “+” setting will increase the
minutes. The “-” setting will decrease the minutes.
Show Time in Status Bar This setting will place the time in the radio’s status bar.
Set Date This setting will allow you to set the date.
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 143
144 MULTIMEDIA
Camera
When the Camera button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s camera features.
Safety/Driving Assistance
When the Safety/Driving Assistance button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s safety settings. These
options will differ depending on the features equipped on the vehicle. The settings may display in list form or within subfolders on the screen. To access
a subfolder, select the desired folder; the available options related to that feature will then display on the screen.
Setting Name Description
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a delay to the rear backup camera when shifting out
of reverse.
Active ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the active backup camera guidelines on or off.
Fixed ParkView Backup Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the fixed backup camera guidelines on or off.
Surround View Camera Delay
This setting will add a timed delay to the surround view camera when
shifting out of reverse.
Surround View Camera Guidelines This setting will turn the surround view camera guidelines on or off.
Setting Name Description
Forward Collision Warning Sensitivity
This setting will change the distance at which the Forward Collision Warn-
ing (FCW) alert sounds. The “Medium” setting will have the FCW system
signal when an object is in view, and the possibility of a collision is
detected. The “Near” setting will have the FCW system signal when the
object is closer to the vehicle. The “Far” setting will have the FCW system
signal when an object is at a far distance from the vehicle.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 144
MULTIMEDIA 145
Forward Collision Warning-Plus (FCW+)
This setting will turn the Forward Collision Warning-Plus system on or off.
The “Off” setting will deactivate the FCW+ system. The “Warning Only”
setting will provide only an audible chime when a collision is detected.
The “Warning + Active Braking” setting will provide an audible chime and
apply brake pressure when a collision is detected.
LaneSense Warning
This setting will change the distance at which the steering wheel will pro-
vide lane departure feedback. The available settings are “Early”,
“Medium”, and “Late”.
LaneSense Strength
This setting will change the strength of the steering wheel feedback
during a lane departure. The available settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and
“High”.
ParkSense
This setting will change the type of ParkSense alert when a close object is
detected and provide both an audible chime and a visual display.
Front ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Front ParkSense system. The avail-
able settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Volume
This setting adjusts the volume of the Rear ParkSense system. The avail-
able settings are “Low”, “Medium”, and “High”.
Rear ParkSense Braking Assist
This setting will provide braking assist if the Rear ParkSense system
senses a collision with an object.
Blind Spot Alert
This setting will change the type of alert provided when an object is
detected in a vehicle’s blind spot. The “Off” setting will turn off Blind Spot
Alert. The “Lights” setting will activate the Blind Spot Alert lights on the
outside mirrors. The “Lights & Chime” setting will activate both the lights
on the outside mirrors and an audible chime.
Setting Name Description
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 145
146 MULTIMEDIA
ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines This setting will turn the backup camera guidelines on or off.
ParkView Backup Camera Delay
This setting will add a delay to the rear backup camera when shifting out
of reverse.
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Pedestrian Emergency Braking This setting will turn the Pedestrian Emergency Braking system on or off.
Traffic Sign Assist This setting will turn Traffic Sign Assist on or off.
Traffic Sign Assist Warning
This setting will allow you to set the warning type related to the traffic
sign. The available options are “Off”, “Visual”, and “Visual + Chime”.
Intelligent Speed Limiter This setting will allow you to turn the Intelligent Speed Limiter on or off.
New Speed Zone Indication
This setting will allow you to set if the system will warn you that the speed
limit has changed in an area. The available options are “Off”, “Visual”,
and “Visual + Chime”.
Drowsy Driver
This setting will monitor the driver’s driving habits and warn you of any
changes, indicating that the driver may be drowsy. The available options
are “On” and “Off”.
Highway Assist Steering Wheel Vibration
This setting will vibrate the steering wheel when a lane departure is
detected. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Setting Name Description
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 146
MULTIMEDIA 147
Target Battery Level
When the Target Battery Level button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays a setting related to the battery level.
Power Level
When the Power Level button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the power level. The available option is:
Mirrors & Wipers
When the Mirrors & Wipers button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s mirrors and wipers.
Setting Name Description
Target Battery Level
This setting will adjust the battery level. The available settings are “40%”,
“60%”, and “80%”.
Setting Name Description
Power Level
This setting will change the Power Level options. The available settings
are “1”, “2”, “3”, “4”, and “5”.
Setting Name Description
Rain Sensing Auto Wipers This setting will turn the Rain Sensing Auto Wipers on or off.
Auto Folding Side Mirrors This setting will turn the Auto Folding Side Mirrors on or off.
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 147
148 MULTIMEDIA
Brakes
After pressing the Brakes button on the touchscreen, the following settings will be available:
Lights
When the Lights button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to the vehicle’s exterior and interior lights.
NOTE:
When the “Daytime Running Lights” feature is selected, the daytime running lights can be turned on or off. This feature is only allowed by law in the
country of the vehicle purchased.
Setting Name Description
Auto Park Brake This setting will turn the Auto Park Brake on or off.
Brake Service This setting will allow you to retract the brakes for servicing.
Setting Name Description
Headlight Sensitivity
This setting will allow you to set the sensitivity of the headlights depen-
dent on the amount of visible light. The greater the sensitivity set, the
less the external light variation required to turn on the lights (e.g. with a
setting on level 3 at sunset, the headlights turn on earlier than in levels
1 and 2). The available levels are “Level 1: Minimum Sensitivity”, “
Level 2: Medium Sensitivity”, and “Level 3: Maximum Sensitivity”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the head-
lights to shut off after the vehicle is turned off. The available settings are
“0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
Headlight Illumination On Approach
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time it takes for the head-
lights to shut off after the vehicle is unlocked. The available settings are
“0 sec”, “30 sec”, “60 sec”, and “90 sec”.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 148
MULTIMEDIA 149
Doors & Locks
When the Doors & Locks button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to locking and unlocking the vehicle’s doors.
Greeting Lights This setting will turn the Greeting Lights on or off.
Daytime Running Lights This setting will allow you to turn the Daytime Running Lights on or off.
Cornering Lights
When this setting is selected, if the steering wheel rotation angle is large
or the turn signal indicators are on, a light (incorporated in the fog light)
will turn on, on the relevant side to improve visibility at night.
Headlight Dip
This setting will lower the headlights when driving on the opposite side of
the road. The available options are “On” and “Off”.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Setting Name Description
Setting Name Description
Auto Unlock On Exit
This setting will unlock the doors when any of the doors are opened from
the inside.
Flash Lights With Lock
This setting will allow you to turn the flashing of the lights when the Lock
button is pushed on the key fob on or off.
Sound Horn With Lock
This setting will sound the horn when the Lock button is pushed on the
key fob. The “Off” setting will not sound the horn when the Lock button is
pushed. The “1st Press” setting will sound the horn when the Lock button
is pushed once. The “2nd Press” setting will sound the horn when the
Lock button is pushed twice.
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 149
150 MULTIMEDIA
Sound Horn With Remote Start
This setting will sound the horn when the remote start is activated from
the key fob.
Remote Door Unlock, Door Lock/1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks
This setting will change how many pushes of the Unlock button on the key
fob are needed to unlock all the doors. The “Driver Door” setting will only
unlock the driver door on the first push on the Unlock button. The “All
Doors” setting will unlock all doors on the first push of the Unlock button.
Passive Entry
This setting will allow you to turn the Passive Entry feature (Keyless
Enter-N-Go) on or off.
Power Liftgate Alert
This setting will chime an audible alert when the power liftgate is raising
or lowering. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Hands-Free Power Liftgate
This setting will use hands-free technology to automatically open or close
the power liftgate. Selectable options are “On” and “Off”.
Auto Door Locks
This setting will allow you to change if the doors lock automatically when
the vehicle reaches 12 mph (19 km/h).
Setting Name Description
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 150
MULTIMEDIA 151
Seats & Comfort
When the Seats & Comfort button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the vehicle’s comfort systems when remote
start has been activated or the vehicle has been started.
Key Off Options/Engine Off Options
When the Key Off Options/Engine Off Options button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to vehicle shutoff. These
settings will only activate when the ignition is set to OFF.
Setting Name Description
Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering Wheel With Vehicle
Start
This setting will activate the vehicle’s comfort systems and heated seats
(if equipped) or heated steering wheel (if equipped) when the vehicle is
remote started or ignition is started. The “Off” setting will not activate the
comfort systems. The “Remote Start” setting will only activate the com-
fort systems when using Remote Start. The “All Start” setting will activate
the comfort systems whenever the vehicle is started.
Setting Name Description
Radio Off Delay
This setting will keep the radio running after the engine is turned off.
When any door is opened, the electronics will deactivate. The available
settings are “0 min” and “20 min”.
Radio Off With Door
This setting will shut the radio off when the door is opened. The available
settings are “On” and “Off”.
Headlight Off Delay
This setting will allow you to set the amount of time the headlights remain
on after the vehicle has been turned off. The “+” will increase the amount
of time. The “-” will decrease the amount of time.
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 151
152 MULTIMEDIA
Audio
When the Audio button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to the vehicle’s sound system. These settings can change
the audio location within the vehicle, adjust the bass or treble levels, and auto-play settings from an audio device or smartphone.
Setting Name Description
Balance/Fade
This setting will adjust audio levels from specific speakers in the front/
back and left/right of the vehicle. The Speaker icon can be moved to set
audio location.
Equalizer
This setting will adjust the “Bass”, “Mid”, and “Treble” ranges of the
audio.
Speed Adjusted Volume
This setting will adjust audio volume as speeds increase. At a higher set-
ting, the volume will increase more as the vehicle speeds up. The avail-
able settings are “Off”, “1”, “2”, and “3”.
Surround Sound This setting will turn the Surround Sound system on or off.
AUX Volume Offset
This setting will tune the audio levels from a device connected through
the AUX port. The available settings are “+” and “-”.
Auto Play
This setting will automatically begin playing audio from a connected
device.
Loudness This setting will improve audio quality at lower volumes.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 152
MULTIMEDIA 153
Audio Repetition
When the Audio Repetition button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the option related to the system’s audio settings. The available
setting is:
Phone/Bluetooth®
When the Phone/Bluetooth® button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to Bluetooth® connectivity from an external
audio device or smartphone. The list of paired audio devices or smartphones can be accessed from this menu.
Setting Name Description
Audio Repetition This setting will turn the system audio repetition on or off.
Setting Name Description
Phone Pop-Ups Displayed In Cluster
This setting will activate phone message pop-ups in the Instrument Clus-
ter Display.
Do Not Disturb
This setting will open the Do Not Disturb settings menu. The settings are
“Auto Reply” (both, text, call), “Auto Reply Message” (custom, default),
and “Custom Auto Reply Message” (create message).
Paired Phones This setting will show the list of paired phones.
Paired Audio Sources This setting will show the list of paired audio sources.
Paired Phones And Audio Devices This setting will show the list of paired phones and audio devices.
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 153
154 MULTIMEDIA
SiriusXM® Setup — If Equipped
NOTE:
A subscription to SiriusXM® satellite radio is required for these settings to be functional.
When the SiriusXM® Setup button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays options related to SiriusXM® satellite radio. These settings can
be used to skip specific radio channels and restart favorite songs from the beginning.
Clear Personal Data/Restore Settings
When the Clear Personal Data/Restore Settings button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the options related to resetting the Uconnect
system back to its default settings. These settings can clear personal data and reset selected settings from other menus.
Setting Name Description
Tune Start
This setting will play the current song from the beginning when you tune
to a music channel using one of the 12 presets.
Channel Skip
This setting allows you to set channels that you wish to skip. A channel
list will display of the skipped channels.
Subscription Information
This menu provides SiriusXM® subscription information. SiriusXM®
Travel Link is a separate subscription.
Setting Name Description
Restore Settings
This setting will return all the previously changed settings to their factory
default.
Reset App Drawer This setting will reset the app drawer to its factory default layout.
Clear Personal Data
This setting will display a pop-up that gives you the option to clear all per-
sonal data from the system, including Bluetooth® devices and presets.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 154
MULTIMEDIA 155
System Information
When the System Information button is pressed on the touchscreen, the system displays the radio system information.
UCONNECT INTRODUCTION
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
Setting Name Description
Software Licenses This will display the software licensing information screen.
1 — Radio Button
2 — Media Button
3 — Climate Button
4 — Apps Button
5 — Controls Button
6 — Phone Button
7 — Settings Button
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 155
156 MULTIMEDIA
Feature Description
Radio/Media
Press the Radio button or Media button to enter Radio Mode/Media
Mode and access the radio functions and external audio sources
Ú page 158.
Phone
Press the Phone button to enter Phone Mode and access the hands-free
phone system Ú page 169.
Settings Press the Settings button to access the Uconnect Settings Ú page 139.
Push the Enter/Browse button on the faceplate to accept a highlighted
selection on the screen. Rotate the Tune/Scroll rotary knob to scroll
through a list or tune a radio station.
Push the Screen Off button on the faceplate to turn the screen on or off.
Push the Mute button on the faceplate to turn the audio of the radio sys-
tem off. Push it again to turn the audio back on.
Rotate the rotary knob to adjust the volume. Push the Volume & On/Off
button on the faceplate to turn the system on or off.
Controls
Press the Controls button to access vehicle-specific features like heated
seats and steering wheel.
Apps Press the Apps button to access a list of the available Uconnect apps.
Climate
Press the Climate button to enter Climate Mode and access the climate
control functions Ú page 46.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 156
MULTIMEDIA 157
DRAG & DROP MENU BAR
The Uconnect features and services in the main
menu bar are easily customized for your
preference. Simply follow these steps:
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Drag & Drop
1. Press the Apps button to open the App
screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected app
to replace an existing shortcut in the main
menu bar.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is in
PARK.
SAFETY AND GENERAL INFORMATION
Safety Guidelines
Please read this manual carefully before using
the system. It contains instructions on how to
use the system in a safe and effective manner.
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen.
Doing so can result in damage to the
touchscreen.
Please read and follow these safety
precautions. Failure to do so may result in injury
or property damage.
Glance at the screen only when safe to do so.
If prolonged viewing of the screen is required,
park in a safe location and set the parking
brake.
Stop use immediately if a problem occurs.
Failure to do so may cause injury or damage
to the product. See an authorized dealer for
repair.
Ensure the volume level of the system is set
to a level that still allows you to hear outside
traffic and emergency vehicles.
Safe Usage Of The Uconnect System
The Uconnect system is a sophisticated elec-
tronic device. Do not let young children use
the system.
Permanent hearing loss may occur if you play
your music or sound system at loud volumes.
Exercise caution when setting the volume on
the system.
Keep drinks, rain and other sources of mois-
ture away from the system. Besides damage
to the system, moisture can cause electric
shocks as with any electronic device.
NOTE:
Many features of this system are speed depen-
dent. For your own safety, it is not possible to
use some of the touchscreen features while the
vehicle is in motion.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 157
158 MULTIMEDIA
Care And Maintenance
Do not press the touchscreen with any hard
or sharp objects (pen, USB stick, jewelry,
etc.), which could scratch the surface.
Do not spray any liquid or chemicals directly
on the screen! Use a clean and dry microfiber
lens cleaning cloth in order to clean the
touchscreen.
If necessary, use a lint-free cloth dampened
with a cleaning solution, such as isopropyl
alcohol or an isopropyl alcohol and water
solution ratio of 50:50. Be sure to follow the
solvent manufacturer's precautions and
directions Ú page 360.
UCONNECT MODES
STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are located
on the rear surface of the steering wheel at the
three and nine o’clock positions.
Remote Sound System Controls
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch
with a push button in the center and controls
the volume and mode of the sound system.
Pushing the top of the rocker switch will
increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of
the rocker switch will decrease the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio
switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SXM or Media, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch with
a push button in the center. The function of the
left-hand control is different depending on
which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode:
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will Seek Up for
the next available station and pushing the
bottom of the switch will Seek Down for the next
available station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand
control will tune to the next preset station that
you have programmed in the radio presets.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch skips to the next
track on the selected media (AUX/USB/
Bluetooth®). Pushing the switch up twice will go
forward two tracks. Pushing the bottom switch
goes to the beginning of the current track, or the
beginning of the previous track if it is within
eight seconds after the current track begins to
play. Double pressing the bottom button switch
will skip to the previous track if it is after eight
seconds into the current track.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 158
MULTIMEDIA 159
RADIO MODE
Radio Controls
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
The radio is equipped with the following modes:
AM
FM
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (if equipped)
Press the Radio button on the touchscreen to
enter the Radio Mode. The different tuner
modes, AM, FM, and SXM, can then be selected
by pressing the corresponding buttons in Radio
Mode.
Volume & On/Off Control
Push the Volume & On/Off control knob to turn
on and off the Uconnect system.
The electronic volume control turns
continuously (360 degrees) in either direction,
without stopping. Turning the Volume & On/Off
control knob clockwise increases the volume,
and counterclockwise decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound
will be set at the same volume level as last
played.
Mute Button
Push the Mute button to mute or unmute the
system.
Tune/Scroll Control
Turn the rotary Tune/Scroll control knob
clockwise to increase or counterclockwise to
decrease the radio station frequency. Push the
Enter/Browse button to choose a selection.
Seek
The Seek Up and Down functions are activated
by pressing the double arrow buttons on the
touchscreen to the right and left of the radio
station display or by pressing the left steering
wheel audio control button up or down.
Seek Up and Seek Down
Press and release the Seek Up or Seek
Down button to tune the radio to the next
available station or channel. During a Seek Up/
Down function, if the radio reaches the starting
station after passing through the entire band
two times, the radio will stop at the station
where it began.
Fast Seek Up and Fast Seek Down
Press and hold, and then release the Seek
Up or Seek Down button to advance the
radio through the available stations or channels
1 — Radio Bands
2 — Preset Radio Stations
3 — View Next Preset Radio Stations
4 — Status Bar
5 — Browse Button
6 — Seek Down
7 — Tune Button
8 — Seek Up
9 — Audio Settings
10 — Bottom Bar
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 159
160 MULTIMEDIA
at a faster rate. The radio stops at the next
available station or channel when the button on
the touchscreen is released.
NOTE:
Pressing and holding either the Seek Up or
Seek Down button will scan the different
frequency bands at a slower rate.
Direct Tune
Press the Tune button located at the bottom of
the radio screen to directly tune to a desired
radio station or channel.
Press the available number button on the
touchscreen to begin selecting a desired
station. Once a number has been entered, any
numbers that are no longer possible (stations
that cannot be reached) will become
deactivated/grayed out.
Undo
You can backspace an entry by pressing the
Back button on the touchscreen.
GO
Once the last digit of a station has been
entered, press “GO”. The Direct Tune screen will
close, and the system will automatically tune to
that station.
Radio Voice Commands
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM, or
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button on the steering wheel
and wait for the beep to say a command. See
some examples below.
“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
Did You Know: At any time, if you are not sure of
what to say or want to learn a Voice Command,
push the VR button and say “Help”. The
system provides you with a list of commands.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio Mode — If
Equipped
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Changing To
SiriusXM®
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio uses direct
satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to
provide clear, coast-to-coast radio content.
SiriusXM® is a subscription-based service.
Visit siriusxm.com/getallaccess or review your
SiriusXM® Radio pamphlet in your Owner’s
Manual kit for more information.
SiriusXM® services require subscriptions, sold
separately after the trial included with the new
vehicle purchase. If you decide to continue your
service at the end of your trial subscription, the
plan you choose will automatically renew and
bill at then-current rates until you call
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 160
MULTIMEDIA 161
SiriusXM® at 866-635-2349 to cancel. See
SiriusXM® Customer Agreement for complete
terms at www.siriusxm.com (US) or
www.siriusxm.ca (Canada).
All fees and programming subject to change.
SiriusXM® satellite service is available only to
those at least 18 and older in the 48 contiguous
USA and D.C. Our SiriusXM® satellite service is
also available in Canada and Puerto Rico (with
coverage limitations). SiriusXM® Internet radio
service is available throughout their satellite
service area and in AK. © 2020 SiriusXM®
Radio Inc. SiriusXM® and all related marks and
logos are trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio Inc.
This functionality is only available for radios
equipped with a Satellite receiver. In order to
receive satellite radio, the vehicle needs to be
outside with a clear view to the sky.
If the screen shows Acquiring Signal, you might
have to change the vehicle’s position in order to
receive a signal. In most cases, the satellite
radio does not receive a signal in underground
parking garages or tunnels.
No Subscription
Radios equipped with a Satellite receiver
require a subscription to the SiriusXM® Service.
When the Radio does not have the necessary
subscription, the Radio is able to receive the
Preview channel only.
Acquiring SiriusXM® Subscription
To activate the SiriusXM® Satellite Radio
subscription, US visit siriusxm.com/
getallaccess or call: 1-800-643-2112
Canada visit https://www.siriusxm.ca/ or call:
1-800-465-2001 (English) or 1-800-387-9983
(French).
NOTE:
You will need to provide the SiriusXM® ID (RID)
located at the bottom of the Channel 0 screen.
The Satellite Mode is activated by a press of the
SXM button on the touchscreen.
When in Satellite Mode:
The SXM button on the touchscreen is high-
lighted.
The SiriusXM® Presets are displayed at the
top of the screen.
The SiriusXM® Channel Number is displayed
in the center.
The Program Information is displayed at the
bottom of the Channel Number.
The SiriusXM® function buttons are
displayed below the Program Information.
Tuning is done by operating the Tune Knob or by
Direct Tune, similar to other Radio Bands.
In addition to the tuning operation functions
common to all radio modes, the replay, Traffic/
Weather button, and Favorite button functions
are available in SiriusXM® Mode.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display SiriusXM® Satellite
Radio
1 — Browse
2 — Replay
3 — Seek Down Button
4 — Direct Tune Button
5 — Seek Up Button
6 — Audio Settings Button
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 161
162 MULTIMEDIA
Replay
The replay function provides a means to store and replay up to 22 minutes of music audio and 48 minutes of talk radio. Once the channel is switched,
content in replay memory is lost.
Press the Replay button on the touchscreen. The play/pause, rewind/forward and live buttons will display at the top of the screen, along with the replay
time.
You can exit by pressing the Replay button on the touchscreen any time during the Replay Mode.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the touchscreen
to activate the favorites menu, which will time
out within 20 seconds in absence of user
interaction.
You can exit the Favorites Menu by a press of
the X button.
The favorites feature enables you to set a
favorite artist or song that is currently playing.
The radio then uses this information to alert you
when either the favorite artist or song is being
played at any time by any of the SiriusXM®
Channels.
The maximum number of favorites that can be
stored in the Radio is 50.
Play/Pause
Press the Pause/Play button on the touchscreen to pause the playing of live or rewound content at
any time. Play can be resumed by pressing the Pause/Play button again on the touchscreen.
Rewind
Press the Rewind button on the touchscreen to rewind the content in steps of five seconds. Pressing
the Rewind button on the touchscreen for more than two seconds rewinds the content. The radio
begins playing the content at the point at which the press is released.
Forward
Each press of the Forward button on the touchscreen forwards the content in steps of five seconds.
Forwarding of the content can only be done when the content is previously rewound, and therefore,
cannot be done for live content. A continuous press of the Forward button on the touchscreen also
forwards the content. The radio begins playing the content at the point at which the press is release.
Live Live Press the Live button on the touchscreen to resume the playing of live content.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 162
MULTIMEDIA 163
Favorite Artist: While the song is playing, to set
a favorite artist, press the Favorites button on
the touchscreen and then the Favorite Artist
button on the touchscreen.
Favorite Song: While the song is playing, to set
a favorite song, press the Favorites button on
the touchscreen and then the Favorite Song
button on the touchscreen.
Browse In SXM
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Browse Button
Press the Browse button on the touchscreen to
edit Presets, Favorites, Game Zone, and Jump
settings, along with providing the SiriusXM®
Channel List.
This Screen contains many submenus. You can
exit submenus to return to a parent menu by
pressing the Back arrow.
All
Press the All button on the Browse Screen.
When pressing the All button, the following
categories become available:
Channel List Press the Channel List to display
all the SiriusXM® Channel Numbers. You can
scroll the Channel List by pressing the Up and
Down arrows, located on the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by oper-
ating the Tune/Scroll knob.
Genre List Press the Genre button on the
touchscreen to display a list of Genres. You
can select any desired Genre by pressing the
Genre List. The radio tunes to a channel with
the content in the selected Genre.
Presets — If Equipped
Press the Presets button (if equipped) located
at the left of the Browse screen.
You can scroll the Presets list by pressing the Up
and Down arrows located at the right side of the
screen. Scrolling can also be done by operating
the Tune/Scroll knob as well.
Preset Selection
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed Presets, or by pushing the Enter/Browse
button on the Tune/Scroll knob to select the
currently highlighted Preset. When selected, the
Radio tunes to the station stored in the Preset.
Deleting A Preset
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
corresponding preset.
Favorites
Press the Favorites button on the Browse
screen.
1 — All Button
2 — Presets Button
3 — Favorites Button
4 — Game Zone Button
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 163
164 MULTIMEDIA
The Favorites menu provides a means to edit
the Favorites list and to configure the Alert
Settings, along with providing a list of Channels
currently airing any of the items in the Favorites
list.
You can scroll the Favorites list by pressing the
Up and Down arrows located at the right side of
the screen. Scrolling can also be done by
operating the Tune/Scroll knob as well.
Remove Favorites
Press the Remove Favorites tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the Favorites or
press the Trash Can icon next to the Favorite to
be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Settings tab at the top of the
Favorites screen. The Alert Settings menu
allows you to choose from a visual alert or
audible and visual alert when one of your
favorites is airing on any of the SiriusXM®
channels.
Game Zone
Press the Game Zone button, located at the left
of the Browse screen. This feature provides you
with the ability to select teams, edit the
selection, and set alerts.
On-Air
Press the On-Air tab at the top of the screen. The
On-Air list provides a list of Channels currently
airing any of the items in the Selections list, and
pressing any of the items in the list tunes the
radio to that channel.
Select Team — If Equipped
Press the Select Team button on the
touchscreen to activate the League Scroll list.
Press the chosen league and a scroll list of all
teams within the league will appear, then you
can select a team by pressing the
corresponding box. A check mark appears for all
teams that are chosen.
Remove Selection/Trash Can Icon
Press the Remove Selection tab at the top of the
screen. Press the Delete All button on the
touchscreen to delete all of the selections or
press the Trash Can icon next to the selection to
be deleted.
Alert Settings
Press the Alert Setting tab at the top of the
screen. The Alert Settings menu allows you to
choose from “Alert me to on-air games upon
start” or “Alert upon score update” or both when
one or more of your selections is airing on any
of the SiriusXM® channels.
Tune Start
Tune Start begins playing the current song from
the beginning when you tune to a music
channel using one of the 12 presets. This
feature occurs the first time the preset is
selected during that current song.
Setting Presets
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Radio Presets
The Presets are available for all Radio Modes,
and are activated by pressing any of the Preset
buttons, located at the top of the screen.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 164
MULTIMEDIA 165
When you are on a station that you wish to save
as a preset, press and hold the numbered button
on the touchscreen for more than two seconds.
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of the
Radio Modes.
A total of six presets will appear on the screen.
You can switch between the radio presets list by
pressing the Arrow button located in the upper
right of the radio touchscreen.
Preset Features — If Equipped
Browse In AM/FM
When in either AM or FM, the Browse Screen
provides a means to edit the Presets List and is
entered by pushing the Enter/Browse button.
Scrolling Preset List
Once in the Browse Presets screen, you can
scroll the preset list by rotation of the Tune/
Scroll knob or by pressing the Up and Down
Arrow keys, located on the right of the screen.
Preset Selection From List
A preset can be selected by pressing any of the
listed Presets, or by pushing the Enter/Browse
button on the Tune/Scroll knob to select the
currently highlighted Preset.
When selected, the radio tunes to the station
stored in the Presets.
Deleting Presets
A preset can be deleted in the Presets Browse
screen by pressing the Trash Can icon for the
corresponding preset.
Return To Main Radio Screen
You can return to the Main Radio Screen by
pressing the X button or the Back Arrow button
when in the Browse Presets screen.
Audio Settings
Press the Audio button within the settings main
menu to activate the Audio Settings screen.
The audio settings can also be accessed on the
Radio Mode screen by pressing the Audio
button. You can return to the Radio screen by
pressing the X button.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
1 — Balance/Fade
2 — Equalizer
3 — Speed Adjusted Volume
4 — Surround Sound
5 — Loudness
6 — AUX Volume Offset
7 — Radio Off With Door
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 165
166 MULTIMEDIA
Audio Setting Description
Balance/Fade
Press the Balance/Fade button on the touchscreen to balance audio
between the front speakers or fade the audio between the rear and front
speakers. Press the Front, Rear, Left or Right buttons or press and drag
the red Speaker icon to adjust the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
Press the + or – buttons or press and drag the level bar to increase or
decrease each of the equalizer bands. The level value, which spans
between plus or minus nine, is displayed at the top of each of the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
The Speed Adjusted Volume is adjusted by selecting from “Off”, “1”, “2”,
and “3”. This alters the automatic adjustment of the audio volume with
variation to vehicle speed. Volume increases automatically as speed
increases to compensate for normal road noise.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
When Surround Sound is on, you can hear audio coming from every direc-
tion as in a movie theatre or home theatre system.
Loudness — If Equipped When Loudness is on, the sound quality at lower volumes improves.
AUX Volume Offset
The AUX Volume Offset is adjusted by pressing + and – buttons. This
alters the AUX input audio volume. The level value, which spans between
plus or minus three, is displayed above the adjustment bar.
Auto Play — If Equipped
The Auto Play feature begins playing music as soon as a USB Media
device is connected to one of the vehicle’s Media USB ports, when it is
turned on. Press “Off” to turn the setting off.
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped
The Radio Off With Door feature, when activated, keeps the radio on until
the driver or passenger door is opened or when the Radio Off Delay
selected time has expired.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 166
MULTIMEDIA 167
MEDIA MODE
Operating Media Mode
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Operating Media Mode
Audio Source Selection
Once in Media Mode, press the Source or
Source Select button on the touchscreen and
the desired mode button on the touchscreen.
USB, AUX, and Bluetooth® are the Media
sources available. When available, you can
select the Browse button on the touchscreen to
be given these options:
Now Playing
Artists
Albums
Genres
Songs
Playlists
Folders
You can press the Source, Pause/Play, or the
Info button on the touchscreen for artist
information on the current song playing.
Types of Media Modes
USB Mode
Overview
USB Mode is entered by either inserting a USB
device into the USB Port, or by selecting the USB
button on the left side of the touchscreen, or the
Source Select/Select Source button and then
selecting USB 1 or 2 (if equipped).
Bluetooth® Mode
Overview
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio or Bluetooth®
Mode is entered by pairing a Bluetooth®
device, containing music, to the Uconnect
system.
Before proceeding, the Bluetooth® device must
be paired to the Uconnect Phone to
communicate with the Uconnect system.
To access Bluetooth® Mode, press the
Bluetooth® button on the left side of the
touchscreen or under the Source Select/Select
Source button (if equipped).
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Select Source
1 — Repeat
2 — Select Source
3 — Track Time
4 — Shuffle
5 — Info
6 — Bluetooth®
7 — Tracks
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 167
168 MULTIMEDIA
AUX Mode
Overview
Auxiliary Mode (AUX) is entered by inserting an
AUX device using a cable with a 3.5 mm audio
jack into the AUX port or by pressing the AUX
button on the left side of the touchscreen, or
under the Source Select button (if equipped).
To insert an Auxiliary device, gently insert the
Auxiliary device cable into the AUX port. If you
insert an Auxiliary device with the ignition and
the radio on, the unit will switch to AUX Mode
and begin to play.
Controlling The Auxiliary Device
The control of the Auxiliary device (e.g.,
selecting playlists, play, fast forward, etc.)
cannot be provided by the radio; use the device
controls instead. Adjust the volume with the
Volume button, Volume/Mute rotary knob, or
the On/Off rotary knob, or with the volume of
the attached device.
NOTE:
The radio unit is acting as the amplifier for audio
output from the Auxiliary device. Therefore, if
the volume control on the Auxiliary device is set
too low, there will be insufficient audio signal for
the radio unit to play the music on the device.
Seek Up /Seek Down
In USB Mode, press the Seek Up button on the
touchscreen for the next selection on the USB
device. Press and release the Seek Down
button on the touchscreen to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or to return
to the beginning of the previous selection if the
USB device is within the first three seconds of
the current selection.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press and release the
Seek Up button on the touchscreen for the next
selection on the Bluetooth® device. Press and
release the Seek Down button on the
touchscreen to return to the beginning of the
current selection, or return to the beginning of
the previous selection if the Bluetooth® device
is within the first second of the current
selection.
Browse
In USB Mode, press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to display the browse window. In
USB Mode, the left side of the browse window
displays a list of ways you can browse through
the contents of the USB device. If supported by
the device, you can browse by Folder, Artist,
Playlist, Album, Song, etc. Press the desired
button on the touchscreen on the left side of the
screen. The center of the browse window shows
items and its sub-functions, which can be
scrolled through by pressing the Up and Down
buttons to the right. The Tune/Scroll knob can
also be used to scroll.
Media Mode
In USB Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
USB.
In Bluetooth® Mode, press the Media button on
the touchscreen to select the desired audio
source: Bluetooth®.
In AUX Mode, press the Media button on the
touchscreen to select the desired audio source:
AUX.
Repeat
In USB Mode, press the Repeat button on the
touchscreen to toggle the repeat functionality.
The Repeat button on the touchscreen is
highlighted when active. The Radio will continue
to play the current track, repeatedly, as long as
the repeat is active. Press the Repeat button
again to enter Repeat All. The radio will continue
to play all the current tracks, repeatedly, as long
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 168
MULTIMEDIA 169
as the repeat function is active. To cancel
Repeat, press the Repeat button a third time.
Shuffle
In USB Mode, press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen to play the selections on the USB
device in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace. Press the Shuffle button on the
touchscreen a second time to turn this feature
off.
Audio
Audio settings can be accessed by pressing the
Audio button Ú page 159.
Info
In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Info
button on the touchscreen to display the
current track information. Press the Info or X
button on the touchscreen a second time to
cancel this feature.
Tracks
In both Disc and USB Modes, press the Tracks
button on the touchscreen to display a pop-up
with the Song List. The song currently playing is
indicated by an arrow and lines above and
below the song title. When in the Tracks List
screen you can rotate the Tune/Scroll knob to
highlight a track (indicated by the line above
and below the track name) and then push the
Enter/Browse knob to start playing that track.
In Bluetooth® Mode, if the Bluetooth® device
supports this feature, press the Tracks button
on the touchscreen to display a pop-up with the
Song List. The currently playing song is
indicated by a red arrow and lines above and
below the song title.
Pressing the Tracks button on the touchscreen
while the pop-up is displayed will close the
pop-up.
Media Voice Commands
Uconnect offers connections via USB,
Bluetooth®, and auxiliary (AUX) ports. Voice
operation is only available for connected USB
and AUX devices.
Push the VR button located on the steering
wheel. After the beep, say one of the following
commands and follow the prompts to switch
your media source or choose an artist.
“Change source to Bluetooth®”
“Change source to AUX”
“Change source to USB”
“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album
Greatest Hits”; “Play song Moonlight
Sonata”; “Play genre Classical”
Did You Know: Press the Browse button on the
touchscreen to see all of the music on your USB
device. Your Voice Command must match
exactly how the artist, album, song, and genre
information is displayed.
PHONE MODE
Overview
Uconnect Phone is a voice-activated,
hands-free, in-vehicle communications system.
It allows you to dial a phone number with your
mobile phone.
The feature supports the following:
Voice Activated Features
Hands-Free dialing via Voice (“Call John
Smith Mobile” or “Dial 248-555-1212”).
Hands-Free text-to-speech listening of your
incoming SMS messages.
Hands-Free Text Message Replying: Forward
one of 18 predefined SMS messages to
incoming calls/text messages.
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 169
170 MULTIMEDIA
Redialing last dialed numbers (“Redial”).
Calling Back the last incoming call number
(“Call Back”).
Viewing call logs on screen (“Show Incoming
Calls,” “Show Outgoing Calls,” “Show Missed
Calls,” or “Show Recent Calls”).
Searching Contacts phone number (“Search
for John Smith Mobile”).
Screen Activated Features
Dialing via Keypad using touchscreen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Phone-
books displayed on the touchscreen.
Setting Favorite Contact phone numbers so
they are easily accessible on the Main Phone
screen.
Viewing and Calling contacts from Recent
Call logs.
Reviewing your recent Incoming SMS
Messages.
Pairing up to 10 phones/audio devices for
easy access to connect to them quickly.
NOTE:
Your phone must be capable of SMS messaging
via Bluetooth® for messaging features to work
properly.
Your mobile phone’s audio is transmitted
through your vehicle’s audio system; the system
will automatically mute your radio when using
the Uconnect Phone.
For Uconnect customer support:
US visit UconnectPhone.com or call
877-855-8400
Canada visit UconnectPhone.com or call
800-465-2001 (English) or (French) call
800-387-9983
Uconnect Phone allows you to transfer calls
between the system and your mobile phone as
you enter or exit your vehicle and enables you to
mute the system's microphone for private
conversation.
The Phone feature is driven through your
Bluetooth® “Hands-Free Profile” mobile phone.
Uconnect features Bluetooth® technology — the
global standard that enables different
electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station. Ensure you
phone is turned on with Bluetooth® active and
has been paired to the Uconnect system. Up to
10 mobile phones or audio devices are allowed
to be linked to the system. Only one linked (or
paired) mobile phone and one audio device can
be used with the system at a time.
Phone Button
The Phone button on your steering wheel is
used to get into the Phone Mode and make
calls, show recent, incoming or outgoing calls,
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel. You have full responsibility
and assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 170
MULTIMEDIA 171
view phonebook, etc. When you press the
button you will hear a BEEP. The BEEP is your
signal to give a command.
Voice Command Button
The Voice Command button on your steering
wheel is only used for “barge in” and when you
are already in a call or want to make another
call.
The button on your steering wheel is also used
to access the Voice Commands for the
Uconnect Voice Command features if your
vehicle is equipped.
Phone Operation
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the
Uconnect Phone and to navigate its menu
structure. Voice commands are required after
most Uconnect Phone prompts. There are two
general methods for how Voice Command
works:
1. Say compound commands like “Call John
Smith mobile”.
2. Say the individual commands and allow the
system to guide you to complete the task.
You will be prompted for a specific command
and then guided through the available options.
Prior to giving a voice command, one must
wait for the beep, which follows the “Listen”
prompt or another prompt.
For certain operations, compound
commands can be used. For example,
instead of saying “Call” and then “John
Smith” and then “mobile”, the following
compound command can be said: “Call John
Smith mobile.”
For each feature explanation in this section,
only the compound command form of the
voice command is given. You can also break
the commands into parts and say each part
of the command when you are asked for it.
For example, you can use the compound
command form voice command “Search for
John Smith,” or you can break the compound
command form into two voice commands:
“Search Contacts” and when asked, “John
Smith.” Please remember, the Uconnect
Phone works best when you talk in a normal
conversational tone, as if speaking to
someone sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
Natural Speech
Your Uconnect Phone Voice system uses a
Natural Language Voice Recognition (VR)
engine.
Natural speech allows the user to speak
commands in phrases or complete sentences.
The system filters out certain non-word
utterances and sounds such as “ah” and “eh.”
The system handles fill-in words such as “I
would like to”.
The system handles multiple inputs in the same
phrase or sentence such as “make a phone
call” and “to Kelly Smith”. For multiple inputs in
the same phrase or sentence, the system
identifies the topic or context and provides the
associated follow-up prompt such as “Who do
you want to call?” in the case where a phone
call was requested but the specific name was
not recognized.
The system utilizes continuous dialog. When the
system requires more information from the
user, it will ask a question to which the user can
respond without pushing the Voice Command
button on the steering wheel.
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 171
172 MULTIMEDIA
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you
want to know your options at any prompt, say
“Help” following the beep.
To activate the Uconnect Phone from idle,
simply push the Phone button (if active) on your
steering wheel and say a command or say
“Help”. All Phone sessions begin with a push of
the VR button or the Phone button.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say
“Cancel” and you will be returned to the main
menu.
You can also push the VR button or Phone
button on your steering wheel when the system
is listening for a command and be returned to
the main or previous menu.
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile Phone
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
To begin using your Uconnect
Phone, you must pair your
compatible Bluetooth®-
enabled mobile phone. Mobile
phone pairing is the process of establishing a
wireless connection between a cellular phone
and the Uconnect system.
To complete the pairing process, you will need
to reference your mobile phone’s manual.
Please visit UconnectPhone.com for complete
mobile phone compatibility information.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
NOTE:
You must have Bluetooth® enabled on your
phone to complete this procedure.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
Follow the steps below to pair your phone:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON/RUN
position.
2. Press the Phone button.
NOTE:
If there are no phones currently connected
with the system, a pop-up will appear asking
if you would like to pair a mobile phone.
This pop-up only appears when the user
enters Phone Mode and no other device(s)
have previously been paired. If the system
has a phone previously paired, even if no
phone is currently connected with the
system, this pop-up will not appear.
3. Select “Yes” to begin the pairing process.
4. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone.
Press the Settings button on your mobile
phone.
Select “Bluetooth®” and ensure it is
enabled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for Bluetooth®
connections.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 172
MULTIMEDIA 173
pop-up on your touchscreen asking you to make
sure the PIN on the touchscreen matches the
PIN from the pop-up on your mobile phone.
5. If “No” is selected, and you still would like to
pair a mobile phone, press the Pairing or
Settings button from the Uconnect Phone
main screen.
Press the Paired Phones button.
Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled mobile phone (see
below). When prompted on the phone,
select “Uconnect” and accept the
connection request.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-progress
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect.”
8. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect.
9. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this phone
the highest priority. This phone will take
precedence over other paired phones within
range and will connect to the Uconnect
system automatically when entering the
vehicle. Only one mobile phone and/or one
Bluetooth® audio device can be connected
to the Uconnect system at a time. If “No” is
selected, simply select “Uconnect” from the
mobile phone/audio device Bluetooth®
screen, and the Uconnect system will
reconnect to the Bluetooth® device.
NOTE:
For phones which are not made a favorite, the
phone priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The most recent phone
paired will have the higher priority.
NOTE:
During the pairing procedure, you may receive a
pop-up on your mobile phone for the Uconnect
system to access your “messages” and
“contacts”. Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync
your contacts with the Uconnect system.
You can also use the following VR command to
bring up the Paired Phone screen from any
screen on the radio:
“Show Paired Phones”
NOTE:
Software updates on your phone or the
Uconnect system may interfere with the
Bluetooth® connection. If this happens, simply
repeat the pairing process. However, first make
sure to delete the device from the list of phones
on your Uconnect system. Next, be sure to
remove Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth® settings.
Pair A Bluetooth® Streaming Audio Device
1. Press the Media button on the
touchscreen to begin.
2. Change the source to “Bluetooth®”.
3. Press the Bluetooth® button on the
touchscreen to display the Paired Audio
Devices screen.
4. Press the Add Device button on the
touchscreen.
NOTE:
If there is no device currently connected with
the system, a pop-up will appear.
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 173
174 MULTIMEDIA
5. Search for available devices on your
Bluetooth®-enabled audio device. When
prompted on the device, confirm the PIN
shown on the Uconnect screen.
6. Uconnect Phone will display an in-process
screen while the system is connecting.
7. When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
device. Selecting “Yes” will make this device
the highest priority. This device will take
precedence over other paired devices
within range.
NOTE:
For devices which are not made a favorite, the
device priority is determined by the order in
which it was paired. The most recent device
paired will have the higher priority.
You can also use a following VR command to
bring up a list of paired audio devices:
“Show Paired Phones”
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or
Audio Device After Pairing
Uconnect Phone will automatically connect to
the highest priority paired phone and/or Audio
Device within range. If you need to choose a
particular phone or audio device follow these
steps:
1. Press the
Settings
button on the
touchscreen.
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
buttons.
3. Press to select the particular phone or the
particular audio device. A pop-up menu will
appear; press “Connect Phone”.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Disconnecting or Deleting A Phone Or Audio
Device
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
1. Press the Uconnect Phone Pairing or
Settings button.
2. Press the Paired Phones/Audio Sources
buttons.
3. Press the Settings button located to the
right of the device name for a different
phone or audio device than the currently
connected device or press the preferred
Connected Phone from the list.
1 — Disconnect Device Or Disconnect Phone
2 — Make Favorite
3 — Delete Device/Phone
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 174
MULTIMEDIA 175
4. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
5. Press the Disconnect Device or the Delete
Device button on the touchscreen.
6. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A Favorite
1. On the Paired Phone/Audio sources
screen, press the Settings button located
to the right of the device name for a
different phone or audio device than the
currently connected device or press the
preferred “Connected Phone” from the list.
2. The option’s pop-up will be displayed.
3. Press the Make Favorite button on the
touchscreen; you will see the chosen device
move to the top of the list.
4. Press the X to exit out of the Settings
screen.
Phonebook Download (Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Mobile Phone) — If Equipped
If supported by your phone, Uconnect Phone
has the ability to download contact names and
number entries from the mobile phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth® Phones with
Phonebook Access Profile may support this
feature. Your mobile phone may receive a
pop-up asking for permission for the Uconnect
system to access your messages and contacts.
Selecting “Ok” or “Allow” will sync your contacts
with the Uconnect system.
See the Uconnect website,
UconnectPhone.com, for supported phones.
To call a name from a downloaded mobile
phonebook, follow the procedure in the
“Voice Command” in this section.
Automatic download and update of a phone-
book, if supported, begins as soon as the
Bluetooth® wireless phone connection is
made to the Uconnect Phone, for example,
after you start the vehicle.
A maximum of 5,000 contact names with
four numbers per contact will be downloaded
and updated every time a phone is
connected to the Uconnect Phone.
Depending on the maximum number of entries
downloaded, there may be a short delay before
the latest downloaded names can be used.
Until then, if available, the previously down-
loaded phonebook is available for use.
Only the phonebook of the currently
connected mobile phone is accessible.
This downloaded phonebook cannot be
edited or deleted on the Uconnect Phone.
These can only be edited on the mobile
phone. The changes are transferred and
updated to Uconnect Phone on the next
phone connection.
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 175
176 MULTIMEDIA
Managing Your Favorites — If Equipped
There are two ways you can add an entry to your
favorites:
1. After loading the mobile phonebook, press
the Favorites button on the touchscreen,
and then press one of the +Add Favorite
Contact buttons that appears on the list.
2. After loading the mobile phonebook, select
“Contacts” from the Phone main screen,
and then select the appropriate number.
Press the Down Arrow button next to the
selected number to display the option’s
pop-up. In the pop-up, select “Add to
Favorites”.
NOTE:
If the Favorites list is full, you will be asked to
remove an existing favorite.
To Remove A Favorite — If Equipped
1. To remove a Favorite, select “Favorites”
from the Phone main screen.
2. Next, select the Down Arrow icon next to the
contact you want to remove from your
favorites. This will bring up the options for
that Favorite contact.
3. Deselect the Star icon to delete the
Favorite.
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through
the Uconnect Phone if the feature(s) are
available and supported by Bluetooth® on your
mobile service plan. For example, if your mobile
service plan provides three-way calling, this
feature can be accessed through the Uconnect
Phone. Check with your mobile service provider
for the features that you have.
Listed below are the phone options with
Uconnect:
Redial
Dial by pressing in the number
Voice Commands (Dial by Saying a Name,
Call by Saying a Phonebook Name, Redial or
Call Back)
Favorites
Mobile Phonebook
Recent Call Log
SMS Message Viewer
Call Controls
The touchscreen allows you to control the
following call features:
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
Other phone call features include:
End Call
Hold/Unhold/Resume
Swap two active calls
1 — Answer
2 — End
3 — Mute/Unmute
4 — Transfer
5 — Join Calls
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 176
MULTIMEDIA 177
Key Pad Number Entry
1. Press the Phone button.
2. Press the Dial/Keypad button on the
touchscreen.
3. The Touch-Tone screen will be displayed.
4. Use the numbered buttons on the
touchscreens to enter the number and
press “Dial/Call”.
Recent Calls — If Equipped
You may browse a list of the most recent of each
of the following call types:
All Calls
Incoming Calls or Calls Received
Outgoing Calls or Calls Made
Missed Calls
These can be accessed by pressing the Recent
Calls button on the phone main screen.
You can also push the VR button on your
steering wheel and perform the above
operation. For example, say “Show my incoming
calls”.
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call
Currently In Progress
When you receive a call on your mobile phone,
the Uconnect Phone will interrupt the vehicle
audio system. Push the Phone button on the
steering wheel, press the Answer button on the
touchscreen.
You can also press the Caller ID box to place the
current call on hold or answer the incoming call.
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call
Currently In Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have
another incoming call, you will hear the same
network tones for call waiting that you normally
hear when using your mobile phone. Push the
Phone button on the steering wheel, press the
Answer button on the touchscreen, or press the
Caller ID box to place the current call on hold
and answer the incoming call.
NOTE:
Phones that are compatible with the Uconnect
system in the market today do not support
rejecting an incoming call when another call is
in progress. Therefore, the user can only answer
an incoming call or ignore it.
Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable
notifications from incoming calls and texts,
allowing you to keep your eyes on the road and
hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of your
missed calls and text messages while Do Not
Disturb is active.
1 — Answer Button
2 — Caller ID Box
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 177
178 MULTIMEDIA
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call, or both when declining an
incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
“I am driving right now, I will get back to you
shortly”.
Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
NOTE:
Only the first 25 characters can be seen on the
touchscreen while typing a custom message.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be
selected so you can still place a second call
without being interrupted by incoming calls.
NOTE:
Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones®.
Auto reply with text message is only available
on phones that support Bluetooth® Message
Access Profile (MAP).
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold
During an active call, press the Hold or Call On
Hold button on the Phone main screen.
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress
You can place a call on hold by pressing the
Hold button on the Phone main screen, then
dial a number from the keypad (if supported by
your mobile phone), recent calls, SMS Inbox or
from the phonebooks.
Toggling Between Calls
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display
If two calls are in progress (one active and one
on hold), press the Swap Calls button on the
phone main screen. Only one call can be placed
on hold at a time.
You can also push the Phone button to toggle
between the active and held phone call.
Join Calls
When two calls are in progress (one active and
one on hold), press the Join/Merge Calls button
on the Phone main screen to combine all calls
into a conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the
End Call button on the touchscreen or the
Phone End button on the steering wheel. Only
the active call(s) will be terminated and if there
is a call on hold, it will become the new active
call.
Redial
Push the VR button and after the “Listening”
prompt and the following beep, say “Redial.”
The Uconnect Phone will call the last number
that was dialed from your mobile phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone
call on the Uconnect Phone after the vehicle
ignition has been switched to OFF.
NOTE:
The call will remain within the vehicle audio
system until the phone becomes out of range
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 178
MULTIMEDIA 179
for the Bluetooth® connection. It is recom-
mended to press the Transfer button on the
touchscreen when leaving the vehicle.
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call To And From Mobile Phone
The Uconnect Phone allows ongoing calls to be
transferred from your mobile phone without
terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your connected mobile phone to the
Uconnect Phone or vice versa, press the
Transfer button on the Phone main screen.
Things You Should Know About Uconnect
Phone
Voice Command
For the best performance:
Always wait for the beep before speaking
Speak normally, without pausing, just as you
would speak to a person sitting a few feet/
meters away from you
Ensure that no one other than you is
speaking during a voice command period
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Even though the system is designed for many
languages and accents, the system may not
always work for some.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you do not store names
in your Favorites phonebook while the vehicle is
in motion.
Number and name recognition rate is optimized
when the entries are not similar. You can say
“O” (letter “O”) for “0” (zero).
Even though international dialing for most
number combinations is supported, some
shortcut dialing number combinations may not
be supported.
Audio Performance
Audio quality is maximized under:
Low-To-Medium Blower Setting
Low-To-Medium Vehicle Speed
Low Road Noise
Smooth Road Surface
Fully Closed Windows
Dry Weather Conditions
Operation From The Driver's Seat
Performance such as audio clarity, echo, and
loudness to a large degree rely on the phone
and network, and not the Uconnect Phone.
Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced
by lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on the
wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features and applications in this
vehicle. Only use Uconnect when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an acci-
dent involving serious injury or death.
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 179
180 MULTIMEDIA
Phone Voice Commands
Making and answering hands-free phone calls is
easy with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button
is illuminated on your touchscreen, your system
is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile
phone compatibility and pairing instructions.
Push the Phone button and wait for the beep
to say a command. See some examples below:
“Call John Smith”
“Dial 123 456 7890”
“Redial” (call previous outgoing phone
number)
“Call back” (call previously answered
incoming phone number)
Did You Know: When providing a Voice
Command, push the Phone button and say
“Call”, then pronounce the name exactly as it
appears in your phonebook. When a contact
has multiple phone numbers, you can say “Call
John Smith work”.
Voice Text Reply — If Equipped
Uconnect can announce incoming text
messages. Push the VR button or Phone
button and say:
1. “
Listen
” to have the system read an
incoming text message. (Must have
compatible mobile phone paired to
Uconnect system.)
2. “Reply” after an incoming text message has
been read.
Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the predefined messag-
es and follow the system prompts.
NOTE:
Only use the numbering listed in the provided
table. Otherwise, the system will not transpose
the message.
Did You Know: Your mobile phone must have the
full implementation of the Message Access Profile
(MAP) to take advantage of this feature. For
details about MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.
Apple® iPhone® iOS 6 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. For further
information on how to enable this feature on your
Apple® iPhone®, refer to your iPhone’s® “User
Manual”.
Did You Know: Voice Text Reply is not
compatible with iPhone®, but if your vehicle is
equipped with Siri® Eyes Free, you can use your
voice to send a text message.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be 5 <or
10, 15, 20,
25, 30, 45,
60> minutes
late.
Call me.
Are you there
yet?
I’ll call you
later.
I need
directions.
See you in 5
<or 10, 15,
20, 25, 30,
45, 60> min-
utes.
I’m on my
way.
Can’t talk
right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY
RESPONSES
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 180
MULTIMEDIA 181
Siri® Eyes Free — If Equipped
When used with your Apple® iPhone®
connected to your vehicle via Bluetooth®, Siri
lets you use your voice to send text messages,
select media, place phone calls and much
more. Siri uses your natural language to
understand what you mean and responds back
to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and
your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help you
perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release the
Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on the
steering wheel. After you hear a double beep,
you can ask Siri to play podcasts and music, get
directions, read text messages, and many other
useful requests.
Bluetooth® Communication Link
Mobile phones may lose connection to the
Uconnect Phone. When this happens, the
connection can generally be re-established by
restarting the mobile phone. Your mobile phone is
recommended to remain in Bluetooth® ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either
the ON/RUN or ACC position, or after a language
change, you must wait at least 15 seconds prior
to using the system Ú page 360.
ANDROID AUTO™ & APPLE CARPLAY® — IF
EQUIPPED
ANDROID AUTO™
Android Auto™ is a feature of your Uconnect
system, and your Android™ 5.0 or higher
powered smartphone with a data plan, that
allows you to project your smartphone and a
number of its apps onto the touchscreen radio
display. Android Auto™ brings you useful
information, and organizes it into simple cards
that appear just when they are needed. Android
Auto™ can be used with Google's best-in-class
speech technology, the steering wheel controls,
the knobs and buttons on your radio faceplate,
and the radio display’s touchscreen to control
many of your apps. To use Android Auto™,
perform the following procedure:
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Auto™ features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
1. Download the Android Auto™ app from the
Google Play store on your
Android™-powered smartphone.
2. Connect your Android™-powered
smartphone to one of the media USB ports
in your vehicle. If the Android Auto™ app
was not downloaded, the first time you plug
your device in the app begins to download.
Your vehicle should be in PARK the first time
you use the app.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB cable
that came with your phone, as aftermarket
cables may not work.
Android Auto™ And LTE Data Coverage
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 181
182 MULTIMEDIA
NOTE:
To use Android Auto™, make sure you are in an
area with cellular coverage. Android Auto™ may
use cellular data and your cellular coverage is
shown in the upper right corner of the radio
screen. Data plan rates apply.
3. Once the device is connected and
recognized, the Phone icon on the drag &
drop menu bar changes to the Android
Auto™ icon.
NOTE:
Android Auto™ is set to launch immediately
once a compatible device is connected. You can
also launch it by pressing the Android Auto™
icon on the touchscreen.
Once Android Auto™ is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your smartphone’s data plan:
Google Maps™ for navigation
Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio, etc.
for music
Hands-free calling and texting for communi-
cation
Various compatible apps
Maps
Push and hold the Voice Recognition
(VR) button on the steering wheel
until the beep or tap the Microphone
icon to ask Google to take you to a
desired destination by voice. You can also touch
the Navigation icon in Android Auto™ to access
other navigation apps.
While using Android Auto™, Google Maps™
provides voice-guided:
Navigation
Live traffic information
Lane guidance
For further information, refer to
www.android.com/auto/ (US) or https://
www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto/ (Canada).
For further information on the navigation
function, please refer to https://
support.google.com/android or https://
support.google.com/androidauto/.
Music
Android Auto™ allows you to access,
stream, and play your favorite music
with apps like Google Play Music,
iHeartRadio, Spotify, and any audio playable
application. Using your smartphone’s data plan,
you can stream endless music on the road.
NOTE:
Music apps, playlists, and stations must be set
up on your smartphone prior to using Android
Auto™ for them to work with Android Auto™.
NOTE:
To see the track details for the music playing
through Android Auto™, select the Uconnect
system’s media screen.
For further information, refer to https://
support.google.com/androidauto.
Communication
With Android Auto™ connected, push
and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel to activate voice
recognition specific to Android Auto™.
This allows you to send and reply to text
messages, have incoming text messages read
out loud, and place and receive hands-free
calls.
Apps
The Android Auto™ App displays all the
compatible apps that are available to use with
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 182
MULTIMEDIA 183
Android Auto™, every time it is launched. You
must have the compatible app downloaded,
and you must be signed in to the app through
your mobile device for it to work with Android
Auto™.
Refer to g.co/androidauto to see the latest list
of available apps for Android Auto™.
Android Auto™ Voice Command
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Android
Auto™ features may or may not be available in
every region and/or language.
Android Auto™ allows you to use your voice to
interact with Android’s™ best-in-class speech
technology through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your Android™-powered
smartphone and a number of its apps onto your
Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your Android™
5.0 or higher to one of the media USB ports,
using the factory-provided USB cable, and press
the new Android Auto™ icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin
Android Auto™. Push and hold the VR button on
the steering wheel, or press and hold the
“Microphone” icon within Android Auto™, to
activate Android’s™ VR, which recognizes
natural voice commands, to use a list of your
smartphone’s features:
Maps
Music
Phone
Text Messages
Additional Apps
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 or higher and download app on
Google Play. Android™, Android Auto™, and
Google Play are trademarks of Google Inc.
APPLE CARPLAY®
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple
CarPlay®, the smarter, more secure way to use
your iPhone® in the car, and stay focused on
the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen
display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and
your voice with Siri to get access to Apple
Music®, Maps, Messages, and more.
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay® features may or may not be available
in every region and/or language.
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure you are
using iPhone® 5 or later, have Siri enabled in
Settings, ensure your iPhone® is unlocked for
the very first connection only, and then use the
following procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone® to one of the media
USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Lightning
cable that came with your phone, as after-
market cables may not work.
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 183
184 MULTIMEDIA
2. Once the device is connected and
recognized, the Phone icon on the drag &
drop menu bar changes to the Apple
CarPlay® Icon.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® is set to launch immediately.
You can also launch it by pressing the Apple
CarPlay® icon on the touchscreen.
Apple CarPlay® And LTE Data Coverage
NOTE:
To use Apple CarPlay®, make sure that cellular
data is turned on, and that you are in an area
with cellular coverage. Your data and cellular
coverage is shown on the left side of the radio
screen. Data plan rates apply.
Once Apple CarPlay® is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your iPhone’s® data plan:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps
Phone
With Apple CarPlay®, push and hold
the VR button on the steering wheel to
activate a Siri voice recognition
session. You can also press and hold
the Home button within Apple CarPlay® to start
talking to Siri. This allows you to make calls or
listen to voicemail as you normally would using
Siri on your iPhone®.
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on the
steering wheel launches a built-in Uconnect VR
session, not a Siri session, and it will not func-
tion with Apple CarPlay®.
Music
Apple CarPlay® allows you to access
all your artists, playlists, and music
from iTunes® or any third party
application installed on your device.
Using your iPhone’s® data plan, you can also
use select third party audio apps including
music, news, sports, podcasts, and more.
Messages
Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel to activate a Siri voice
recognition session. Apple CarPlay®
allows you to use Siri to send or reply
to text messages. Siri can also read incoming
text messages, but drivers will not be able to
read messages, as everything is done via voice.
Maps
Push and hold the VR button on the
steering wheel until the beep or tap
the Microphone icon to ask Apple®
Siri to take you to a desired
destination by voice. You can also touch the
Navigation icon in Apple CarPlay® to access
Apple® Maps.
1 — LTE Data Coverage
2 — Apple CarPlay®
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 184
MULTIMEDIA 185
Apps
The Apple CarPlay® App plays all compatible
apps that are available to use, every time it is
launched. You must have the compatible app
downloaded, and you must be signed in to the
app through your mobile device for it to work
with Apple CarPlay®.
Refer to http://www.apple.com/ios/carplay/
(US) or https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/
carplay/ (Canada) to see the latest list of
available apps for Apple CarPlay®.
Apple CarPlay® Voice Command
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier and
mobile phone maker. Some Apple CarPlay®
features may not be available in every region
and/or language.
Apple CarPlay® allows you to use your voice to
interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your iPhone® and a
number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your iPhone® 5 or higher
to one of the media USB ports, using the
factory-provided Lightning cable, and press the
new Apple CarPlay® icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin
Apple CarPlay®. Push and hold the VR button
on the steering wheel, or press and hold the
Home button within Apple CarPlay®, to activate
Siri, which recognizes natural voice commands
to use a list of your iPhone’s® features:
Phone
Music
Messages
Maps — If Equipped
Additional Apps — If Equipped
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® is a trademark of Apple® Inc.
iPhone® is a trademark of Apple® Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple®
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
ANDROID AUTO™ AND APPLE
C
ARPLAY® TIPS AND TRICKS
Android Auto™ And Apple CarPlay® Automatic
Bluetooth® Pairing
After connecting to Android Auto™ or Apple
CarPlay® for the first time and undergoing the
setup procedure, the smartphone pairs to the
Uconnect system via Bluetooth® without any
setup required every time it is within range, if
Bluetooth® is turned on.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® uses a USB connection while
Android Auto™ uses both USB and Bluetooth®
connections to function. The connected device
is unavailable to other devices when connected
using Android Auto™ or Apple CarPlay®.
Multiple Devices Connecting To The Uconnect
System — If Equipped
It is possible to have multiple devices
connected to the Uconnect system. For
example, if using Android Auto™/Apple
CarPlay®, the connected device will be used to
place hands-free phone calls or send
hands-free text messages. However, another
device can also be paired to the Uconnect
system, via Bluetooth®, as an audio source, so
the passenger can stream music.
NOTE:
Apple CarPlay® and Android Auto™ can only be
launched from the front and center console
USB ports only.
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 185
186 MULTIMEDIA
CONNECTED VEHICLE SERVICES — IF
EQUIPPED
IS MY VEHICLE CONNECTED ?
Vehicles with an Assist and an SOS button are
connected vehicles. These buttons will be
located on either the rearview mirror or
overhead console, depending on the vehicle. If
these buttons are present in your vehicle, you
have a connected radio and can take
advantage of the many connected vehicle
features.
For further information about the ASSIST and
SOS buttons Ú page 271.
INTRODUCTION TO CONNECTED VEHICLE
S
ERVICES
One of the many benefits of your vehicle’s
Uconnect system is that you can now take
advantage of SiriusXM Guardian™ connected
vehicle services. To unlock the full potential of
SiriusXM Guardian™ in your vehicle, you first
need to activate SiriusXM Guardian™ services.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Guardian™ involves the collection,
transmission and use of data from your vehicle
Ú page 210.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Contact Information
And Business Hours
SiriusXM Guardian™/Care
US residents visit: https://www.driveucon-
nect.com/sirius-xm-guardian.html or call
1-844-796-4827
Canadian residents visit: https://www.siri-
usxm.ca/guardian-v1/ or call
1-877-324-9091
Uconnect Phone Customer Support
UconnectPhone.com or for US residents call:
1-877-855-8400.
Canadian residents call: 1-800-465-2001
(English) or call: 1-800-387-9983 (French).
Business Hours
Central Time
Monday through Friday – 7:00 am to
10:00 pm
Saturday – 8:00 am to 9:00 pm
What Is SiriusXM Guardian™?
SiriusXM Guardian™ uses an embedded device
in the Uconnect system installed in your vehicle,
which receives GPS signals and communicates
with the SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
center via wireless and landline
communications networks. Depending on the
type of device in your vehicle, some SiriusXM
Guardian™ services require an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network
compatible with your device. SiriusXM
Guardian™ is available only on equipped
vehicles purchased within the continental
United States, Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto Rico and
Canada.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full responsi-
bility and assume all risks related to the use
of the features and applications in this vehi-
cle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to comply may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 186
MULTIMEDIA 187
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are
dependent upon an operative telematics
device, a cellular connection, navigation map
data, and GPS satellite signal reception,
which can limit the ability to reach the
response center or reach emergency
support.
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
available everywhere at all times, particularly
in remote or enclosed areas.
Other factors outside the control of SiriusXM
Guardian™ that may limit or prevent service
delivery are hills, structures, buildings,
tunnels, weather, damage to the electrical
system or other important parts of your
vehicle, network congestion, civil distur-
bances, actions of third parties or the govern-
ment, Internet failure, and/or the physical
location of your vehicle, such as in an under-
ground parking structure or under a bridge.
Not all SiriusXM Guardian™ features are
available for all models.
SiriusXM Guardian™ provides:
The ability to remotely lock/unlock and
remote start your vehicle from virtually
anywhere by using the Uconnect App or your
computer.
Send & Go capability with the Uconnect App.
Use the Uconnect App to easily search, map
and send your locations directly to your
Uconnect Navigation.
The ability to locate your vehicle, when you
forget where you parked, using the Vehicle
Finder function of the Uconnect App.
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the
easy-to-use Uconnect system and SiriusXM
Guardian™ services.
The ASSIST and SOS Call Buttons On Your
Rearview Mirror Or Overhead Console
The ASSIST Button is used for contacting
Roadside Assistance, Vehicle Care, Uconnect
Care, and SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
The SOS Call button connects you directly to
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care for
assistance in an emergency.
Activation
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM
Guardian™ in your vehicle, you must activate
your SiriusXM Guardian™ services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from your
list of apps.
3. For customers in the United States, select
“Customer Care” to speak with a SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care agent who will
activate services in your vehicle, or select
“Enter Email” to activate on the web.
For customers in Canada, enter your email
address to activate services in your vehicle.
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included trial
period for use of the SiriusXM Guardian™
services starting on the date of vehicle purchase.
To get started with your trial, enrollment in
SiriusXM Guardian™ is required. The Uconnect
4C/4C NAV includes a trial* of SiriusXM
Guardian™ services from your date of purchase.
* Included trial applies to new vehicles only.
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 187
188 MULTIMEDIA
Features And Packages
After the trial period, you must purchase a
subscription to continue your services by calling
a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent.
GETTING STARTED WITH CONNECTED
V
EHICLE SERVICES
Download The Uconnect App
Once you have activated your services, you’re
only a few steps away from using connected
services.
Uconnect Mobile App
Download the Uconnect app to your mobile
device.
Use your Owner Account login and password
to open the app and then set up a PIN.
For customers in the United States, visit
www.mopar.com, and click the Sign In/
Register button in the upper right-hand
corner to register your account online.
a. Click the Register button
b. Select the correct country and email
address then click “Register”.
c. You will then receive an email notification
to confirm/verify your newly created
account.
1 — Settings
2 — Vehicle Info
3 — Location And Send & Go
4 — Remote Commands
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 188
MULTIMEDIA 189
d. After clicking the email link, it will take
you to a website and prompt you to
assign your account with a password.
e. Once you have added a password, the
website will direct you to your homepage
where you can add in your vehicle’s VIN.
For customers in Canada, register your
account via your vehicle.
a. Press the Apps button in the bottom
menu bar.
b. Press the Activate Services button from
the apps list.
c. Enter your email and press “OK”. A confir-
mation email will be sent to the provided
email address.
d. Press “Continue Activation” from the
confirmation email. It may take a short
time before remote services will be avail-
able, but you will be able to log into the
Uconnect App and the owner’s site.
Once on the Remote screen and you have set
up your four-digit PIN, you can begin using
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Vehicle
Start, and activate your horn and lights
remotely, if equipped.
Press the Location button on the bottom
menu bar of the app to bring up a map to
locate your vehicle or send a location to your
Uconnect Navigation, if equipped.
Press the Settings side menu in the upper left
corner of the app to bring up app settings and
access the Assist Call Centers.
Using Your Owner’s Site
Your Owner’s Site website https://
www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents), or
www.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents) provides
you with all the information you need, all in one
place. You can track your service history, find
recommended accessories for your vehicle,
watch videos about your vehicle's features, and
easily access your manuals. It is also where you
can manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account.
This section will familiarize you with the key
elements of the website that will help you get
the most of your SiriusXM Guardian™ system.
For customers in the United States, press the
Sign In/Register button and enter your email
address and password.
For customers in Canada, press the My Vehicle
button. Select from “Dashboard”, “Vehicle
Health Report”, and “Recalls”. The website will
then prompt you to log in using your email
address and password.
Edit/Edit Profile:
To manage the details of your SiriusXM
Guardian™ account, such as your contact
information, password and SiriusXM
Guardian™ PIN, click on the Edit/Edit Profile
button to access the details of your account.
Connected Services Status:
This statement will indicate your SiriusXM
Guardian™-equipped vehicle.
Remote Commands:
For vehicles with an active SiriusXM
Guardian™ subscription, press one of these
icons and enter your four-digit SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN to remotely start (if
equipped), lock/unlock doors or sound the
horn and flash the lights.
Editing Your Notifications
Notifications are an important element of your
SiriusXM Guardian™ account. For example, any
time you use your remote services (such as
Remote Door Unlock), you can elect to receive a
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 189
190 MULTIMEDIA
text message, push notification, and/or E-mail
to notify you of the event. To set up the
notifications, please follow these instructions.
1. Log on to your Owner’s Account at
https://
www.mopar.com/en-us.html (US Residents)
and select “Dashboard”, or www.mopar.ca
(Canadian Residents), select “My Vehicle”
and then “Dashboard”.
2. Click the Edit/Edit Profile button.
3. Once there, select “SiriusXM Guardian™”
where can edit Notification Preferences.
4. You can enter a mobile phone and/or email
address to notify you, and you can
customize the types of messages.
USING SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™
SOS Call
Access To Emergency Services At The Push Of A
Button
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance
Features
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has
onboard assistance features located on the
rearview mirror or overhead console designed
to enhance your driving experience if you should
ever need assistance or support.
Description
SOS Call offers a convenient way to get in
contact with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care agent in the event of an emergency. When
the connection between the vehicle and the live
agent is made, your vehicle will automatically
transmit location information. In the event of a
minor collision, medical or any other
emergency, press the SOS button to be
connected to a call center agent who can send
emergency assistance to your vehicle’s
location.
NOTE:
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are
dependent on an operational Uconnect system,
cellular network availability that is compatible
with the device in your vehicle, and GPS
network availability. Not all features of SiriusXM
Guardian™ are available everywhere at all
times, particularly in remote or enclosed areas.
How It Works
1. Push the SOS Call button; the indicator
light will turn green indicating a call has
been placed.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is accidentally
pushed, there is a 10-second delay before
the SOS call is placed. The system will
verbally alert you that a call is about to be
made. To cancel the SOS Call connection,
push the SOS Call button on the rearview
mirror or press the Cancel button on the
touchscreen within 10 seconds.
During an SOS Call, the Bluetooth® paired
phone is disconnected so incoming or
outgoing calls will go through your mobile
device versus the hands-free system which is
not available due to the SOS Call.
WARNING!
Some SiriusXM Guardian™ services, includ-
ing SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call
will NOT work without a network connection
compatible with your device.
Center Light Status Description
Off No call activated
Green Active call in progress
Red System error
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 190
MULTIMEDIA 191
2. Once a connection between the vehicle and
a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agent
is made, the agent will stay on the line with
you.
NOTE:
Calls between the vehicle occupants and the
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care center may
be recorded or monitored for quality assurance
purposes. Through your enrollment in and use
of the SiriusXM Guardian™ services, you
consent to being recorded.
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles that have been purchased in the US
and that travel into Mexico and Canada may
have limited services. In particular, responses
to SOS calls or other emergency services may
be unavailable or very limited. Vehicles
purchased outside the United States and
Canada are unable to receive SiriusXM
Guardian™ services.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected:
The light will continuously be illuminated red.
The screen will display the following message
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please
contact your dealer.”
An in-vehicle audio message will state
“Vehicle phone requires service. Please
contact your dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
prevent or stop SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the
following factors:
The ignition key is in OFF position.
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not
intact.
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash.
The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
ware is damaged during a vehicle crash.
LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) coverage
and/or GPS signals are unavailable or
obstructed.
Network congestion.
Weather conditions.
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels.
If your vehicle loses battery power for any
reason (including during or after an accident)
the SOS Call System, among other vehicle
systems, will not operate.
Requirements
This feature is available only on vehicles sold
in the US or Canada.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
SiriusXM Guardian™ system. Vehicle must be
registered with SiriusXM Guardian™ and
have an active subscription that includes the
applicable feature.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or
ACC (Accessory) position with a properly func-
tioning electrical system.
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 191
192 MULTIMEDIA
(Continued)
(Continued)
Remote Commands
On the Remote Commands screen, you have
access to several vehicle features that can be
controlled remotely from your mobile device.
These features include locking/unlocking,
remote starting, and activating the horn and
lights of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Never place anything on or near the
vehicle’s LTE (voice/data) or 3G or 4G
(data) and GPS antennas. You could
prevent LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and
GPS signal reception, which can prevent
your vehicle from placing an emergency
call.
Do not add any aftermarket electrical
equipment to the vehicle’s electrical
system. This may prevent your vehicle from
sending a signal to initiate an emergency
call. To avoid interference that can cause
the SOS Call system to fail, never add after-
market equipment (e.g., two-way mobile
radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your
vehicle’s electrical system or modify the
antennas on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE
LOSES POWER FOR ANY REASON
(INCLUDING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), NEITHER THE UCONNECT APPS
NOR THE SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN™ SERVICES
WILL OPERATE.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any
part of the air bag system is detected. If the
Air Bag Warning Light is illuminated, the air
bag system may not be working properly
and the SOS Call system may not be able to
send a signal to the SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care center. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service your vehicle
immediately.
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror Light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services if
needed. If the Rearview Mirror Light is illu-
minated, have an authorized dealer service
the SOS Call system immediately.
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from a SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent. All occupants should
exit the vehicle immediately and move to a
safe location.
WARNING! (Continued)
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
and regular inspection of your vehicle may
result in vehicle damage, accident or injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 192
MULTIMEDIA 193
Remote Commands
Remote Commands lets you send a request to
your vehicle in one of three ways:
Anywhere using your mobile device and
Uconnect App
From your computer on the Owner’s Site (not
available on all functions)
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care (not available on all functions)
Using A Remote Command Through Your Mobile
Device And The Uconnect App
1. Press the desired Remote Command icon
on your mobile device.
2. A pop-up screen will appear asking for your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
same four-digit code established when you
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™
system). Enter the SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN on the keypad.
3. It may take 30 seconds or more for the
command to go through to your vehicle.
4. A message will let you know if the command
was received by your vehicle.
Using A Remote Command Through Your
Owner’s Site
1. Log on to your Owner’s Site using the
username and password you used when
activating your SiriusXM Guardian™
services in your vehicle.
NOTE:
If you forgot your username or password, links
are provided on the website to help you retrieve
them.
2. If you have more than one vehicle
registered into your Owner’s Site, select the
vehicle you want to send the command to by
clicking on its image along the top.
1 — Lock
Press this button to
lock your vehicle.
2 — Vehicle Start
Press this button to
start your vehicle.
3 — Horn & Lights
Press this button to
sound the horn and
activate your lights.
4 — Unlock
Press this button to
unlock your vehicle.
5 — Cancel Vehicle
Start
Press this button to
cancel remote start.
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 193
194 MULTIMEDIA
3. On your dashboard, you will see remote
commands. Press the desired icon to
activate that feature.
4. You will then be asked to enter your
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN (this is the
same four-digit code established when you
activated your SiriusXM Guardian™
system). Please enter your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN.
5. A message will appear on the screen to let
you know if the command was received by
your vehicle.
Contacting SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
(for example, in case of an accidental lock-out):
1. Contact SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care if you are unable to lock your vehicle
through the Uconnect App or your key fob.
2. For security purposes, the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care agent will verify
your identity by asking for your four-digit
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN.
3. After providing your SiriusXM Guardian™
Security PIN, you can ask them to perform a
remote command.
NOTE:
Anyone with access to your PIN may request
Remote Door Lock/Unlock. It is your responsi-
bility to protect your PIN appropriately.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Description
The Remote Door Lock/Unlock feature provides
you the ability to lock or unlock the door on your
vehicle without the keys and from virtually any
distance.
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
tower reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or
Wi-Fi connection.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
SiriusXM Guardian™ system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
If using the Uconnect App to command your
vehicle, your device must be compatible and
be connected to an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
An ignition cycle is required for some remote
commands, such as Remote Vehicle Start
and Remote Door Lock/Unlock if following a
Remote Horn & Lights activation.
Your Remote Door Lock/Unlock request will
not be processed if the vehicle is in motion,
the ignition key is on or during an emergency
call.
NOTE:
All other remote services should be performed
via your Owner’s Site or through the Uconnect
App on your compatible device.
Remote Vehicle Start
Description
The Remote Vehicle Start feature provides you
with the ability to start the engine on your
vehicle without the keys and from virtually any
distance. Once started, the preset climate
controls in your vehicle can warm up or cool
down the interior.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 194
MULTIMEDIA 195
You can also send a command to turn off an
engine that has been started using Remote
Vehicle Start. After 15 minutes, if you have not
entered your vehicle with the key, the engine
will shut off automatically.
This remote function requires your vehicle to be
equipped with a factory-installed Remote Start
system.
You can set up push notifications every time a
command is sent to activate or cancel Remote
Start.
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must be off or in ACC mode.
The vehicle has been started with the key fob
within the last 14 days.
The vehicle must be in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle’s security system has been
armed and not triggered since the last
vehicle start.
The doors, hood, and trunk/liftgate are
closed.
The vehicle’s check engine light must be off.
The vehicle must have at least a quarter tank
of fuel, along with oil and battery power.
The vehicle’s hazard lights must be off.
If equipped, the vehicle must have an auto-
matic transmission.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
tower reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or
Wi-Fi connection.
If the Panic button has been pressed, the
vehicle must be started at least once after
alarming the system.
NOTE:
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care agents
are not authorized for Remote Vehicle Start
services. Contact the Uconnect Care Team for
assistance.
Remote Horn & Lights
Description
It is easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded
or noisy parking area by activating the horn and
lights. It may also help if you need to draw
attention to your vehicle for any reason.
If you want, you can set up push notifications
every time a command is sent to turn on the
horn and lights.
Working Vehicle Conditions
The vehicle must in PARK or at a standstill.
The vehicle must be in an open area with cell
tower reception.
Your mobile device must have a cellular or
Wi-Fi connection.
NOTE:
The Remote Horn & Lights feature is designed
to be loud and get noticed. Please keep in mind
the surroundings when using this feature. You
are responsible for compliance with local laws,
rules and ordinances in the location of your
vehicle when using Remote Horn & Lights.
Roadside Assistance Call
Description
Vehicles equipped with the SiriusXM Guardian™
system feature will contain an ASSIST button in
the vehicle. Once your SiriusXM Guardian™
services have been activated, the ASSIST
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 195
196 MULTIMEDIA
button can connect you directly to customer
care call centers. You will be directed to one of
the four services below.
Roadside Assist — If you get a flat tire or need
a tow, you’ll be connected to someone who
can help anytime.
Connected Services — Contact the SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care call center to acti-
vate your services, renew after your trial has
expired, and for in-vehicle support for your
SiriusXM Guardian™ system or help
answering any general questions
surrounding your connected services.
Uconnect Care — In-vehicle support for all
non-connected Uconnect system features,
such as radio and Bluetooth® connections.
Vehicle Care — Total support for your vehicle.
SiriusXM Guardian™ In-Vehicle Assistance
Features
With SiriusXM Guardian™, your vehicle has
onboard assistance features located on the
rearview mirror or overhead console designed
to enhance your driving experience if you should
ever need assistance or support.
How It Works
Simply press the ASSIST button in the vehicle
and you will be presented with your ASSIST
options on the touchscreen. Make your
selection by pressing the touchscreen.
Requirements
This feature is available only on vehicles sold
in the US and Canada.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
SiriusXM Guardian™ system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle must be powered in the ON/RUN or
ACC (Accessory) position with a properly func-
tioning electrical system.
Disclaimers
If Roadside Assistance Call is provided to your
vehicle, you agree to be responsible for any
additional roadside assistance service costs
that you may incur. In order to provide SiriusXM
Guardian™ services to you, we may record and
monitor your conversations with Roadside
Assistance Call, Vehicle Care, Uconnect Care, or
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care, whether
such conversations are initiated through the
SiriusXM Guardian™ services in your vehicle, or
via a landline or mobile device, and may share
information obtained through such recording
and monitoring in accordance with regulatory
requirements. You acknowledge, agree and
consent to any recording, monitoring or sharing
of information obtained through any such call
recordings.
Send & Go
Description
The Send & Go feature of the Uconnect App
allows you to search for a destination on your
mobile device, and then send the route to your
vehicle’s navigation system.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 196
MULTIMEDIA 197
Send & Go Send & Go Input
How It Works
1. Use the Uconnect App to find the
destination.
There are multiple ways to find a destina-
tion. After selecting the “Location” tab at
the bottom of the App, press the search box
to browse through one of the categories pro-
vided, or type the name or keyword in the
search box at the top of the App. You can
also select categories such as Favorites or
Contact List.
2. Select your destination from the list that
appears. Location information will then be
displayed on the map.
From this screen, you will be able to:
View the location on a map.
See the distance from your current loca-
tion.
Send the address by selecting “Send to
Vehicle” from the mobile app.
3. Send the destination to the Uconnect
Navigation in your vehicle. You can also call
the destination by pressing the Call button.
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 197
198 MULTIMEDIA
4. Confirm your destination inside your vehicle
by pressing the Send To Vehicle option on
the pop-up that appears on the radio
touchscreen.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect system and a Uconnect 4C or
Uconnect 4C NAV unit.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Connected Service Indicators
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
LTE Network Connection
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle Finder
Description
The Vehicle Finder feature of the Uconnect App
allows you to find the location of your stationary
vehicle.
You can also sound the horn and flash the lights
to make finding your vehicle even easier.
How It Works
Use the Uconnect App to find the location of
your vehicle.
1. Select the “Location” tab at the bottom of
the App. Then, touch the Vehicle icon to
find your vehicle.
2. Choose how you want to view the
information by pressing the layers button.
These options will appear:
1 — Activate Services (Connected Services)
2 — Navigation Button
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 198
MULTIMEDIA 199
Vehicle Finder Layers
3. You can also select the “Person” icon to see
your location.
4. Once the vehicle has been located, you can
map a route to your vehicle.
NOTE:
You are responsible for using remote
services that sound horn and flash lights in
accordance with the laws, rules and ordi-
nances in effect at the location of your
vehicle.
Certain SiriusXM Guardian™ services are
dependent on a properly installed and opera-
tional Uconnect system, cellular network
availability that is compatible with the device
in your vehicle, and GPS network availability.
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
available everywhere at all times, particularly
in remote or enclosed areas.
Requirements
Vehicle Finder will not work while vehicle is in
motion.
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
Vehicle ignition must have been turned on
within 14 days.
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped
Description
4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is an in-vehicle service that
connects your device to an LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network that is ready to go wherever
you are. After you've made your purchase, turn
on your device’s Wi-Fi and connect your devices.
Enables all your passengers to be simultane-
ously connected to the web.
Connect several devices at one time.
Any Wi-Fi-enabled device — such as a laptop
or any other portable-enabled media — can
connect over your private in-vehicle network.
A high-speed, secured connection lets
anyone on your private network access the
Web — great for working and relaxing.
1 — Map View
2 — Satellite View
3 — Hybrid View
4 — Show Traffic
5 — View Boundaries
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 199
200 MULTIMEDIA
Create A 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot For Use In Your
Vehicle
How It Works
The 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot feature provides
the vehicle passengers with an
internet access hotspot in the vehicle,
using the radio as an access point.
The hotspot will allow Wi-Fi-enabled in-vehicle
devices (such as a laptop or any other
portable-enabled media device) to wirelessly
connect to the internet. Uconnect offers a
complimentary 3-month trial period that
includes 1GB of total data. The trial can be
activated any time within the first year of new
vehicle ownership.
Use one of these three ways to purchase a
subscription to the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot:
1. From your vehicle’s touchscreen, select
the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot App, and press the
How To Purchase button and follow the
instructions.
2. Log onto your Owner’s Site and click the link
to the AT&T portal to get set up.
3. For existing Connected Car customers:
Press the ASSIST button to be routed to an
AT&T Customer Care agent who will assist
you.
Once the 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot is purchased, you
can change its name and the password by
selecting the Wi-Fi Hotspot App and pressing
the Setup Wi-Fi Hotspot button. You can also
view the connected devices from the app
screen by pressing the View Connected Devices
button.
NOTE:
A SiriusXM Guardian™ subscription is not
required in order to purchase and use the 4G
Wi-Fi Hotspot.
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Description
If your vehicle is stolen, the SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent may be able to locate the
stolen vehicle and work with law enforcement to
help recover it.
How It Works
1. If your vehicle is stolen, contact local law
enforcement as soon as possible. They will
work with you to file a stolen vehicle report.
2. Next, inform SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care that your vehicle has been stolen.
WARNING!
The driver should NEVER use the 4G Wi-Fi
Hotspot while driving the vehicle as doing so
may result in an accident involving serious
injury or death.
WARNING!
Always drive safely with your hands on the
steering wheel and obey all applicable laws.
You have full responsibility and assume all
risks related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the fea-
tures and applications in this vehicle when it
is safe to do so. Failure to comply may result
in an accident involving in serious injury or
death.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 200
MULTIMEDIA 201
The SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care
Agent will ask for the stolen vehicle report
number (as issued by your local law enforce-
ment). If you have downloaded the
Uconnect App, you can push the “Settings”
menu button on your device, select “Help”,
and then select “SiriusXM Guardian™ Cus-
tomer Care” to make the call.
3. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will
authenticate that you are the owner of the
vehicle and contact the law enforcement
with whom you filed the stolen vehicle report.
4. SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care will
work with your local law enforcement to
locate the vehicle. You will be contacted by
law enforcement if your vehicle is recovered.
While the investigation is ongoing, you
should also contact your insurance company
to inform it of the situation.
Requirements
Vehicle must be properly equipped with the
Uconnect system.
Vehicle must have an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G or 4G (data) network connection
compatible with your device.
Vehicle must be registered with SiriusXM
Guardian™ and have an active subscription
that includes the applicable feature.
NOTE:
Not all features of SiriusXM Guardian™ are
available everywhere at all times, particularly in
remote or enclosed areas.
Monthly Vehicle Health Report
Description
Monthly Vehicle Health Report is a Uconnect
service through which a summary of the
performance of your vehicle’s key systems will
be sent to you every month so you can stay on
top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs. This is
provided as a convenience to you and does not
substitute for regular maintenance to your
vehicle.
In order to provide the Monthly Vehicle Health
Report, the Uconnect system in your vehicle
may collect and transmit vehicle data to
SiriusXM Guardian™ and to FCA, such as your
vehicle’s health and performance, your
vehicle’s location, your utilization of the
features in your vehicle, and other data.
This data collection and transmission begins
when you enroll in SiriusXM Guardian™ and will
continue even if you cancel your SiriusXM
Guardian™ subscription unless you call
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care and tell
them to deactivate your Uconnect Services.
Please see the Uconnect Privacy Policy for more
information, located at
www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/
privacy (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
For more information on SiriusXM Guardian™
private policy, see https://siriusxmcvs.com/
privacy-policy.
Vehicle Health Alert
Description
Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it
senses a problem with one of your vehicle’s key
systems. For further information, go to your
Owner’s website.
NOTE:
Vehicle Health Alert emails require you to
register and activate services. During this
process you will be asked to provide an email
address to which the reports will be sent.
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 201
202 MULTIMEDIA
In-Vehicle Notifications — If Equipped
Description
Your vehicle will send you notifications to
remind you when services are needed, or to
alert you of other important information, such
as recall notices. When you receive a
notification through your touchscreen, press OK
to dismiss the message, or press Call Care to
speak with a SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer
Care agent.
NOTE:
Pressing OK or the X button on the pop-up
screen will dismiss or close the pop-up, and the
In-Vehicle Messages mailbox will display. In the
Mailbox, you can reopen messages or delete
messages.
Amazon Alexa® Skill — If Equipped
Enjoy the convenience of using your voice to
command your vehicle with Amazon Alexa®!
With Amazon Alexa®, you can connect to your
vehicle and remotely access key services and
features.
If your vehicle is equipped with Uconnect
Navigation, you can send a destination directly
to your vehicle using Alexa®.
If you need assistance, you can always ask
Alexa® for help, or complete a list of commands
by saying: “Alexa®, ask <brand name> for help
with my car.”
Here are a few of the many questions you can
ask Alexa®:
“Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> to start my
<vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.”
“Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my
<vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.”
“Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> to send 1000
Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan to my
<vehicle name>.”
“Alexa®, ask <vehicle brand> what is the fuel
level of my <vehicle name>.”
An active subscription to SiriusXM Guardian™ is
required. To use Amazon Alexa®, first, register
for SiriusXM Guardian™ Ú page 187.
Next, link the Uconnect system on your vehicle
to Amazon Alexa®:
1. Download the Amazon Alexa® app on your
mobile device (Apple® or Android™).
2. Once in the app, tap MENU and go to
SKILLS.
3. Search for <vehicle brand> skill, then tap
Enable.
4. Tap SAVE SETTINGS when prompted.
5. Link the vehicle brand name to the <vehicle
brand> Skill by tapping LINK ACCOUNT.
6. Log in using your Owner Account
credentials. This will be the same user
name and password you used when
registering for SiriusXM Guardian™
Connected Services.
7. CONFIRM account to return to the <vehicle
brand> Skill.
You can now begin using the <vehicle brand>
Skill on Alexa®!
Google Assistant — If Equipped
With the Google Assistant, you can get help and
keep tabs on your car. The Assistant is available
across your devices, including Android™
phones, iPhone® devices, or voice-activated
speakers, like Google Home. If you need
assistance, ask Google for help, or for a
complete list of commands by saying: “Hey
Google, ask <brand name> for help with my
car.”
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 202
MULTIMEDIA 203
Here are a few examples of commands:
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to start my
<vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.”
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to lock my
<vehicle name> with PIN XXXX.”
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> to send
1000 Chrysler Drive, Auburn Hills, Michigan
to my <vehicle name>.”
“Hey Google, ask <vehicle brand> what is the
fuel level of my <vehicle name>.”
To link your Uconnect account with Google
Assistant, follow these steps:
1. Download and install the Google Assistant
app on your smart phone from the App
Store® or Google Play.
2. After installation, log in to the Google
Assistant app with your Gmail ID. Verify your
account by pressing the icon in the upper
right hand corner.
3. Press the Discover button in the bottom left
corner of the screen. Enter the vehicle
brand name.
4. A prompt will appear to link your Uconnect
account. Press “Link Uconnect to Google”.
5. Press “Sign In” and enter the email address
and password you created when you
activated Uconnect services.
6. Lastly, press “Authorize” to complete the
linking process.
Now, you can ask Google Assistant to help you:
Remotely start the engine, or cancel a
remote start
Send a destination to their vehicle’s built-in
Uconnect Navigation system
Monitor vehicle vitals, such as tire press, fuel
level and oil life
And more!
Family Drive Alerts — If Equipped
Description
Family Drive Alerts help promote safer driving
and give you peace of mind when your loved
ones are out on the road. You can set boundary
limits, monitor driving speed, and pinpoint your
vehicle’s location any time, any place. Use the
Uconnect app to set alerts:
Boundary Alert
Receive a notification the moment your
vehicle is driven either out of or into a
geographic boundary that you set.
Curfew Alert
Receive a notification when your car is being
driven outside of the curfew time.
Speed Alert
Receive a notification whenever your car
exceeds a speed limit you set.
Valet Alert
Receive a notification if and when your
vehicle is driven outside a quarter-mile
radius of a valet drop-off zone.
SmartWatch Integration — If Equipped
Description
SmartWatch Integration puts the Uconnect app
right on your Apple® Watch or Android™ Wear.
To get started, follow these steps:
1. Download the Uconnect app from the App
Store® or Google Play.
2. Log onto the app from your smartphone
using the username and password you
created when you first set up your account.
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 203
204 MULTIMEDIA
3. Make sure your watch and smartphone are
connected through Bluetooth®.
4. The Uconnect app should appear on your
SmartWatch.
Once the app is downloaded on your
SmartWatch, you can enjoy these features:
Lock or unlock your vehicle by tapping the
remote lock button in the app and entering
your security PIN.
Remote start or stop your vehicle.
View important vehicle stats, such as fuel
level, vehicle location, tire pressure warning,
and more.
For help, refer to the Uconnect YouTube
channel for SmartWatch Integration.
Uconnect Market
With Uconnect Market, you can enjoy seamless
and secure transactions from the comfort of
your vehicle. Make restaurant reservations,
place food orders, or pay for other goods and
services right from the vehicle’s touchscreen.
To get started with Uconnect Market on the
touchscreen:
1. Press the Market button in the Uconnect
App drawer.
2. Press “Get Started”.
3. Press “Text Me A Link” and enter your
phone number to receive a text message
with instructions on how to set up Uconnect
Market.
NOTE:
If the text message does not come through,
press the Resend Text button. It might take a
minute to receive the text message.
4. Once you receive the text message, press
the link provided. You will be directed to a
sign-in screen. Enter your email and
password. You will then be able to use
Uconnect Market.
5. If you do not have an account, press
“Register Now” to create one.
6. Accept the Uconnect market Terms of
Service.
7. Enter your credit card information, and
press “Next”.
8. Enter your phone number, and press “Next”.
9. The system will verify the phone number.
Once verified, Uconnect Market will be
available to use. Press the OK button.
From the online portal, https://
market.mopar.com/home, you can link loyalty
accounts and start receiving benefits from them
while still using Uconnect Market and view your
purchase history.
MANAGE MY SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN ™
A
CCOUNT
To manage your SiriusXM Guardian™ account,
press the ASSIST button in your vehicle, or call
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care.
NOTE:
It is recommended, when selling your vehicle, or
turning in your lease, to call SiriusXM
Guardian™ Care to remove your personal data.
CONNECTED SERVICES FAQS
For additional information about SiriusXM
Guardian™, active subscribers can push the
ASSIST button and then select SiriusXM
Guardian™ Call on your in-vehicle touchscreen
to contact SiriusXM Guardian™. Your call will be
directed to a SiriusXM Guardian™ agent or held
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 204
MULTIMEDIA 205
in a queue until an agent is available. If you do
not have an active subscription, push the
ASSIST button and click the Activate button on
the touchscreen to activate services.
CONNECTED SERVICES SOS FAQS
1.
What happens if I accidentally push the SOS
Call button on the mirror?
You have 10
seconds after pushing the SOS Call button
to cancel the call. To cancel the call, either
push the SOS Call button again, or press
the Cancel button on the in-vehicle
touchscreen.
2. What type of information is sent when I use
the SOS Call button from my vehicle?
Certain vehicle information, such as make
and model, is transmitted along with the
last known GPS location.
3. When could I use the SOS Call button? You
can use the SOS Call button to make a call
if you or someone else needs emergency
assistance.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE DOOR
L
OCK/UNLOCK FAQS
1.
How long does it take to unlock or lock the
door?
Depending on various conditions, it
can take up to three minutes or more for
the request to get to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect
App? Your key fob will lock/unlock the door
more quickly, however its range is limited
and your Uconnect App comes in handy for
these and other situations.
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my device?
People sometimes lose their mobile
devices, which is why security measures
have been engineered into the Uconnect
App. Asking for your username, password
and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN are
required for the activation of Remote
services through your mobile device. It is
your responsibility to protect your
passwords and PINs.
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the
Uconnect App? The Uconnect App is
compatible with most devices with the
Apple® and Android™ operating systems.
The capabilities of these devices allow us to
remotely command your vehicle. Other
operating systems may be supported in the
future.
5. Why is the Uconnect App running slow? The
Uconnect App relies on a mobile network
connection from your device to send
commands to your vehicle which must have
an operable LTE (voice/data) or 3G, 4G
(data), or 5G (data) network connection. If
either your device or your vehicle is in an
area with below average coverage, it may
take longer to log in and send commands.
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 205
206 MULTIMEDIA
CONNECTED SERVICES ROADSIDE
A
SSISTANCE FAQS
1.
What is the phone number for roadside
assistance call? The phone number is:
US: 1-800-521-2779
Canada: 1-800-363-4869
2. If I am subscribed to SiriusXM Guardian™,
does it cover towing or other expenses
incurred by using roadside assistance? No,
however your new vehicle may include
Roadside Assistance Call services.
CONNECTED SERVICES SEND & GO
FAQ
S
1.
How long does it take to send the route and
destination to my vehicle?
Depending on
various conditions, it can take up to three
minutes for the request to get through to
your vehicle.
2. Can I cancel a route I sent to my vehicle?
Yes, once you enter your vehicle, and start
the engine, the pop-up message stating that
you have a new route will appear. There is
an exit button on the pop-up that will cancel
the route if selected.
3. Can I select a different route than the most
recent one I sent to my vehicle? Yes, once
you enter the vehicle, and start the engine,
the pop-up message offers a “Locations”
option. Once “Locations” is selected, you
can choose from a list of recently sent
destinations.
CONNECTED SERVICES VEHICLE FINDER
FAQ
S
1.
Can someone else locate my vehicle?
Your
vehicle may be located by anyone who has
your PIN and access to your account. It is
your responsibility to guard your PIN
accordingly. See the Uconnect and
SiriusXM Guardian™ terms of service for
more information.
2. How long does it take to sound my horn and
flash the lights? Depending on various
conditions, it can take three minutes or
more for the request to get through to your
vehicle.
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I
turn them on? If you are close enough to the
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off
the horn and lights by pressing the red
Panic button.
CONNECTED SERVICES STOLEN VEHICLE
A
SSISTANCE FAQS
1.
Can someone locate my vehicle?
To
enhance your privacy, and the privacy of
others using your vehicle, a stolen vehicle
police report is required for you to activate
this service. You must involve local law
enforcement to have SiriusXM Guardian™
locate your vehicle. We may also locate the
vehicle for other law enforcement or
government agencies, subject to a valid
court order telling SiriusXM Guardian™ to
do so. We will also provide the service for
FCA entities to locate a vehicle that you
have purchased through them.
2. How will I know if my vehicle is recovered?
After you provide the SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care agent with the stolen vehicle
report, the agent will work together with law
enforcement to try to locate your vehicle. If
your vehicle is recovered, you will be
contacted by law enforcement.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 206
MULTIMEDIA 207
3. Can SiriusXM Guardian™ lower my
insurance rates? Some insurance providers
offer lower rates on vehicles equipped with
systems that can deter auto theft. When
shopping for insurance, be sure to inform
the insurance provider of your SiriusXM
Guardian™ services subscription to find out
if the insurance provider can offer you a
lower rate.
NOTE:
Neither FCA nor SiriusXM® are insurance
companies, and SiriusXM Guardian™ is not an
insurance product. You are responsible for
obtaining insurance coverage for your vehicle
and yourself.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE VEHICLE
S
TART FAQS
1.
How long does it take to remotely start my
vehicle?
Depending on various conditions,
it can take three minutes or more for the
request to get through to your vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect
App? Your key fob will remote start your
vehicle more quickly. However its range is
limited. For example, when you are leaving
the stadium after the game, you can use the
Uconnect App to remote start your vehicle
and have the inside of your vehicle
comfortable by the time you get to it.
3. Will my vehicle be safe if I lose my wireless
device? People sometimes lose their
wireless devices, which is why security
measures have been engineered into the
Uconnect App. Asking for your username,
password and SiriusXM Guardian™ Security
PIN help to ensure that nobody can start
your vehicle if they happen to find your
device.
4. Can someone drive off with my vehicle
using the App? No. Driving your vehicle still
requires the keys to be in the vehicle. The
Remote Start feature simply starts the
engine to warm up or cool down the interior
before you arrive.
5. Can I stop a vehicle that is being driven with
the cancel Remote Vehicle Start command?
No. If the vehicle is in motion, the cancel
Remote Vehicle Start button will not stop
the vehicle.
6. Why can’t all mobile devices use the
Uconnect App? The Uconnect App has been
designed to work on most devices with the
Apple® and Android™ operating systems.
The capabilities of these devices allow us to
remotely command your vehicle. Other
operating systems may be supported in the
future.
CONNECTED SERVICES REMOTE HORN
& L
IGHTS FAQS
1.
How long does it take to sound my horn and
flash the lights?
Depending on various
conditions, it can take three minutes or
more for the request to get through to your
vehicle.
2. Which is faster, my key fob or the Uconnect
App? Your key fob will sound the horn and
flash the lights quicker; however its range is
limited.
3. How do I turn off the horn and lights after I
turn them on? If you are close enough to the
vehicle, you can use the key fob to turn off
the horn and lights by pressing the red Panic
button. Otherwise, Remote Horn & Lights will
continue for a maximum of three minutes.
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 207
208 MULTIMEDIA
4. Why can’t all mobile devices use the
Uconnect App? The Uconnect App has been
designed to work on most devices with the
Apple® and Android™ operating systems.
The capabilities of these devices allow us to
remotely command your vehicle. Other
operating systems may be supported in the
future.
CONNECTED SERVICES ACCOUNT FAQS
1.
How do I register for my SiriusXM
Guardian™ account? There are three ways
that you can register your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Account:
Push the Assist button. A call will be
placed to an agent who can assist in
registering your new account.
Press the Activate Services icon in the
Apps menu. Select the button to speak
with an agent, who can assist in regis-
tering your new account.
Press the Activate Services icon in the
Apps menu. Enter your email on the
touchscreen and then follow the prompts
from the provided email. You will receive
an email with an activation link that will
be good for 72 hours. Once you click the
activation link, you will be prompted to fill
out your information and accept Terms
and Conditions. Then, you will be directed
to the SiriusXM Guardian™ home page to
complete your profile and demo the
remote services.
2. Why do I need an email address? Without
an email address, customers cannot
register for SiriusXM Guardian™. Customers
need to register so they can subscribe to
receive additional services and create a
SiriusXM Guardian™ Security PIN for
remote command requests.
3. How do I create a SiriusXM Guardian™
security PIN? Set up your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN during the
registration process. The SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN will be required to
authenticate you when accessing your
account via SiriusXM Guardian™ Call or
performing any remote services, such as
Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Remote Horn &
Lights, or Remote Vehicle Start.
4. What if I forgot my SiriusXM Guardian™
security PIN? If you’ve already activated
services and forgot your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN, you can reset the
PIN by selecting Edit Profile on your Owner’s
Site.
5. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™
payment account address? Your SiriusXM
Guardian™ Payment Account address can
be updated online, or by calling SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care from ASSIST in
your vehicle. To update online: login to your
Owner’s Site, and select Edit Profile >
SiriusXM Guardian™ Payment Account.
6. How do I update my SiriusXM Guardian™
profile? Your name, home address, phone
number, email address and SiriusXM
Guardian™ Security PIN can be updated
online on your Owner’s Site. Log in to your
Owner’s Site then select Edit Profile to edit
your personal information. Make your edits
and click Save.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 208
MULTIMEDIA 209
7. Can I try features or packages before I buy
them? Your new vehicle purchase may have
come with an included trial period for
certain Apps and services.
8. Can I access every App and service while
driving? No, some applications and services
are not available while driving. For your own
safety, it is not possible to use some of the
touchscreen features while the vehicle is in
motion (e.g. key pad).
9. What happens when my subscription
comes up for renewal? If you have added a
credit card to your account information,
your subscription will be automatically
renewed for a term length in accordance
with the service plan that you have selected
at the then current subscription rate and on
every renewal date thereafter, unless you
cancel your subscription by calling SiriusXM
Guardian™ Care. If you have not added a
credit card to your account, SiriusXM
Guardian™ will send you an email or letter
in advance of your expiration date to remind
you that your subscription is ending soon.
10. How do I manage my SiriusXM Guardian™
notification preferences? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care, or go to your
Owner’s Site and then update your
preferences on the SiriusXM Guardian™
customer web portal.
11. How do I purchase a subscription? Contact
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care by
pushing the ASSIST button on your rearview
mirror.
12. How do I update my credit card
information? Login to your Owner’s Site,
and select Edit Profile, then select SiriusXM
Guardian™ Payment Account.
13. How do I find out how much longer I have on
my subscription? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care.
You also can visit your Owner’s Site and
choose a subscription to view its expiration
date. When your subscription is about to ex-
pire, you will receive an email or letter of no-
tification.
14. Can I get a refund if I have not used the
entire subscription? Prorated refunds are
provided from the date of cancellation for
annual plans or longer. Please see the
Uconnect and SiriusXM Guardian™ Terms &
Conditions for refunds related to billing
plans of other lengths and other circum-
stances.
15. Can I cancel a subscription before it
expires? Yes. If you have an annual
subscription, your subscription will be
canceled the day you cancel. If you have a
monthly subscription, your subscription will
be canceled on the last day of the month in
which you choose to cancel.
16. What should I do if I want to sell my vehicle?
Before your vehicle is sold to a new owner,
you’ll want to remove your account
information. This process removes all
personal information, returns the Uconnect
system to its original factory settings,
removes all SiriusXM Guardian™ services
and account information. To remove your
account information from the Uconnect
system, contact SiriusXM Guardian™
Customer Care.
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 209
210 MULTIMEDIA
17. What if I forgot to remove my account
information before I returned my lease
vehicle or sold it? Contact SiriusXM
Guardian™ Customer Care.
18. What will happen if an operable LTE (voice/
data), 4G (data), or 5G (data) network
connection compatible with my device is
temporarily unavailable? The SOS Call and
ASSIST buttons will NOT function if you are
not connected to an operable LTE (voice/
data) or 3G, 4G (data), 5G (data) network.
Services that required your smartphone
only direct calls to Roadside Assistance Call
may be functioning if you have an operable
network.
DATA COLLECTION & PRIVACY
The Uconnect system collects and transmits
data which may include information about your
vehicle, your vehicle’s health and performance,
your vehicle’s location, your utilization of the
features in your vehicle, and other data. The
collection, use and sharing of this information is
required to provide the SiriusXM Guardian™
services and is further described by the
Uconnect Privacy Policy, which can be found at
www.driveuconnect.com/connectedservices/
privacy (US Residents) or
www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
This information may be collected by SiriusXM®
Connected Vehicle Services Inc. and shared
with FCA US LLC for the purposes stated in the
Uconnect Privacy Policy. Vehicle health and
diagnostic information including location data
may be used by Uconnect to provide a Vehicle
Health Report to you.
Even if you cancel your SiriusXM Guardian™
subscription, this vehicle diagnostic health
information, including location data, may still be
transmitted from your vehicle and you may still
have a Vehicle Health Report sent to you.
Use of any of the Uconnect Services including
SiriusXM Guardian™ is deemed to be your
consent to the collection, use and disclosure of
this information in accordance with the
Uconnect Privacy Policy. If you do not want this
information to be collected, used, or shared,
you must cancel your Uconnect services in their
entirety by contacting us as referenced in the
Uconnect Privacy Policy.
RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE PHONES
Under certain conditions, the mobile phone
being on in your vehicle can cause erratic or
noisy performance from your radio. This
condition may be lessened or eliminated by
relocating the mobile phone antenna. This
condition is not harmful to the radio. If your
radio performance does not satisfactorily
“clear” by the repositioning of the antenna, it is
recommended that the radio volume be turned
down or off during mobile phone operation
when not using Uconnect (if equipped).
REGULATORY AND SAFETY
I
NFORMATION
USA/CANADA
Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation
The radiated output power of the internal
wireless radio is far below the FCC and IC radio
frequency exposure limits. Nevertheless, the
wireless radio will be used in such a manner
that the radio is 8 inches (20 cm) or further
from the human body.
The internal wireless radio operates within
guidelines found in radio frequency safety
standards and recommendations, which reflect
the consensus of the scientific community.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 210
MULTIMEDIA 211
The radio manufacturer believes the internal
wireless radio is safe for use by consumers. The
level of energy emitted is far less than the
electromagnetic energy emitted by wireless
devices such as mobile phones. However, the
use of wireless radios may be restricted in some
situations or environments, such as aboard
airplanes. If you are unsure of restrictions, you
are encouraged to ask for authorization before
turning on the wireless radio Ú page 360.
NOTE:
This equipment has been tested and found to
comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reason-
able protection against harmful interference
in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and, if not installed and
used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio
communications. However, there is no guar-
antee that interference will not occur in a
particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful inter-
ference to radio or television reception,
which can be determined by turning the
equipment off and on, the user is encour-
aged to try to correct the interference by one
or more of the following measures:
a. Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
b. Consult an authorized dealer or an expe-
rienced radio technician for help.
5
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 211
212
(Continued)
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability
and brake performance under most braking
conditions. The system automatically prevents
wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during
braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure
that the ABS is working properly each time the
vehicle is started and driven. During this
self-check, you may hear a slight clicking sound
as well as some related motor noises.
The ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels are
beginning to lock. Road conditions such as ice,
snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops may increase the
likelihood of ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following normal
characteristics when ABS activates:
ABS motor noise or clicking sounds (you may
continue to hear for a short time after the
stop)
Brake pedal pulsations
A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of
the stop
The ABS is designed to function with the
Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) tires.
Modification may result in degraded ABS
performance.
WARNING!
The ABS contains sophisticated electronic
equipment that may be susceptible to inter-
ference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment.
This interference can cause possible loss of
anti-lock braking capability. Installation of
such equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may lead
to a collision. Pumping makes the stopping
distance longer. Just press firmly on your
brake pedal when you need to slow down or
stop.
The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of
physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can
it increase braking or steering efficiency
beyond that afforded by the condition of the
vehicle brakes and tires or the traction
afforded.
The ABS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or
dangerous manner that could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 212
SAFETY 213
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) Warning
Light
The yellow ABS Warning Light will turn on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode and
may stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS Warning Light remains on or comes
on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock
portion of the brake system is not functioning
and that service is required. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally if the ABS Warning Light is on.
If the ABS Warning Light is on, the brake system
should be serviced as soon as possible to
restore the benefits of Anti-lock Brakes. If the
ABS Warning Light does not come on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode, have
the light repaired as soon as possible.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL (EBC)
S
YSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control (EBC) system. This
system includes Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),
Brake Assist System (BAS), Electronic Brake
Force Distribution (EBD), Electronic Roll
Mitigation (ERM), Electronic Stability Control
(ESC), Hill Start Assist (HSA), and Traction
Control System (TCS). These systems work
together to enhance both vehicle stability and
control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST), Hill Descent
Control (HDC), Rain Brake Support (RBS), Ready
Alert Braking (RAB), and Trailer Sway Control
(TSC).
Brake Assist System (BAS)
BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emergency
braking situation by sensing the rate and
amount of brake application and then applies
optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results
in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the
stopping sequence (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
Brake System Warning Light
The red Brake System Warning Light will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN
mode and may stay on for as long as four
seconds.
If the Brake System Warning Light remains on or
comes on while driving, it indicates that the
brake system is not functioning properly and
that immediate service is required. If the Brake
System Warning Light does not come on when
the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN mode,
have the light repaired as soon as possible.
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot pre-
vent the natural laws of physics from acting
on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction
afforded by prevailing road conditions. BAS
cannot prevent collisions, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driv-
ing on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle
must never be exploited in a reckless or dan-
gerous manner, which could jeopardize the
user's safety or the safety of others.
6
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 213
214 SAFETY
Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)
DST is a feature of the Electronic Stability
Control (ESC) and Electric Power Steering (EPS)
modules that provides torque at the steering
wheel for certain driving conditions in which the
ESC module is detecting vehicle instability. The
torque that the steering wheel receives is only
meant to help the driver realize optimal steering
behavior in order to reach/maintain vehicle
stability. The only notification the driver receives
that the feature is active is the torque applied to
the steering wheel.
NOTE:
The DST feature is only meant to help the driver
realize the correct course of action through
small torques on the steering wheel, which
means the effectiveness of the DST feature is
highly dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and
overall reaction to the applied torque. It is very
important to realize that this feature will not
steer the vehicle, meaning the driver is still
responsible for steering the vehicle.
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
EBD manages the distribution of the braking
torque between the front and rear axles by
limiting braking pressure to the rear axle. This is
done to prevent overslip of the rear wheels to
avoid vehicle instability, and to prevent the rear
axle from entering ABS before the front axle.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
ERM anticipates the potential for wheel lift by
monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and
the speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines
that the rate of change of the steering wheel
angle and vehicle’s speed are sufficient to
potentially cause wheel lift, it then applies the
appropriate brake and may also reduce engine
power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will
occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of
wheel lift occurring during severe or evasive
driving maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift
due to other factors, such as road conditions,
leaving the roadway, or striking objects or other
vehicles.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
ESC enhances directional control and stability
of the vehicle under various driving conditions.
ESC corrects for oversteering or understeering
of the vehicle by applying the brake of the
appropriate wheel(s) to counteract the above
conditions. Engine power may also be reduced
to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning more
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
tion.
Understeer — when the vehicle is turning less
than appropriate for the steering wheel posi-
tion.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road
conditions and driving conditions, influence
the chance that wheel lift or rollover may
occur. ERM cannot prevent all wheel lift or roll
overs, especially those that involve leaving
the roadway or striking objects or other vehi-
cles. The capabilities of an ERM-equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless
or dangerous manner which could jeopardize
the user's safety or the safety of others.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 214
SAFETY 215
(Continued)
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting the
oversteer or understeer condition.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
located in the instrument cluster will start to
flash as soon as the ESC system becomes
active. The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light also flashes when the TCS is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
WARNING!
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot
prevent accidents resulting from loss of
vehicle control due to inappropriate driver
input for the conditions. Only a safe, atten-
tive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-
dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-
less or dangerous manner which could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of
others.
Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly
maintain your vehicle, may change the
handling characteristics of your vehicle,
and may negatively affect the performance
of the ESC system. Changes to the steering
system, suspension, braking system, tire
type and size or wheel size may adversely
affect ESC performance. Improperly
inflated and unevenly worn tires may also
degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle
modification or poor vehicle maintenance
that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC
system can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 215
216 SAFETY
(Continued)
ESC Operating Modes
Depending upon model and mode of operation,
the ESC system may have multiple operating
modes.
ESC OFF Button
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the ESC.
Whenever the vehicle is started, the ESC system
will be in this mode. This mode should be used
for most driving conditions. Alternate ESC
modes should only be used for specific reasons
as noted in the following paragraphs.
Partial Off
This mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for more
wheel spin than normally allowed.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
push the ESC OFF button and the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will illuminate. To turn the ESC
on again, momentarily push the ESC OFF button
and the ESC OFF Indicator Light will turn off.
NOTE:
When driving with snow chains, or when starting
off in deep snow, sand, or gravel, it may be
desirable to allow more wheel spin. This can be
accomplished by momentarily pushing the ESC
OFF button to enter “Partial Off” mode. Once the
situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is over-
come, turn ESC back on by momentarily
pushing the ESC OFF button. This may be done
while the vehicle is in motion.
Full Off (Four-Wheel Drive Models Only)
This mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use when ESC stability features could
inhibit vehicle maneuverability due to trail
conditions. This mode is entered by pushing
and holding the ESC OFF button for five seconds
when the vehicle is stopped and the engine is
running. After five seconds, the ESC OFF
Indicator Light will illuminate and the “ESC OFF”
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display.
In this mode, ESC and TCS, except for the
“limited slip” feature described in the TCS
section, are turned off until the vehicle reaches
a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At 40 mph
(64 km/h), the system returns to “Partial Off”
mode, as described above. TCS remains off.
When the vehicle speed drops below 30 mph
(48 km/h), the ESC system shuts off. ESC is
deactivated at low vehicle speeds so that it will
WARNING!
When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS func-
tionality of ESC, except for the limited slip
feature described in the TCS section, has
been disabled and the ESC OFF Indicator
Light will be illuminated. When in “Partial
Off” mode, the engine power reduction
feature of TCS is disabled, and the
enhanced vehicle stability offered by the
ESC system is reduced.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 216
SAFETY 217
not interfere with off-road driving. However, ESC
function returns to provide the stability feature
at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h). The ESC
OFF Indicator Light will always be illuminated
when ESC is off.
To turn ESC on again, momentarily push the
ESC OFF button. This will restore the “ESC On”
mode of operation.
NOTE:
The “ESC OFF” message will display and an
audible chime will sound when the gear selector
is placed into the PARK position from any other
position, and then moved out of the PARK posi-
tion. This will occur even if the message was
previously cleared.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition
is placed in the ON mode. It should go
out with the engine running. If the ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light comes
on continuously with the engine running, a
malfunction has been detected in the ESC
system. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven
several miles (km) at speeds greater than
30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as
soon as possible to have the problem
diagnosed and corrected.
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction
and the ESC system becomes active. The ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light also
flashes when Traction Control System (TCS) is
active. If the ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light begins to flash during
acceleration, ease up on the accelerator and
apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure to
adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions.
The ESC OFF Indicator Light indicates
the customer has elected to have the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) in a
reduced mode.
NOTE:
The ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light and the ESC OFF Indicator Light come
on momentarily each time the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN position.
Each time the ignition is placed in the ON/
RUN position, the ESC system will be on even
if it was turned off previously.
The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the
sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive
following the maneuver that caused the ESC
activation.
Emergency Stop Signal (ESS) — If
Equipped
ESS will activate the hazard lights at a faster
than normal speed when heavy brake pressure
is applied. ESS will only activate when the speed
is above 31 mph (50 km/h). The ESS operates
independently of other lamps, and will turn on
and off automatically. This indicates to others
that the vehicle is stopping quickly.
WARNING!
In the "Full Off" mode, the engine torque
reduction and stability features are disabled.
In an emergency evasive maneuver, the ESC
system will not engage to assist in maintain-
ing stability. “ESC Off” mode is intended for
off-highway or off-road use only.
6
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 217
218 SAFETY
NOTE:
A warning light will illuminate within the
instrument cluster to inform the driver that
the ESS feature has been activated.
When towing a trailer, ESS will also activate
the rear indicator lights of the trailer.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
Hill Descent Control (Trailhawk)
Hill Descent Control (HDC) is intended for low
speed off-road driving while in 4WD Low. HDC
maintains vehicle speed while descending hills
during various driving situations. HDC controls
vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver
is actively overriding with brake or throttle
application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but
the following conditions must also be met to
enable HDC:
The driveline is in 4WD Low.
The vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).
The Electric Park Brake (EPB) is released.
The driver’s door is closed.
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled, it will activate
automatically if driven down a grade of
sufficient magnitude (greater than
approximately 8%). The set speed for HDC is
selectable by the driver and can be adjusted
within the thresholds by using throttle or brake
application.
Driver Override:
The driver may override HDC activation speed
with throttle or brake application at any time.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available if
any of the following conditions occur:
Driver overrides HDC set speed with a speed
exceeding 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains
below 25 mph (40 km/h).
Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient
magnitude (less than approximately 8%), is
on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.
Vehicle is shifted to PARK.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 218
SAFETY 219
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of
the following conditions occur:
The driver pushes the HDC switch.
The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low.
The driver’s door opens.
The vehicle is driven greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
Feedback To The Driver:
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the
HDC switch has an LED, which offer feedback to
the driver about the state HDC is in.
The cluster icon and switch lamp will illumi-
nate and remain solid when HDC is enabled
or activated. This is the normal operating
condition for HDC.
The switch lamp will flash for several seconds
then extinguish when the driver pushes the
HDC switch when enable conditions have not
been met.
The Hill Descent switch is located within the
Selec-Terrain knob in the upper right position.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
HSA is designed to mitigate roll back from a
complete stop while on an incline. If the driver
releases the brake while stopped on an incline,
HSA will continue to hold the brake pressure for
a short period. If the driver does not apply the
throttle before this time expires, the system will
release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll
down the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in order
for HSA to activate:
The feature must be enabled.
The vehicle must be stopped.
The parking brake must be off.
The driver door must be closed.
The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
The gear selection must match vehicle uphill
direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE gear).
HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all
forward gears. The system will not activate if
the transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descending
hills. The driver must remain attentive to the
driving conditions and is responsible for
maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill Start
Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight rolling
may occur, such as on minor hills or with a
loaded vehicle, or while pulling a trailer. HSA
is not a substitute for active driving involve-
ment. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
be attentive to distance to other vehicles,
people, and objects, and most importantly
brake operation to ensure safe operation of
the vehicle under all road conditions. Your
complete attention is always required while
driving to maintain safe control of your vehi-
cle. Failure to follow these warnings can
result in a collision or serious personal injury.
6
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 219
220 SAFETY
(Continued)
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off. To
change the current setting, proceed as follows:
If disabling HSA using Uconnect settings see
Ú page 68.
Towing With HSA
Hill Start Assist (HSA) will also provide
assistance to mitigate roll back while towing a
trailer.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
RBS may improve braking performance in wet
conditions. It will periodically apply a small
amount of brake pressure to remove any water
buildup on the front brake rotors. It functions
when the windshield wipers are in LO or HI
speed. When Rain Brake Support is active,
there is no notification to the driver and no
driver interaction is required.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
RAB may reduce the time required to reach full
braking during emergency braking situations. It
anticipates when an emergency braking
situation may occur by monitoring how fast the
throttle is released by the driver. The Electronic
Brake Controller (EBC) system will prepare the
brake system for a panic stop.
Traction Control System (TCS)
The TCS monitors the amount of wheel spin for
each of the driven wheels. If wheel spin is
detected, the TCS may apply brake pressure to
the spinning wheel(s) and/or reduce vehicle
power to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited
Differential (BLD), functions similarly to a
limited slip differential and controls the wheel
spin across a driven axle. If one wheel on a
driven axle is spinning faster than the other, the
system will apply the brake of the spinning
wheel. This will allow more vehicle torque to be
applied to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD
may remain enabled even if TCS and ESC are in
reduced modes.
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an
excessively swaying trailer and will take the
appropriate actions to attempt to stop the sway.
TSC will become active automatically once an
excessively swaying trailer is recognized.
WARNING!
If you use a trailer brake controller with your
trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated
and deactivated with the brake switch. If
so, there may not be enough brake pres-
sure to hold both the vehicle and the trailer
on a hill when the brake pedal is released.
In order to avoid rolling down an incline
while resuming acceleration, manually acti-
vate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle
brake pressure prior to releasing the brake
pedal.
HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting your
vehicle. Also, be certain to place the trans-
mission in PARK.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in a collision or serious personal injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 220
SAFETY 221
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda-
tions Ú page 128.
When TSC is functioning, the ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light will flash, the engine
power may be reduced and you may feel the
brakes being applied to individual wheels to
attempt to stop the trailer from swaying. TSC is
disabled when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” or “Full Off” modes.
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS
BLIND SPOT MONITORING (BSM) — I F
E
QUIPPED
The BSM system uses two radar sensors,
located inside the rear fascia/bumper, to detect
highway licensable vehicles (automobiles,
trucks, motorcycles, etc.) that enter the blind
spot zones from the rear/front/side of the
vehicle.
Rear Detection Zones
When the vehicle is started, the BSM Warning
Light will momentarily illuminate in both outside
rearview mirrors to let the driver know that the
system is operational. The BSM system sensors
operate when the vehicle is in any forward gear
or REVERSE (R) and enters standby mode when
the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approximately
one lane width, 12 ft (3.8 m), on both sides of
the vehicle. The zone length starts at the
outside mirror and extends approximately 10 ft
(3 m) beyond the rear fascia/bumper of the
vehicle. The BSM system monitors the
detection zones on both sides of the vehicle
when the vehicle speed reaches approximately
6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the
driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT
change if your vehicle is towing a trailer.
Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane is
clear for both your vehicle and trailer before
making a lane change. If the trailer or other
object (i.e., bicycle, sports equipment)
extends beyond the side of your vehicle, this
may result in the BSM warning light
remaining illuminated the entire time the
vehicle is in a forward gear. It may be neces-
sary to deactivate the BSM system manually
to avoid misdetection Ú page 139.
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system may
experience dropouts (blinking on and off) of
the side mirror Warning Indicator lamps
when a motorcycle or any small object
remains at the side of the vehicle for
extended periods of time (more than a couple
of seconds).
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle
down, stop at the nearest safe location, and
adjust the trailer load to eliminate trailer
sway.
6
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 221
222 SAFETY
The area on the rear fascia/bumper where the
radar sensors are located must remain free of
snow, ice, and dirt/road contamination so that
the BSM system can function properly. Do not
block the area of the rear fascia/bumper where
the radar sensors are located with foreign
objects (bumper stickers, bicycle racks, etc.)
Radar Sensor Location (Driver Side Shown)
The BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. If the turn signal is then
activated, and it corresponds to an alert present
on that side of the vehicle, an audible chime will
also be sounded. Whenever a turn signal and
detected object are present on the same side at
the same time, both the visual and audio alerts
will be issued. In addition to the audible alert
the radio (if on) will also be muted.
Warning Light Location
The BSM system monitors the detection zone
from three different entry points (side, rear,
front) while driving to see if an alert is
necessary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes
from either side of the vehicle.
Side Monitoring
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your vehicle
on either side and enter the rear detection zone
with a relative speed of less than 30 mph
(48 km/h).
Rear Monitoring
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 222
SAFETY 223
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a relative
speed less than 10 mph (16 km/h) and the
vehicle remains in the blind spot for
approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than
10 mph (16 km/h), the warning light will not
illuminate.
Overtaking/Approaching
Overtaking/Passing
The BSM system is designed not to issue an
alert on stationary objects such as guardrails,
posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However,
occasionally the system may alert on such
objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects that
are traveling in the opposite direction of the
vehicle in adjacent lanes Ú page 360.
NOTE:
The BSM system may experience dropouts
(blinking on and off) in the side mirror LED icons
while a motorcycle, or any small target, remains
at the vehicle’s B-pillar for an extended period
of time (longer than a couple of seconds).
Opposing Traffic
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
RCP is intended to aid the driver when backing
out of parking spaces where their vision of
oncoming vehicles may be blocked. Proceed
slowly and cautiously out of the parking space
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an
aid to help detect objects in the blind spot
zones. The BSM system is not designed to
detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals.
Even if your vehicle is equipped with the BSM
system, always check your vehicle’s mirrors,
glance over your shoulder, and use your turn
signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
6
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 223
224 SAFETY
until the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The
RCP system will then have a clear view of the
cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is
detected, alert the driver.
RCP Detection Zones
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on both
sides of the vehicle, for objects that are moving
toward the side of the vehicle with a minimum
speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h), to
objects moving a maximum of approximately
20 mph (32 km/h), such as in parking lot
situations.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in REVERSE
(R), the driver is alerted using both the visual
and audible alarms, including reducing the
radio volume.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles can
be blocked by vehicles parked on either side. If
the sensors are blocked by other structures or
vehicles, the system will not be able to alert the
driver.
Blind Spot Modes
Blind Spot has three selectable modes of
operation that are available in the Uconnect
system.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only (Default Setting)
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a
detected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and
audible alerts when a detected object is
present. Whenever an audible alert is
requested, the radio is muted.
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/
Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
based on a detected object. If the turn signal is
then activated, and it corresponds to an alert
present on that side of the vehicle, an audible
chime will also be sounded. Whenever a turn
signal and detected object are present on the
same side at the same time, both the visual and
audible alerts will be issued. In addition to the
audible alert the radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a
backup aid system. It is intended to be used
to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in
a parking lot situation. Drivers must be care-
ful when backing up, even when using RCP.
Always check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstruc-
tions, and blind spots before backing up. Fail-
ure to do so can result in serious injury or
death.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 224
SAFETY 225
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever
an audible alert is requested, the radio volume
is reduced. Turn/hazard signal status is
ignored; the RCP state always requests the
chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off, there will
be no visual or audible alerts from either the
BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current operating
mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each time
the vehicle is started the previously stored
mode will be recalled and used.
Blocked Sensor
If the system detects degraded performance
due to contamination or foreign objects, a
message will warn you of a blocked sensor and
the warning indicators in side view mirrors will
be illuminated. The warning indicators will
remain illuminated until blockage clearing
conditions are met. First clear the fascia/
bumper area around the sensors of the
blockage. After removing the blockage, reset
the system by cycling the ignition from ON to
OFF and then back ON.
FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW)
W
ITH MITIGATION — IF EQUIPPED
FCW with Mitigation provides the driver with
audible warnings, visual warnings (within the
instrument cluster display), and may apply a
brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a
potential frontal collision. The warnings and
limited braking are intended to provide the
driver with enough time to react, avoid or
mitigate the potential collision.
NOTE:
FCW monitors the information from the forward
looking sensors as well as the Electronic Brake
Controller (EBC), to calculate the probability of a
forward collision. When the system determines
that a forward collision is probable, the driver
will be provided with audible and visual warn-
ings and may provide a brake jerk warning.
If the driver does not take action based upon
these progressive warnings, then the system
will provide a limited level of active braking to
help slow the vehicle and mitigate the potential
forward collision. If the driver reacts to the warn-
ings by braking and the system determines that
the driver intends to avoid the collision by
braking but has not applied sufficient brake
force, the system will compensate and provide
additional brake force as required.
If a Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
event begins at a speed below 26 mph (42 km/h),
the system may provide the maximum braking
possible to mitigate the potential forward collision.
If the Forward Collision Warning with Mitigation
event stops the vehicle completely, the system will
hold the vehicle at standstill for two seconds and
then release the brakes.
FCW Message
6
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 225
226 SAFETY
When the system determines a collision with
the vehicle in front of you is no longer probable,
the warning message will be deactivated
Ú page 360.
NOTE:
The minimum speed for FCW activation is
1 mph (2 km/h).
The FCW alerts may be triggered on objects
other than vehicles such as guard rails or
sign posts based on the course prediction.
This is expected and is a part of normal FCW
activation and functionality.
It is unsafe to test the FCW system. To
prevent such misuse of the system, after four
Active Braking events within a key cycle, the
Active Braking portion of FCW will be deacti-
vated until the next key cycle.
The FCW system is intended for on-road use
only. If the vehicle is taken off-road, the FCW
system should be deactivated to prevent
unnecessary warnings to the surroundings.
FCW Settings
The Forward Collision menu setting is located in
the Uconnect Settings Ú page 139.
NOTE:
The default status of FCW is “Full On,” this
allows the system to provide warning and auton-
omous braking in the event of a potential frontal
collision.
Changing the FCW status to “Warning Only”
prevents the system from providing
autonomous braking, or additional brake
support if the driver is not braking adequately in
the event of a potential frontal collision.
Changing the FCW status to “Off” deactivates
the system, so no warning or autonomous
braking will be available in case of a possible
collision.
NOTE:
The FCW system state is kept in memory from
one ignition cycle to the next. If the system is
turned off, it will remain off when the vehicle is
restarted.
Changing FCW Sensitivity and Operating
Status
The FCW Sensitivity and Operation settings are
programmable through the Uconnect system
Ú page 139.
The default status of FCW is the “Medium”
setting and the FCW is in the “Full On” setting.
This allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warnings and it applies
autonomous braking.
Changing the FCW status to the “Far” setting
allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front using
audible/visual warnings when the latter is at a
farther distance than in the "Medium" setting.
WARNING!
Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not
intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor
can FCW detect every type of potential colli-
sion. The driver has the responsibility to avoid
a collision by controlling the vehicle via brak-
ing and steering. Failure to follow this warning
could lead to serious injury or death.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 226
SAFETY 227
This provides the most reaction time to avoid a
possible collision.
Changing the FCW status to the “Near” setting
allows the system to warn the driver of a
possible collision with the vehicle in front when
the vehicle in the front is much closer. This
setting provides less reaction time than the
“Far” and “Medium” settings, which allows for a
more dynamic driving experience.
NOTE:
The system will retain the last setting
selected by the driver after ignition shut
down.
FCW may not react to irrelevant objects such
as overhead objects, ground reflections,
objects not in the path of the vehicle,
stationary objects that are far away,
oncoming traffic, or leading vehicles with the
same or higher rate of speed.
If FCW is disabled, unavailable screens will
be displayed.
FCW Limited Warning
If the instrument cluster display reads “FCW
Limited Functionality” or “FCW Limited
Functionality Clean Front Windshield”
momentarily, there may be a condition that
limits FCW functionality. Although the vehicle is
still driveable under normal conditions, the
active braking may not be fully available. Once
the condition that limited the system
performance is no longer present, the system
will return to its full performance state. If the
problem persists, see an authorized dealer.
Service FCW Warning
If the system turns off, and the instrument
cluster display reads “FCW Unavailable Service
Required”, there is an internal system fault.
Although the vehicle is still driveable under
normal conditions, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM
(TPMS)
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure based on the vehicle recommended
cold placard pressure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by
approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F
(6.5°C). This means that when the outside
temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle
has not been driven for at least three hours, or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation
pressure molded into the tire sidewall. The tire
pressure will also increase as the vehicle is
driven. This is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
For more information on how to properly inflate
the vehicle’s tires, see Ú page 330.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the
low-pressure warning limit for any reason,
including low temperature effects and natural
pressure loss through the tire. The TPMS will
continue to warn the driver of low tire pressure
as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the
recommended cold placard pressure.
NOTE:
Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pres-
sure Monitoring System Warning Light) illumi-
nates, you must increase the tire pressure to
the recommended cold placard pressure in
order for the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light to turn off.
6
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 227
228 SAFETY
(Continued)
The system will automatically update and the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light
will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
For example, your vehicle may have a
recommended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa). If
the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C) and
the measured tire pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will
decrease the tire pressure to approximately
24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is low
enough to turn on the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light. Driving the vehicle may
cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
28 psi (193 kPa), but the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will still be on.
In this situation, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light will turn off only after the
tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended
cold placard pressure value Ú page 360.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System Warning Light off.
NOTE:
The TPMS is not intended to replace normal
tire care and maintenance, or to provide
warning of a tire failure or condition.
The TPMS should not be used as a tire pres-
sure gauge while adjusting your tire pressure.
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsi-
bility to maintain correct tire pressure using
an accurate tire pressure gauge, even if
underinflation has not reached the level to
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the orig-
inal equipment tires and wheels. TPMS
pressures and warning have been estab-
lished for the tire size equipped on your
vehicle. Undesirable system operation or
sensor damage may result when using
replacement equipment that is not of the
same size, type, and/or style. The TPMS
sensor is not designed for use on after-
market wheels and may contribute to a
poor overall system performance or sensor
damage. Customers are encouraged to use
OEM wheels to ensure proper TPMS feature
operation.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After
using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
an authorized dealer to have your sensor
function checked.
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could
damage the TPMS sensor.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 228
SAFETY 229
trigger illumination of the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System Warning Light.
Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor the
actual tire pressure in the tire.
Premium System
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle
monthly and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following
components:
Receiver Module
Four Tire Pressure Monitoring System
sensors
Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System
messages, which will display in the instru-
ment cluster display.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will illuminate in the
instrument cluster and a chime will
sound when tire pressure is low in one
or more of the four active road tires. In addition,
the instrument cluster will display a "Tire Low"
message, an “Inflate to XX” message, and a
graphic showing the pressure values of each
tire with the low tire pressure values highlighted
or in a different color.
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warning
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with low pressure
(those highlighted or in a different color in the
instrument cluster display graphic) to the
vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure
value, as shown in the “Inflate to XX” message.
Once the system receives the updated tire
pressures, the system will automatically
update, the pressure values in the graphic
display in the instrument cluster will stop being
highlighted or return to their original color, and
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold placard
pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure Moni-
toring System Warning Light off.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TPMS to receive this information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on solid. The system fault will also sound a
chime. In addition, the instrument cluster will
6
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 229
230 SAFETY
display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" message for
a minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (--) in place of the pressure value to
indicate which sensor is not being received.
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists. If
the system fault no longer exists, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM” message will no longer display, and a
pressure value will display in place of the
dashes. A system fault can occur due to any of
the following:
Jamming due to electronic devices or driving
next to facilities emitting the same radio
frequencies as the TPMS sensors
Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals
Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings
Using tire chains on the vehicle
Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPMS
sensors
Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching
Full Size Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching
full size does not have a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System sensor. Therefore, the
TPMS will not monitor the pressure in the
compact or non-matching full size spare
tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-matching
full size spare tire in place of a road tire that
has a pressure below the low-pressure
warning limit, upon the next ignition key
cycle, the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
Warning Light will remain on and a chime
will sound. In addition, the graphic in the
instrument cluster will still display a
different color or highlighted pressure value
and the “Inflate to XX” message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the
Tire Pressure Monitoring System Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds
and then display dashes (--) in place of the
pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a
chime will sound, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring System Warning Light will flash
on and off for 75 seconds and then remain
on solid, and the instrument cluster will
display a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message
for five seconds and then display dashes (--)
in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road
tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in place of
the compact spare or non-matching full
size, the TPMS will update automatically. In
addition, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light will turn off and the
graphic in the instrument cluster will display
a new pressure value instead of dashes (--),
as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the four
active road tires. The vehicle may need to
be driven for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to
receive this information.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 230
SAFETY 231
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all
four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with
wheel and tire assemblies that do not have
TPMS sensors, such as when installing winter
wheel and tire assemblies on your vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
not equipped with Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS) sensors. Then, drive the vehicle
for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the Tire Pressure Monitoring
System Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on. The
instrument cluster will display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message and then display
dashes (--) in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the TPMS
will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE
TPM SYSTEM” message in the instrument
cluster but dashes (--) will remain in place of the
pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel
and tire assemblies (road tires) with tires
equipped with TPM sensors. Then, drive the
vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System Warning Light will
flash on and off for 75 seconds and then turn
off. The instrument cluster will display the
“SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message and then
display pressure values in place of the dashes.
On the next ignition cycle the "SERVICE TPM
SYSTEM" message will no longer be displayed
as long as no system fault exists.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
F
EATURES
Seat Belt Systems
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
IMPORTANT SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Please pay close attention to the information in
this section. It tells you how to use your restraint
system properly, to keep you and your
passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying air
bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
2. A child who is not big enough to wear the
vehicle seat belt properly must be secured
in the appropriate child restraint or
belt-positioning booster seat in a rear
seating position Ú page 255.
3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in the
front passenger seat, move the seat as far
back as possible and use the proper child
restraint Ú page 255.
6
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 231
232 SAFETY
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats should
be moved back as far as practical to allow
the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and
deployment occurs, the side air bags will
inflate forcefully into the space between
occupants and the door and occupants
could be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to
be modified to accommodate a disabled
person, see Ú page 357 for customer
service contact information.
SEAT BELT SYSTEMS
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the road
may be a poor driver and could cause a collision
that includes you. This can happen far away
from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives,
and they can reduce the seriousness of injuries
in a collision. Some of the worst injuries happen
when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat
belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the
risk of injury caused by striking the inside of the
vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should be
belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the
driver and outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
BeltAlert feature is active whenever the ignition
switch is in the START or ON/RUN position.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN position,
a chime will signal for a few seconds. If the
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition switch
is first in the START or ON/RUN position the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and
remain on until both outboard front seat belts
are buckled. The outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when an outboard front
passenger seat is unoccupied.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 232
SAFETY 233
(Continued)
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard
front seat passenger is unbuckled (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)
(the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied). The BeltAlert warning
sequence starts by blinking the Seat Belt
Reminder Light and sounding an intermittent
chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence
has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light
will remain on until the seat belts are buckled.
The BeltAlert warning sequence may repeat
based on vehicle speed until the driver and
occupied outboard front seat passenger seat
belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all
occupants to buckle their seat belts.
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while the
vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning
sequence will begin until the seat belts are
buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is
not active when the outboard front passenger
seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be triggered
when an animal or other items are placed on
the outboard front passenger seat or when the
seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is
recommended that pets be restrained in the
rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet
carriers that are secured by seat belts, and
cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by an
authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver
or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped
with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) is
unbuckled the Seat Belt Reminder Light will
turn on and remain on until the driver and
outboard front seat passenger seat belts are
buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat belt
to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt
will lock and reduce your risk of striking the
inside of the vehicle or being thrown out of the
vehicle.
WARNING!
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, the air bags
won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat
belt even though you have air bags.
In a collision, you and your passengers can
suffer much greater injuries if you are not
properly buckled up. You can strike the inte-
rior of your vehicle or other passengers, or
you can be thrown out of the vehicle. Always
be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely
to be seriously injured or killed.
6
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 233
234 SAFETY
(Continued)
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly. Occupants,
including the driver, should always wear
their seat belts whether or not an air bag is
also provided at their seating position to
minimize the risk of severe injury or death
in the event of a crash.
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together can
crash into one another in a collision, hurting
one another badly. Never use a lap/
shoulder belt or a lap belt for more than one
person, no matter what their size.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic
bones, but across your abdomen. Always
wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut into
you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against
your body, without twists. If you can’t
straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take it
to an authorized dealer immediately and
have it fixed.
A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The lap
portion could ride too high on your body,
possibly causing internal injuries. Always
buckle your seat belt into the buckle
nearest you.
A seat belt that is too loose will not protect
you properly. In a sudden stop, you could
move too far forward, increasing the possi-
bility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a collision,
increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt
worn under the arm can cause internal inju-
ries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the seat belt over your
shoulder so that your strongest bones will
take the force in a collision.
A shoulder belt placed behind you will not
protect you from injury during a collision.
You are more likely to hit your head in a
collision if you do not wear your shoulder
belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to
be used together.
A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in
a collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
seat belt system. Seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 234
SAFETY 235
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in the
rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a rear
seat). Grab the latch plate and pull out the
seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the
seat belt to go around your lap.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click”.
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
Positioning The Lap Belt
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle. The seat belt will automat-
ically retract to its stowed position. If
necessary, slide the latch plate down the
webbing to allow the seat belt to retract
fully.
6
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 235
236 SAFETY
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted
lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as
possible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above
the latch plate, grab and twist the seat belt
webbing 180 degrees to create a fold that
begins immediately above the latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded
webbing. The folded webbing must enter
the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat belt
is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and outboard front passenger
seats, the top of the shoulder belt can be
adjusted upward or downward to position the
seat belt away from your neck. Push or squeeze
the anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you
will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a
lower position, and if you are taller than
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it up
or down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button. To
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchorage
until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries, or
you could even slide out of the seat belt.
Follow these instructions to wear your seat
belt safely and to keep your passengers
safe, too.
Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will with-
draw any slack in the shoulder belt.
Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt
in a crash.
Always make all seat belt height adjust-
ments when the vehicle is stationary.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 236
SAFETY 237
Second Row Center Seat Belt Operating
Instructions
The second row center seat belt may feature a
seat belt with a mini-latch plate and buckle. The
mini-latch plate and buckle (if equipped) should
remain connected at all times. If the mini-latch
plate and buckle become disconnected, they
must be properly reconnected prior to the rear
center seat belt being used by an occupant.
1. Grab the mini-latch plate and pull the seat
belt over the seat.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
2. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the mini-latch plate into the
mini-buckle until you hear a “click.”
Inserting Mini-Latch Plate Into Mini-Buckle
3. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate
up the webbing as far as necessary to allow
the seat belt to go around your lap.
4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle
5. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on
the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the
risk of sliding under the seat belt in a
collision.
6. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so
that it is comfortable and not resting on your
neck. The retractor will withdraw any slack
in the seat belt.
7. To release the seat belt, push the red button
on the buckle.
6
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 237
238 SAFETY
8. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the
mini-buckle, insert the regular latch plate
into the center red slot on the mini-buckle.
Detaching Mini-Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and the
adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage (if
equipped) is in its lowest position, an authorized
dealer can provide you with a Seat Belt Extender.
The Seat Belt Extender should be used only if the
existing seat belt is not long enough. When the
Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different
occupant, it must be removed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury in
the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are wearing
a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of
a collision. These devices may improve the
WARNING!
If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are
not properly connected when the seat belt
is used by an occupant, the seat belt will
not be able to provide proper restraint and
will increase the risk of injury in a collision.
When reattaching the mini-latch plate and
mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing
is not twisted. If the webbing is twisted,
follow the preceding procedure to detach
the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle,
untwist the webbing, and reattach the
mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.
WARNING!
ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physi-
cally required in order to properly fit the
original seat belt system. DO NOT USE the
Seat Belt Extender if, when worn, the
distance between the front edge of the
Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of
the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.
Using a Seat Belt Extender when not
needed can increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a collision. Only use the
Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt is not
long enough and only use in the recom-
mended seating positions. Remove and
store the Seat Belt Extender when not
needed.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 238
SAFETY 239
performance of the seat belt by removing slack
from the seat belt early in a collision.
Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The seat
belt still must be worn snugly and positioned
properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the
air bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
Energy Management Feature
The front outboard seat belt system is equipped
with an Energy Management feature that may
help further reduce the risk of injury in the event
of a collision. The seat belt system has a
retractor assembly that is designed to release
webbing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is
used to secure a child restraint system
Ú page 264.
The figure below illustrates the locking feature
for each seating position.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
Locations
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal usage,
only pull the seat belt webbing out far enough to
comfortably wrap around the occupant’s
mid-section so as to not activate the ALR. If the
ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking sound
as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to
retract completely in this case and then
carefully pull out only the amount of webbing
necessary to comfortably wrap around the
occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch plate
into the buckle until you hear a "click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is
automatically pre-locked. The seat belt will still
retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt.
Use the Automatic Locking Mode anytime a
child restraint is installed in a seating position
that has a seat belt with this feature. Children
12 years old and under should always be
properly restrained in the rear seat of a vehicle
with a rear seat.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
6
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 239
240 SAFETY
(Continued)
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grab the shoulder portion and pull
downward until the entire seat belt is
extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seat belt is now in the
Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disengage
the Automatic Locking Mode and activate the
vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEMS
(SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect you
in a collision. The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the internal circuits and
interconnecting wiring associated with the
electrical Air Bag System Components. Your
vehicle may be equipped with the following Air
Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
WARNING!
The seat belt assembly must be replaced if
the switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR) feature or any other seat belt function
is not working properly when checked
according to the procedures in the Service
Manual.
Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in colli-
sions.
Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to
restrain occupants who are wearing the
seat belt or children who are using booster
seats. The locked mode is only used to
install rear-facing or forward-facing child
restraints that have a harness for
restraining the child.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 240
SAFETY 241
Air Bag Warning Light
The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system
whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch
is in the OFF position or in the ACC position, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will not
inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system even
if the battery loses power or it becomes
disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in
the instrument panel for approximately four to
eight seconds for a self-check when the ignition
switch is first in the ON/RUN position. After the
self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will turn
off. If the ORC detects a malfunction in any part
of the system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light, either momentarily or continuously. A
single chime will sound to alert you if the light
comes on again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag Warning
Light if a malfunction is detected that could
affect the air bag system. The diagnostics also
record the nature of the malfunction. While the
air bag system is designed to be maintenance
free, if any of the following occurs, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on
during the four to eight seconds when the
ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN position.
The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermit-
tently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine
related gauges are not working, the Occupant
Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be
disabled. In this condition the air bags may not
be ready to inflate for your protection. Have an
authorized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning
Light is detected, which could affect
the Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning
Light will illuminate on the instrument panel.
The Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will stay
on until the fault is cleared. In addition, a single
chime will sound to alert you that the
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on
and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately
Ú page 74.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t have
the air bag system to protect you in a collision.
If the light does not come on as a bulb check
when the ignition is first turned on, stays on
after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as
you drive, have an authorized dealer service
the air bag system immediately.
6
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 241
242 SAFETY
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder
belts for both the driver and front passenger.
The front air bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint systems. The driver front air bag is
mounted in the center of the steering wheel.
The passenger front air bag is mounted in the
instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words “SRS AIRBAG” or
“AIRBAG” are embossed on the air bag covers.
Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag
Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has
multistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to the
severity and type of collision as determined by
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC), which
may receive information from the front impact
sensors (if equipped) or other system
components.
The first stage inflator is triggered immediately
during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in less
severe collisions. A higher energy output is used
for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/
or front passenger seat belt buckle switch that
detects whether the driver or front passenger
seat belt is buckled. The seat belt buckle switch
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver and/or
front passenger seat track position sensors that
may adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced
Front Air Bags based upon seat position.
This vehicle is equipped with a right front
passenger Occupant Classification System
(“OCS”) that is designed to provide Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to
the occupant’s seated weight input, as
determined by the OCS.
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags
2 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster
3 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag
WARNING!
Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 242
SAFETY 243
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide
additional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to reduce
the risk of injury in rear, side, or rollover
collisions. The front air bags will not deploy in all
frontal collisions, including some that may
produce substantial vehicle damage — for
example, some pole collisions, truck
underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type and
location of impact, front air bags may deploy in
crashes with little vehicle front-end damage but
that produce a severe initial deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indicators
of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help keep
you in position, away from an inflating air bag.
When the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
detects a collision requiring the front air bags, it
signals the inflator units. A large quantity of
non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the front air
bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air bags
inflate to their full size. The front air bags fully
inflate in less time than it takes to blink your
eyes. The front air bags then quickly deflate
while helping to restrain the driver and front
passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is
part of a Federally regulated safety system for
this vehicle. It is designed to provide Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag output appropriate to
the occupant’s seated weight, as determined by
the OCS.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
consists of the following:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and
Sensor located in the front passenger seat
Air Bag Warning Light
Occupant Classification Module (OCM) And
Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM) is
located underneath the front passenger seat.
The Sensor is located beneath the passenger
WARNING!
No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a colli-
sion severe enough to cause the air bag to
inflate.
Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them manu-
ally. You may damage the air bags and you
could be injured because the air bags may
no longer be functional. The protective
covers for the air bag cushions are
designed to open only when the air bags
are inflating.
Relying on the air bags alone could lead to
more severe injuries in a collision. The air
bags work with your seat belt to restrain you
properly. In some collisions, air bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belts
even though you have air bags.
6
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 243
244 SAFETY
seat cushion foam. Any weight on the seat will
be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM uses input
from the Sensor to determine the front
passenger’s most probable classification. The
OCM communicates this information to the
ORC. The ORC may reduce the inflation rate of
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
deployment based on occupant classification.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated
properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
The OCS will NOT prevent deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. The OCS
may reduce the inflation rate of the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag if the OCS estimates
that:
The front passenger seat is unoccupied or
has very light objects on it; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a
small passenger, including a child; or
The front passenger seat is occupied by a
rear-facing child restraint; or
The front passenger is not properly seated or
his or her weight is taken off of the seat for a
period of time.
* It is possible for a child to be classified as an adult, allowing a full-power Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag deployment. Never allow children to ride in the front passenger seat and
never install a child restraint system, including a rear-facing child restraint, in the front passenger seat.
Front Passenger Seat Occupant Status Front Passenger Air Bag Output
Rear-facing child restraint Reduced-power deployment
Child, including a child in a forward-facing child restraint or booster seat* Reduced-power deployment OR Full-power deployment
Properly seated adult Full-power deployment OR reduced-power deployment
Unoccupied seat Reduced-power deployment
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger front air bag can cause death or serious injury to a child
12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing child restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If the vehicle does not
have a rear seat, do not transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle.
Children 12 years or younger should always ride buckled up in the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 244
SAFETY 245
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. The OCS estimates the
seated weight on the front passenger seat and
where that weight is located. The OCS
communicates the classification status to the
ORC. The ORC uses the classification to
determine whether the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag inflation rate should be adjusted.
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it is
important for the front passenger to be seated
properly and properly wearing the seat belt.
Properly seated passengers are:
Sitting upright
Facing forward
Sitting in the center of the seat with their feet
comfortably on or near the floor
Sitting with their back against the seatback
and the seatback in an upright position
Seated Properly
Lighter Weight Passengers (Including Small
Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a
small adult, occupies the front passenger seat,
the OCS may reduce the inflation rate of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. This does
not mean that the OCS is working improperly.
Do not decrease OR increase the front
passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be
properly positioned on the front passenger seat.
Failure to do so may result in serious injury or
death. The OCS determines the most probable
classification of the occupant that it detects.
The OCS will detect the front passenger’s
decreased or increased seated weight, which
may result in an adjusted inflation rate of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag in a collision.
This does not mean that the OCS is working
improperly. Decreasing the front passenger’s
seated weight on the front passenger seat may
result in a reduced-power deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Increasing
the front passenger’s seated weight on the front
passenger seat may result in a full-power
deployment of the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seating
include:
The front passenger’s weight is transferred to
another part of the vehicle (like the door, arm
rest or instrument panel).
The front passenger leans forward, sideways,
or turns to face the rear of the vehicle.
The front passenger’s seatback is not in the
full upright position.
The front passenger carries or holds an
object while seated (e.g., backpack, box,
etc.).
Objects are lodged under the front passenger
seat.
6
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 245
246 SAFETY
(Continued)
Objects are lodged between the front
passenger seat and center console.
Accessories that may change the seated
weight on the front passenger seat are
attached to the front passenger seat.
Anything that may decrease or increase the
front passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s most
probable classification. If an occupant in the
front passenger seat is seated improperly, the
occupant may provide an output signal to the
OCS that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input, for example:
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
WARNING!
If a child restraint system, child, small teen-
ager or adult in the front passenger seat is
seated improperly, the occupant may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different from the occupant’s properly
seated weight input. This may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
Always wear your seat belt and sit properly,
with the seatback in an upright position,
your back against the seatback, sitting
upright, facing forward, in the center of the
seat, with your feet comfortably on or near
the floor.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 246
SAFETY 247
The Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument
panel will turn on whenever the OCS is unable to
classify the front passenger seat status. A
malfunction in the OCS may affect the operation
of the air bag system.
If the Air Bag Warning Light does not come
on, or stays on after you start the vehicle, or it
comes on as you drive, take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer for service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains critical
OCS components that may affect the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order for the
OCS to properly classify the seated weight of a
front seat passenger, the OCS components
must function as designed. Do not make any
modifications to the front passenger seat
components, assembly, or to the seat cover. If
the seat, trim cover, or cushion needs service
for any reason, take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only FCA US LLC approved seat
accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly
followed:
Do not modify the front passenger seat
assembly or components in any way.
Do not use prior or future model year seat
covers or cushions not designated by FCA US
LLC for the specific model being repaired.
Always use the correct seat cover and
cushion specified for the vehicle.
Do not replace the seat cover or cushion with
an aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
At no time should any Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) component or SRS
related component or fastener be modified
or replaced with any part except those which
are approved by FCA US LLC.
Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g., back-
packs, boxes, etc.) while seated in the front
passenger seat. Holding an object may
provide an output signal to the OCS that is
different than the occupant’s properly
seated weight input, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision.
Placing an object on the floor under the
front passenger seat may prevent the OCS
from working properly, which may result in
serious injury or death in a collision. Do not
place any objects on the floor under the
front passenger seat.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service proce-
dures to the passenger seat assembly, its
related components, seat cover or cushion
may inadvertently change the air bag
deployment in case of a frontal collision.
This could result in death or serious injury
to the front passenger if the vehicle is
involved in a collision. A modified vehicle
may not comply with required Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS)
and/or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (CMVSS).
If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities,
contact an authorized dealer.
6
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 247
248 SAFETY
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved
interaction with the front air bags.
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag
This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental
Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instrument
panel below the steering column. The
Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides
enhanced protection during a frontal impact by
working together with the seat belts,
pretensioners, and front air bags.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat
trim on the outboard side of the seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side impacts, in
addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim cover.
The inflating SAB deploys through the seat
seam into the space between the occupant and
the door. The SAB moves at a very high speed
and with such a high force that it could injure
occupants if they are not seated properly, or if
items are positioned in the area where the SAB
inflates. Children are at an even greater risk of
injury from a deploying air bag.
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains
(SABICs) are located above the side windows.
The trim covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS
AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”
WARNING!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
Do not mount any accessories to the knee
impact bolsters such as alarm lights,
stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air Bags;
the performance could be adversely affected
and/or objects could be pushed into you,
causing serious injury.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 248
SAFETY 249
Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)
Label Location
SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and
other injuries to front and rear seat outboard
occupants in certain side impacts, in addition to
the injury reduction potential provided by the
seat belts and body structure.
The SABIC deploys downward, covering the side
windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside
edge of the headliner out of the way and covers
the window. The SABICs inflate with enough
force to injure occupants if they are not belted
and seated properly, or if items are positioned
in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children
are at an even greater risk of injury from a
deploying air bag.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain side impact
events.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the
deployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the
appropriate response to impact events. The
system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags
on the impact side of the vehicle during impacts
that require Side Air Bag occupant protection. In
side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy
independently; a left side impact deploys the
left Side Air Bags only and a right-side impact
deploys the right Side Air Bags only. Vehicle
damage by itself is not a good indicator of
whether or not Side Air Bags should have
deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at certain
angles, or some side collisions that do not
impact the area of the passenger compartment.
The Side Air Bags may deploy during angled or
offset frontal collisions where the front air bags
deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt
restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in less
time than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
Do not mount equipment, or stack luggage
or other cargo up high enough to block the
deployment of the SABICs. The trim
covering above the side windows where the
SABIC and its deployment path are located
should remain free from any obstructions.
In order for the SABICs to work as intended,
do not install any accessory items in your
vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not
add an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle.
Do not add roof racks that require perma-
nent attachments (bolts or screws) for
installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill
into the roof of the vehicle for any reason.
6
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 249
250 SAFETY
(Continued)
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior
trim, but they will open during air bag deploy-
ment.
Rollover Events
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners are
designed to activate in certain rollover events.
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
determines whether deployment in a particular
rollover event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by
itself is not a good indicator of whether or not
Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags and seat belt pretensioners
will not deploy in all rollover events. The rollover
sensing system determines if a rollover event
may be in progress and whether deployment is
appropriate. In the event the vehicle
experiences a rollover or near rollover event,
and deployment is appropriate, the rollover
sensing system will deploy the side air bags and
seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the
vehicle.
The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial
or complete ejection of vehicle occupants
through side windows in certain rollover or side
impact events.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) moni-
tors the internal circuits and interconnecting
wiring associated with electrical Air Bag System
Components listed below:
Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
Air Bag Warning Light
Steering Wheel and Column
Instrument Panel
WARNING!
Occupants, including children, who are up
against or very close to Side Air Bags can be
seriously injured or killed. Occupants,
including children, should never lean on or
sleep against the door, side windows, or
area where the side air bags inflate, even if
they are in an infant or child restraint.
Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your protec-
tion in all collisions. They also help keep
you in position, away from an inflating Side
Air Bag. To get the best protection from the
Side Air Bags, occupants must wear their
seat belts properly and sit upright with their
backs against the seats. Children must be
properly restrained in a child restraint or
booster seat that is appropriate for the size
of the child.
WARNING!
Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not
lean against the door or window. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
Being too close to the Side Air Bags during
deployment could cause you to be severely
injured or killed.
Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a collision.
The Side Air Bags work with your seat belt
to restrain you properly. In some collisions,
Side Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
Side Air Bags.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 250
SAFETY 251
Knee Impact Bolsters
Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
Seat Belt Buckle Switch
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Knee Air Bags
Front and Side Impact Sensors
Seat Belt Pretensioners
Seat Track Position Sensors
Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the air
bags, any or all of the following may occur:
The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the occu-
pants as the air bags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or
those you might get sliding along a carpet or
gymnasium floor. They are not caused by
contact with chemicals. They are not perma-
nent and normally heal quickly. However, if
you haven’t healed significantly within a few
days, or if you have any blistering, see your
doctor immediately.
As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that gener-
ates the non-toxic gas used for air bag infla-
tion. These airborne particles may irritate the
skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or
eye irritation, rinse the area with cool water.
For nose or throat irritation, move to fresh air.
If the irritation continues, see your doctor. If
these particles settle on your clothing, follow
the garment manufacturer’s instructions for
cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have
deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to
protect you.
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the inte-
rior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt pretension-
ers cannot protect you in another collision.
Have the air bags, seat belt pretensioners,
and the seat belt retractor assemblies
replaced by an authorized dealer immedi-
ately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Con-
troller System serviced as well.
6
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 251
252 SAFETY
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communication
network remains intact, and the power remains
intact, depending on the nature of the event,
the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) will
determine whether to have the Enhanced
Accident Response System perform the
following functions:
Cut off fuel to the engine (if equipped)
Cut off battery power to the electric motor (if
equipped)
Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has
power
Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power or for
15 minutes from the intervention of the
Enhanced Accident Response System
Unlock the power door locks
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to the
Enhanced Accident Response System:
Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circula-
tion Door
Cut off battery power to the:
Engine
Electric Motor (if equipped)
Electric power steering
Brake booster
Electric park brake
Automatic transmission gear selector
Horn
Front wiper
Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the igni-
tion to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position and
remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid
draining the battery. Carefully check the vehicle
for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
the ground near the engine compartment and
fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine. If there are no fuel leaks or
damage to the vehicle electrical devices (e.g.
headlights) after an accident, reset the system
by following the procedure described below. If
you have any doubt, contact an authorized
dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
After the event occurs, when the system is
active, a message regarding fuel cutoff is
displayed. Turn the ignition switch from ignition
AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN to ignition
STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the vehicle
for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on
the ground near the engine compartment and
fuel tank before resetting the system and
starting the engine.
Depending on the nature of the event the left
and right turn signal lights, located in the
instrument panel, may both be blinking and will
continue to blink. In order to move your vehicle
to the side of the road, you must follow the
system reset procedure.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 252
SAFETY 253
Customer Action
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
Customer Will See
1. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in
Neutral State).
2. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
3. Turn right turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
4. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
5. Turn left turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
6. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light BLINKS.
Left turn light is OFF.
7. Turn right turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light BLINKS.
8. Place turn signal in neutral state.
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light BLINKS.
9. Turn left turn signal switch ON.
Right turn light is ON SOLID.
Left turn light is ON SOLID.
6
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 253
254 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
If a reset procedure step is not completed within
60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink
and the reset procedure must be performed
again in order to be successful.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
10. Turn left turn signal switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in
Neutral State).
Right turn light is OFF.
Left turn light is OFF.
11. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK.
12. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire sequence needs to be com-
pleted within one minute or sequence will need to be repeated).
System is now reset and the engine may be started.
Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually).
Customer Action
NOTE:
Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
Customer Will See
WARNING!
Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag system
is not there to protect you. Do not modify
the components or wiring, including adding
any kind of badges or stickers to the
steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper
passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front fascia/bumper, vehicle
body structure, or add aftermarket side
steps or running boards.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell
anyone who works on your vehicle that it
has an air bag system.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 254
SAFETY 255
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds
or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to
record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving
conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,
gender, age, and crash location) are recorded.
However, other parties, such as law enforce-
ment, could combine the EDR data with the type
of personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as
law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
CHILD RESTRAINTS
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up
at all times, including babies and children. Every
state in the United States, and every Canadian
province, requires that small children ride in
proper restraint systems. This is the law, and
you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride
properly buckled up in a rear seat, if available.
According to crash statistics, children are safer
when properly restrained in the rear seats
rather than in the front.
Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate acci-
dentally or may not function properly if
modifications are made. Take your vehicle
to an authorized dealer for any air bag
system service. If your seat, including your
trim cover and cushion, needs to be
serviced in any way (including removal or
loosening/tightening of seat attachment
bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat
accessories may be used. If it is necessary
to modify the air bag system for persons
with disabilities, contact an authorized
dealer.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 255
256 SAFETY
There are different sizes and types of restraints
for children from newborn size to the child
almost large enough for an adult safety belt.
Always check the child seat Owner’s Manual to
make sure you have the correct seat for your
child. Carefully read and follow all the
instructions and warnings in the child restraint
Owner’s Manual and on all the labels attached
to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make sure
that it has a label certifying that it meets all
applicable Safety Standards. You should also
make sure that you can install it in the vehicle
where you will use it.
NOTE:
For additional information, refer to http://
www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-caregivers or
call: 1–888–327–4236
Canadian residents should refer to Transport
Canada’s website for additional information:
https://www.tc.gc.ca/en/services/road/
child-car-seat-safety.html
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your
lap could become so great that you could not
hold the child, no matter how strong you are.
The child and others could be badly injured or
killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should
be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger and who
have not reached the height or weight limits of their
child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child
Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the
vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who have
outgrown the height or weight limit of their rear-fac-
ing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-point Har-
ness, facing forward in a rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-facing
child restraint, but are too small to properly fit the
vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle seat
belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who have out-
grown the height or weight limit of their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 256
SAFETY 257
(Continued)
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two years
old or until they reach either the height or
weight limit of their rear-facing child restraint.
Two types of child restraints can be used
rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child
seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children from
birth until they reach the weight or height limit of
the infant carrier. Convertible child seats can be
used either rear-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a
higher weight limit in the rear-facing direction
than infant carriers do, so they can be used
rear-facing by children who have outgrown their
infant carrier but are still less than at least two
years old. Children should remain rear-facing
until they reach the highest weight or height
allowed by their convertible child seat.
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child seat
can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible child
seats used in the forward-facing direction are
for children who are over two years old or who
have outgrown the rear-facing weight or height
limit of their rear-facing convertible child seat.
Children should remain in a forward-facing child
seat with a harness for as long as possible, up
to the highest weight or height allowed by the
child seat.
All children whose weight or height is above the
forward-facing limit for the child seat should use
a belt-positioning booster seat until the
vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s
seat cushion while the child’s back is against
the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning
booster seat. The child and belt-positioning
booster seat are held in the vehicle by the seat
belt.
WARNING!
Never place a rear-facing child restraint in
front of an air bag. A deploying passenger
front air bag can cause death or serious
injury to a child 12 years or younger,
including a child in a rear-facing child
restraint.
Never install a rear-facing child restraint in
the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If
the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do
not transport a rear-facing child restraint in
that vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation can lead to failure of
an infant or child restraint. It could come
loose in a collision. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
6
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 257
258 SAFETY
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback, should
use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this simple
5-step test to decide whether the child can use
the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over
the front of the vehicle seat – while the child
is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between the neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible,
touching the child’s thighs and not the
stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was
“no”, then the child still needs to use a booster
seat in this vehicle. If the child is using the lap/
shoulder belt, check seat belt fit periodically
and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched.
A child’s squirming or slouching can move the
belt out of position. If the shoulder belt contacts
the face or neck, move the child closer to the
center of the vehicle, or use a booster seat to
position the seat belt on the child correctly.
After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can loosen
the child restraint attachments. Remove
the child restraint before adjusting the
vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat
has been adjusted, reinstall the child
restraint.
When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or
LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the
vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle.
In a sudden stop or accident, it could strike
the occupants or seatbacks and cause
serious personal injury.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a crash,
the shoulder belt will not protect a child prop-
erly, which may result in serious injury or
death. A child must always wear both the lap
and shoulder portions of the seat belt cor-
rectly.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 258
SAFETY 259
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type
Combined Weight of
the Child + Child
Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only
LATCH – Lower
Anchors + Top Tether
Anchor
Seat Belt + Top Tether
Anchor
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Rear-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
Up to 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X X
Forward-Facing Child
Restraint
More than 65 lbs
(29.5 kg)
X
6
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 259
260 SAFETY
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
LATCH Label
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint
anchorage system called LATCH, which stands
for Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The
LATCH system has three vehicle anchor points
for installing LATCH-equipped child seats. There
are two lower anchorages located at the back of
the seat cushion where it meets the seatback
and one top tether anchorage located behind
the seating position. These anchorages are
used to install LATCH-equipped child seats
without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some
seating positions may have a top tether
anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these
seating positions, the seat belt must be used
with the top tether anchorage to install the child
restraint. Please see the following table for
more information.
LATCH Positions For Installing Child
Restraints In This Vehicle
LATCH Positions
Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 Anchorages Per
Seating Position)
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 260
SAFETY 261
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the LATCH
anchorage system to attach the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the com-
bined weight of the child and the child restraint
is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and tether
anchor instead of the LATCH system once the
combined weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt be
used together to attach a rear-facing or for-
ward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-facing
or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat man-
ufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s man-
ual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the center posi-
tion using the inner LATCH lower anchorages
from the outboard seating positions?
Yes
You can install child restraints with flexible lower
anchors in the center position. The inner
anchorages are 16 inches (400 mm) apart. Do
not install child restraints with rigid lower
anchors in the center position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position does
not have dedicated LATCH lower anchorages,
use the seat belt to install a child seat in the
center position next to a child seat using the
LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
6
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 261
262 SAFETY
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback,
below the anchorage symbols on the
seatback. They are just visible when you lean into
the rear seat to install the child restraint. You will
easily feel them if you run your finger along the
gap between the seatback and seat cushion.
Lower Anchorage Location
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
There are tether strap anchorages
behind each rear seating position
located on the back of the seat.
Tether Anchorage Locations
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will
be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap
on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage and
a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and
some rear-facing child restraints will also be
equipped with a tether strap. The tether strap
will have a hook at the end to attach to the top
tether anchorage and a way to tighten the strap
after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower
attachments in the center seating position. Only
install this type of child restraint in the outboard
seating positions. Child restraints with flexible,
webbing mounted lower attachments can be
installed in any rear seating position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the front
passenger seat if the child restraint manufac-
turer also allows contact. See your child
restraint owner’s manual for more information.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 262
SAFETY 263
Always follow the directions of the child
restraint manufacturer when installing your
child restraint. Not all child restraint systems
will be installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child
Restraint
If the selected seating position has a
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
seat belt, stow the seat belt, following the
instructions below. See Ú page 264 to check
what type of seat belt each seating position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. If the
second row seat can be reclined, you may
recline the seat and/or raise the head
restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If
the rear seat can be moved forward and
rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to
move it to its rear-most position to make
room for the child seat. You may also move
the front seat forward to allow more room
for the child seat.
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the
child restraint to the lower anchorages in
the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage. See
Ú page 266 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward into
the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint
manufacturer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts
that are not being used by other occupants or
being used to secure child restraints. An unused
belt could injure a child if they play with it and
accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before
installing a child restraint using the LATCH
system, buckle the seat belt behind the child
restraint and out of the child’s reach. If the
buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of buckling it
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt
through the child restraint belt path and then
buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. Remind all
children in the vehicle that the seat belts are not
toys and that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. If you
are installing LATCH-compatible child
restraints next to each other, you must use
the seat belt for the center position. You can
then use either the LATCH anchors or the
vehicle’s seat belt for installing child seats in
the outboard positions.
Please see Ú page 263 for typical installa-
tion instructions.
6
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 263
264 SAFETY
(Continued)
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
The seat belts in the passenger seating
positions are equipped with a Switchable
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is
designed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is not
necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode
by pulling all of the webbing out of the retractor
and then letting the webbing retract back into
the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make a
clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back
into the retractor.
See the “Automatic Locking Mode” description
Ú page 239 for additional information on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Locations
WARNING!
Improper installation of a child restraint to
the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of
the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer’s directions exactly when
installing an infant or child restraint.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to
withstand only those loads imposed by
correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no
circumstances are they to be used for adult
seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other
items or equipment to the vehicle.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
WARNING! (Continued)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 264
SAFETY 265
(Continued)
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. If the second row seat can
be reclined, you may recline the seat and/
or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to
get a better fit. If the rear seat can be
moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt path
of the child restraint. Do not twist the belt
webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you
hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion
tight against the child seat.
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight
of the child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor
with the seat belt to attach a forward facing
child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using the
seat belt to install a forward facing child
restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of
the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the
back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat and
the child restraint is allowed, if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the rear head restraints be removed? No
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the
seat belt against the belt path of the child
restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating posi-
tion with an ALR retractor.
WARNING!
Improper installation or failure to properly
secure a child restraint can lead to failure
of the restraint. The child could be badly
injured or killed.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an infant
or child restraint.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 265
266 SAFETY
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract
back into the retractor. As the webbing
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound. This
means the seat belt is now in the Automatic
Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to pull
out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle seat.
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap. See
Ú page 266 for directions to attach a tether
anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the child
seat at the belt path. It should not move
more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage:
1. Look behind the seating position where
you plan to install the child restraint to find
the tether anchorage. You may need to
move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchorage. If there is
no top tether anchorage for that seating
position, move the child restraint to
another position in the vehicle if one is
available.
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the anchor
and the child seat. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head
restraints, raise the head restraint, and
where possible, route the tether strap under
the head restraint and between the two
posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around
the outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing
car seat to any location in front of the car
seat, including the seat frame or a tether
anchorage. Only attach the tether strap of a
rear-facing car seat to the tether anchorage
that is approved for that seating position,
located behind the top of the vehicle seat.
See Ú page 260 for the location of approved
tether anchorages in your vehicle.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 266
SAFETY 267
4. Remove slack in the tether strap according
to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
Rear Seat Tether Anchors
SAFETY TIPS
TRANSPORTING PASSENGERS
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
TRANSPORTING PETS
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a
passenger during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that
are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD MAKE
I
NSIDE THE VEHICLE
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must
be replaced after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.). If there is any question regarding seat belt
or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag Warning Light will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition switch is first placed in the ON/RUN
position. If the light is either not on during
starting, stays on, or turns on while driving, have
the system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. After the bulb check, this light
will illuminate with a single chime when a fault
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could
lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the
anchorage position directly behind the child
seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear
seat, make sure the tether strap does not
slip into the opening between the seat-
backs as you remove slack in the strap.
WARNING!
Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat
build-up may cause serious injury or death.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
6
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 267
268 SAFETY
(Continued)
(Continued)
with the Air Bag System has been detected. It
will stay on until the fault is removed. If the light
comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately Ú page 231.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode
and place the blower control on high speed. You
should be able to feel the air directed against
the windshield. See an authorized dealer for
service if your defroster is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
interfere with the operation of the accelerator,
brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor mat that
is securely attached using the floor mat
fasteners so it cannot slip out of position and
interfere with the accelerator, brake or clutch
pedals or impair safe operation of your vehicle
in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or
stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat fas-
teners may cause your floor mat to interfere
with the accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals
and cause a loss of vehicle control. To pre-
vent SERIOUS INJURY or DEATH:
ALWAYS securely attach your floor mat
using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT
install your floor mat upside down or turn
your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm
mat is secured using the floor mat
fasteners on a regular basis.
ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR
MAT FROM THE VEHICLE before
installing any other floor mat. NEVER install
or stack an additional floor mat on top of an
existing floor mat.
ONLY install floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that
cannot be properly attached and secured to
your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be
replaced, only use a FCA approved floor
mat for the specific make, model, and year
of your vehicle.
ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on the
driver’s side floor area. To check for inter-
ference, with the vehicle properly parked
with the engine off, fully depress the accel-
erator, the brake, and the clutch pedal (if
present) to check for interference. If your
floor mat interferes with the operation of
any pedal, or is not secure to the floor,
remove the floor mat from the vehicle and
place the floor mat in your trunk.
ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat on
the passenger’s side floor area.
ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area when
the vehicle is moving. Objects can become
trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch
pedals and could cause a loss of vehicle
control.
NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the floor mat
and may cause interference with the accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 268
SAFETY 269
(Continued)
PERIODIC SAFETY CHECKS YOU SHOULD
M
AKE OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones, nails,
glass, or other objects lodged in the tread or
sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts and cracks.
Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.
Check the lug nut/bolt torque for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold
inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under the vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks.
Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or if fuel or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause
should be located and corrected immediately.
EXHAUST GAS
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have an authorized dealer inspect the complete
exhaust system and adjacent body areas for
broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system each time
the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
If the vehicle carpet has been removed and
re-installed, always properly attach carpet
to the floor and check the floor mat
fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet.
Fully depress each pedal to check for inter-
ference with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats.
It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat has
been properly installed and is secured to
your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners
by lightly pulling mat.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain
carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and
odorless. Breathing it can make you uncon-
scious and can eventually poison you. To
avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or
in confined areas any longer than needed
to move your vehicle in or out of the area.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/
liftgate/rear doors open, make sure that all
windows are closed and the climate control
BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO
NOT use the recirculation mode.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle
with the engine running, adjust your heating
or cooling controls to force outside air into
the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
WARNING! (Continued)
6
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 269
270 SAFETY
CARBON MONOXIDE WARNINGS
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is
deadly. Follow the precautions below to pre-
vent carbon monoxide poisoning:
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain
carbon monoxide, a colorless and odorless
gas, which can kill. Never run the engine in
a closed area, such as a garage, and never
sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running for an extended period. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the
engine running for more than a short
period, adjust the ventilation system to
force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
Guard against carbon monoxide with
proper maintenance. Have the exhaust
system inspected every time the vehicle is
raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with
all side windows fully open.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 270
271
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning Flashers switch is located
in the lower center area of the instrument
panel.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be equipped with an Emer-
gency Stop Signal (ESS) Ú page 217.
Hazard Warning Flashers Switch
Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
Flashers. When the switch is activated, all
directional turn signals will flash on and off to
warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push
the switch a second time to turn off the Hazard
Warning Flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled and
it is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning Flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use, the Hazard Warning
Flashers may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR — IF EQUIPPED
Assist And SOS Mirror
If equipped, the Rearview mirror contains an
SOS and ASSIST an button.
1 — SOS Button
2 — ASSIST Button
7
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 271
272 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber Ú page 360.
The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only func-
tion if you are connected to an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network, which
comes as a built in function. Other Uconnect
services will only be operable if your SiriusXM
Guardian™ service is active and you are
connected to an operable LTE (voice/data) or
4G (data) network.
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following support
centers:
Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or
need a tow, just push the ASSIST button and
you will be connected to a representative for
assistance. Roadside Assistance will know
what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside assis-
tance.
SiriusXM Guardian™ Customer Care –
In-vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian™.
Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all
other vehicle issues.
SOS Call
1. Press or hold the SOS Call button on the
Rearview Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in error,
there will be a 10 second delay before the SOS
Call system initiates a call to a SOS operator. To
cancel the SOS Call connection, push the SOS
call button on the Rearview Mirror or press the
cancellation button on the Device Screen.
Termination of the SOS Call will turn off the
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the SOS and
ASSIST buttons on the Rearview Mirror will
turn green once a connection to a SOS
operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle and
a SOS operator is made, the SOS Call
system may transmit the following
important vehicle information to a SOS
operator:
Indication that the occupant placed a
SOS Call
The vehicle brand
The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system
to determine if additional assistance is
needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full responsi-
bility and assume all risks related to the use
of the features and applications in this vehi-
cle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 272
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 273
(Continued)
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS oper-
ator, the SOS operator may be able to open a
voice connection with the vehicle to deter-
mine if additional assistance is needed. Once
the SOS operator opens a voice connection
with the vehicle’s SOS Call system, the oper-
ator should be able to speak with you or other
vehicle occupants and hear sounds occurring
in the vehicle. The vehicle’s SOS Call system
will attempt to remain connected with the
SOS operator until the SOS operator termi-
nates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle
information and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full responsi-
bility and assume all risks related to the use
of the features and applications in this vehi-
cle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
WARNING!
If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger
(e.g., fire or smoke is visible, dangerous
road conditions or location), do not wait for
voice contact from an Emergency Services
Agent. All occupants should exit the vehicle
immediately and move to a safe location.
Never place anything on or near the
vehicle’s operable network and GPS
antennas. You could prevent operable
network and GPS signal reception, which
can prevent your vehicle from placing an
emergency call. An operable network and
GPS signal reception is required for the SOS
Call system to function properly.
The SOS Call system is embedded into the
vehicle’s electrical system. Do not add
aftermarket electrical equipment to the
vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a signal
to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-
ference that can cause the SOS Call system
to fail, never add aftermarket equipment
(e.g., two-way mobile radio, CB radio, data
recorder, etc.) to your vehicle’s electrical
system or modify the antennas on your
vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING
DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE
UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND
SERVICES, AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT
OPERATE.
Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to
fail when you need it. You could be injured
if the air bag system is not there to help
protect you.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 273
274 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in
Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS
system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the beginning of
each ignition cycle:
The Rearview Mirror light located between
the SOS and ASSIST buttons will continuously
illuminate red.
The Device Screen will display the following
message “Vehicle device requires service.
Please contact an authorized dealer.”
An In-Vehicle Audio message will state
“Vehicle device requires service. Please
contact an authorized dealer.”
Even if the SOS Call system is fully functional,
factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control may
prevent or stop the SOS Call system operation.
These include, but are not limited to, the
following factors:
The ignition is in the OFF position
The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact
The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
ware are damaged during a crash
The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network and/or
Global Positioning Satellite signals are
unavailable or obstructed
Equipment malfunction at the SOS operator
facility
Operator error by the SOS operator
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
congestion
Weather
Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or
tunnels
WARNING!
Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could
mean you will not have SOS Call services. If
the Rearview Mirror light is illuminated,
have an authorized dealer service the SOS
Call system immediately.
The Occupant Restraint Control module
turns on the air bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any
part of the system is detected. If the Air Bag
Warning Light is illuminated, have an
authorized dealer service the Occupant
Restraint Control system immediately.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to
the road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands
on the steering wheel. You have full responsi-
bility and assume all risks related to the use
of the features and applications in this vehi-
cle. Only use the features and applications
when it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may
result in an accident involving serious injury
or death.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 274
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 275
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber Ú page 360.
Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s
LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal reception,
which can prevent your vehicle from placing
an emergency call. An operable LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) network connection and a
GPS signal is required for the SOS Call
system to function properly.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to operate
the equipment.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
PREPARATIONS FOR JACKING
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as
far from the edge of the roadway as
possible. Avoid icy or slippery areas.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Place the ignition in the OFF position.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during clean-
ing, never spray any cleaning solution directly
onto the mirror. Apply the solution onto a
clean cloth and wipe the mirror clean.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid the danger
of being hit when operating the jack or
changing the wheel.
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is
dangerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be crushed.
Never put any part of your body under a
vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get
under a raised vehicle, take it to a service
center where it can be raised on a lift.
Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
The jack is designed to be used as a tool for
changing tires only. The jack should not be
used to lift the vehicle for service purposes.
The vehicle should be jacked on a firm level
surface only. Avoid ice or slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of
the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far
enough off the road to avoid being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
7
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 275
276 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
5. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position. For
example, if the driver’s front wheel is being
changed, block the passenger’s rear wheel.
Wheel Blocked
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being lifted or raised.
JACK LOCATION /SPARE TIRE STOWAGE
If equipped, the jack and tools are located in the
rear storage compartment, below the spare tire.
NOTE:
Items may vary depending on the trim level.
Jack And Tools Location
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor
handle.
Load Floor Handle
3. Remove the fastener securing the spare
tire, and remove the spare wheel from the
vehicle. The jack will be found beneath.
Spare Tire Fastener
1 — Jack
2 — Alignment Pin
3 — Wheel Bolt Wrench
4 — Emergency Funnel
5 — Screwdriver
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 276
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 277
(Continued)
4. Remove the alignment pin from the middle,
rotate the jack counterclockwise, and lift it
from the foam tray.
5. Remove the jack and wheel bolt wrench.
Jack And Tools
JACKING INSTRUCTIONS
1 — Wheel Bolt Wrench
2 — Jack
3 — Emergency Funnel
4 — Screwdriver
5 — Alignment Pin
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could endanger the occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places pro-
vided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings
to help prevent personal injury or damage to
your vehicle:
Always park on a firm, level surface as far
from the edge of the roadway as possible
before raising the vehicle.
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flashers.
Apply the parking brake firmly and set the
transmission in PARK.
Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it
is on a jack.
Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a
jack. If you need to get under a raised
vehicle, take it to a service center where it
can be raised on a lift.
Only use the jack in the positions indicated
and for lifting this vehicle during a tire
change.
If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated,
are securely stowed, spares must be
stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
WARNING! (Continued)
7
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 277
278 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Jack Warning Label
1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel bolt
wrench.
2. If equipped with aluminum wheels where
the center cap covers the wheel bolts, use
the wheel bolt wrench to pry the center cap
off carefully before raising the vehicle.
3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel
bolt wrench to loosen, but not remove, the
wheel bolts on the wheel with the flat tire.
Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise one
turn while the wheel is still on the ground.
4. Place the jack underneath the lift area that
is closest to the flat tire. Turn the jack screw
clockwise to firmly engage the jack saddle
with the lift area of the sill flange, centering
the jack saddle inside the cutout in the sill
cladding.
Jacking Locations
Front Lifting Point
Front Jacking Location
Rear Lifting Point
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking
on locations other than those indicated in the
Jacking Instructions for this vehicle.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 278
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 279
Rear Jacking Location
5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove the
flat tire.
6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.
7. Remove the alignment pin from the jack
assembly and thread the pin into the wheel
hub to assist in mounting the spare tire.
8. Mount the spare tire.
Mounting Spare Tire
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped, do not attempt to
install a center cap or wheel cover on the
compact spare.
For additional warnings, cautions, and infor-
mation about the spare tire, its use, and
operation Ú page 330.
9. Install and lightly tighten the wheel bolts.
10. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
11. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push
down on the wrench while at the end of the
handle for increased leverage. Tighten the
wheel bolts in a star pattern until each
wheel bolt has been tightened twice
Ú page 351. If in doubt about the correct
tightness, have them checked with a torque
wrench by an authorized dealer or at a
service station.
12. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the
wheel blocks. Reassemble the lug wrench
to the jack assembly and stow it in the spare
tire area. Secure the assembly using the
means provided. Release the parking brake
before driving the vehicle.
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can
make the vehicle less stable. It could slip off
the jack and hurt someone near it. Raise the
vehicle only enough to remove the tire.
CAUTION!
Be sure to mount the spare tire with the valve
stem facing outward. The vehicle could be
damaged if the spare tire is mounted incor-
rectly.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts fully until
the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to fol-
low this warning may result in serious injury.
7
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 279
280 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
13. After 25 miles (40 km), check the wheel
bolt torque with a torque wrench to ensure
that all wheel bolts are properly seated
against the wheel.
14. Place the jack on the foam tray and open it
far enough so that it is secured. Once
placed in position, rotate it clockwise to lock
it in. Replace the alignment pin in the center
hole to lock the jack in place.
TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire
Service Kit. Small punctures up to 1/4 inch
(6 mm) in the tire tread can be sealed with Tire
Service Kit. Foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) should not be removed from the tire. Tire
Service Kit can be used in outside temperatures
down to approximately -4°F (-20°C). This kit will
provide a temporary tire seal, allowing you to
drive your vehicle up to 100 miles (160 km)
with a maximum speed of 50 mph (80 km/h).
Tire Service Kit Storage
The Tire Service Kit is stowed under the load
floor behind the rear seat.
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the access cover using the load floor
handle.
Load Floor Handle
Tire Service Kit And Components And Operation
Tire Service Kit Components
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a colli-
sion or hard stop could endanger the occu-
pants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack
parts and the spare tire in the places pro-
vided. Have the deflated (flat) tire repaired or
replaced immediately.
1 — Mode Select Knob
2 — Sealant/Air Hose
3 — Hose Accessories
4 — Sealant Bottle
5 — Power Plug
6 — Power Switch
7 — Deflation Button
8 — Pressure Gauge
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 280
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 281
(Continued)
Using The Mode Select Knob And Hoses
Your Tire Service Kit is equipped with the
following symbols to indicate the air or sealant
mode.
Selecting Air Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position for air pump
operation only.
Selecting Sealant Mode
Push in the Mode Select Knob and
turn to this position to inject the
Tire Service Kit Sealant and to
inflate the tire.
Using The Power Button
Push and release the Power Button
once to turn the Tire Service Kit on.
Push and release the Power Button
again to turn the Tire Service Kit
off.
Using The Deflation Button
Push the Deflation Button to
reduce the air pressure in the tire if
it becomes overinflated.
Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions
Replace the Tire Service Kit Sealant Bottle
prior to the expiration date (printed at the
lower right hand corner on the bottle label) to
assure optimum operation of the system.
The Sealant Bottle is a one tire application
use and needs to be replaced after each use.
Always replace these components immedi-
ately at your original equipment vehicle
dealer.
When the Tire Service Kit sealant is in a liquid
form, clean water, and a damp cloth will
remove the material from the vehicle or tire
and wheel components. Once the sealant
dries, it can easily be peeled off and properly
discarded.
For optimum performance, make sure the
valve stem on the wheel is free of debris
before connecting the Tire Service Kit.
You can use the Tire Service Kit air pump to
inflate bicycle tires. The kit also comes with
two needles, located in the Accessory
Storage Compartment (on the bottom of the
air pump) for inflating sport balls, rafts, or
similar inflatable items. However, use only
the Air Pump and make sure the Mode Select
Knob is in the Air Mode when inflating such
items to avoid injecting sealant into them.
The Tire Service Kit Sealant is only intended
to seal punctures less than 1/4 inch (6 mm)
diameter in the tread of your vehicle.
Do not lift or carry the Tire Service Kit by the
hoses.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side of
the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far enough
off the road to avoid the danger of being hit
when using the Tire Service Kit.
Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the
vehicle under the following circumstances:
If the puncture in the tire tread is
approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or
larger.
If the tire has any sidewall damage.
If the tire has any damage from driving
with extremely low tire pressure.
If the tire has any damage from driving
on a flat tire.
7
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 281
282 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
Sealing A Tire With Tire Service Kit
Whenever You Stop To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Pull over to a safe location and turn on the
vehicle’s Hazard Warning Flashers.
2. Verify that the valve stem (on the wheel with
the deflated tire) is in a position that is near
to the ground. This will allow the Tire Service
Kit Hose to reach the valve stem and keep
the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground. This
will provide the best positioning of the kit
when injecting the sealant into the deflated
tire and running the air pump. Move the
vehicle as necessary to place the valve
stem in this position before proceeding.
3. Place the transmission in PARK and cycle
the ignition in the OFF position.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Setting Up To Use Tire Service Kit:
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose and then remove
the cap from the fitting at the end of the
hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground
next to the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve
stem and then screw the fitting at the
end of the Sealant Hose onto the
valve stem.
4. Uncoil the Power Plug and insert
the plug into the vehicle’s 12 Volt
power outlet.
NOTE:
Do not remove foreign objects (e.g., screws or
nails) from the tire.
If the wheel has any damage.
If you are unsure of the condition of the
tire or the wheel.
Keep Tire Service Kit away from open
flames or heat source.
A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
Tire Service Kit in the place provided.
Failure to follow these warnings can result
in injuries that are serious or fatal to you,
your passengers, and others around you.
Take care not to allow the contents of Tire
Service Kit to come in contact with hair,
eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit sealant is
harmful if inhaled, swallowed, or absorbed
through the skin. It causes skin, eye, and
respiratory irritation. Flush immediately
with plenty of water if there is any contact
with eyes or skin. Change clothing as soon
as possible, if there is any contact with
clothing.
WARNING! (Continued)
Tire Service Kit Sealant solution contains
latex. In case of an allergic reaction or rash,
consult a physician immediately. Keep Tire
Service Kit out of reach of children. If swal-
lowed, rinse mouth immediately with plenty
of water and drink plenty of water. Do not
induce vomiting! Consult a physician imme-
diately.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 282
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 283
Injecting Tire Service Kit Sealant Into The
Deflated Tire:
1. Always start the vehicle before
turning the Tire Service Kit on.
2. Ensure the Mode Select Knob is to
the Sealant Mode position.
3. After pushing the Power Button, the
sealant (white fluid) will flow from the
Sealant Bottle through the Sealant
Hose and into the tire.
NOTE:
Sealant may leak out through the puncture in
the tire.
If the sealant (white fluid) does not flow within
0 – 10 seconds through the Sealant Hose:
1. Push the Power Button to turn the Tire
Service Kit off. Disconnect the Sealant
Hose from the valve stem. Make sure the
valve stem is free of debris. Reconnect the
Sealant Hose to the valve stem. Check that
the Mode Select Knob is in the Sealant
Mode position and not Air Mode. Push the
Power Button to turn the Tire Service Kit
on.
2. Connect the Power Plug to a different
12 Volt power outlet in your vehicle or
another vehicle, if available. Make sure the
vehicle is running before turning the Tire
Service Kit on.
3. The Sealant Bottle may be empty due to
previous use. Call for assistance.
If the sealant (white fluid) does flow through the
Sealant Hose:
1. Continue to operate the pump
until sealant is no longer flowing
through hose (typically takes 30 -
70 seconds). As the sealant flows
through the Sealant Hose, the Pressure Gauge
can read as high as 70 psi (4.8 Bar). The
Pressure Gauge will decrease quickly from
approximately 70 psi (4.8 Bar) to the actual
tire pressure when the Sealant Bottle is empty.
2. The pump will start to inject air into
the tire immediately after the Sealant
Bottle is empty. Continue to operate
the pump and inflate the tire to the
cold tire inflation pressure found on the tire and
loading information label located in the
driver-side door opening. Check the tire
pressure by looking at the Pressure Gauge.
If the tire does not inflate to at least 26 psi
(1.8 Bar) pressure within 15 minutes:
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt
to drive the vehicle further. Call for assis-
tance.
If the tire inflates to the recommended pressure
or is at least 26 psi (1.8 Bar) pressure within
15 minutes:
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the
recommended inflation pressure before
continuing.
1.Push the Power Button to turn off
the Tire Service Kit.
2.Remove the speed limit label from
the Tire Service Kit and place sticker
on the steering wheel.
3. Immediately disconnect the Sealant Hose
from the valve stem, reinstall the cap on the
fitting at the end of the hose, and place the
Tire Service Kit in the vehicle storage
location.
7
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 283
284 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Drive Vehicle:
Immediately after injecting sealant
and inflating the tire, drive the vehicle
5 miles (8 km) or 10 minutes to
ensure distribution of the Tire Service
Kit Sealant within the tire. Do not exceed
50 mph (80 km/h).
After Driving:
Pull over to a safe location.
1. Uncoil the Sealant Hose, and then remove
the cap from the fitting at the end of the
hose.
2. Place the Tire Service Kit flat on the ground
next to the deflated tire.
3. Remove the cap from the valve
stem, and then screw the fitting at the
end of the Sealant Hose onto the
valve stem.
4. Uncoil the power plug and insert
the plug into the vehicle's 12 Volt
power outlet.
5. Uncoil the Hose and screw the
fitting at the end of the hose onto the
valve stem.
6. Turn the Mode Select Knob and
turn to the Air Mode position.
7. Check the pressure in the tire by reading the
Pressure Gauge.
If tire pressure is less than 19 psi (1.3 Bar):
The tire is too badly damaged. Do not attempt to
drive the vehicle further. Call for assistance.
If the tire pressure is 19 psi (1.3 Bar) or higher:
1. Push the Power Button to turn on
Tire Service Kit and inflate the tire to
the cold tire inflation pressure found
on the tire and loading information
label located in the driver-side door opening.
NOTE:
If the tire becomes overinflated, push the Defla-
tion Button to reduce the tire pressure to the
recommended inflation pressure before
continuing.
2. Disconnect the Tire Service Kit from the
valve stem, reinstall the cap on the valve
stem and unplug from 12 Volt outlet.
3. Place the Tire Service Kit in its proper
storage area in the vehicle.
4. Have the tire inspected and repaired or
replaced at the earliest opportunity at an
authorized dealer or tire service center.
5. Remove the Speed Limit sticker from the
steering wheel after the tire has been
repaired.
6. Replace the Sealant Bottle at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
NOTE:
When having the tire serviced, advise the autho-
rized dealer or service center that the tire has
been sealed using the Tire Service Kit.
WARNING!
The Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat
tire repair. Have the tire inspected and
repaired or replaced after using the Tire Ser-
vice Kit. Do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h)
until the tire is repaired or replaced. Failure to
follow this warning can result in injuries that
are serious or fatal to you, your passengers,
and others around you. Have the tire checked
as soon as possible at an authorized dealer.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 284
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 285
Sealant Bottle Replacement:
1. Unwrap the power cord.
2. Unwrap the hose.
Unwrap The Hose
3. Remove the bottle cover.
Remove The Bottle Cover
4. Rotate the bottle up beyond vertical to
release.
Rotate The Bottle Up
5. Pull the bottle away from the Compressor.
Remove The Bottle
NOTE:
For sealant bottle installation, follow these
steps in reverse order.
Replacement sealant bottles are available at
authorized service centers.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so please
follow the procedures in this section carefully.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer’s operating instruc-
tions and precautions.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is
frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause
personal injury.
7
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 285
286 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
PREPARATIONS FOR JUMP START
The battery in your vehicle is located in the front
of the engine compartment, behind the left
headlight assembly.
Under Hood Battery Location
NOTE:
The positive battery post is covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access
to the post.
Battery Post Cover
Positive (+) Battery Post
See below steps to prepare for jump starting:
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the
automatic transmission into PARK (P) and
turn the ignition to OFF/LOCK.
2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all electrical
accessories.
3. Pull upward and remove the protective
cover over the remote positive (+) battery
post.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the jumper
cables reach, set the parking brake and
make sure the ignition is OFF/LOCK.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack or
any other booster source with a system volt-
age greater than 12 Volts or damage to the
battery, starter motor, alternator or electrical
system may occur.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan
whenever the hood is raised. It can start
anytime the ignition switch is ON. You can
be injured by moving fan blades.
Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact. You
could be seriously injured.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 286
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 287
JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive
(+) end of the jumper
cable to the positive (+)
post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the
booster battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the booster
battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable to a good engine ground
(exposed metal part of the discharged
vehicle’s engine) away from the battery and
the fuel injection system.
Suitable Engine Ground (Example Engine Shown)
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle for a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
6. Once the engine is started, follow the
disconnecting procedure below.
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative
(-)
end of the
jumper cable from the engine ground of
the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-)
jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as
this could establish a ground connection and
personal injury could result.
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting procedure
could result in personal injury or property
damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could
result in damage to the charging system of
the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the nega-
tive (-) post of the discharged battery. The
resulting electrical spark could cause the bat-
tery to explode and could result in personal
injury. Only use the specific ground point, do
not use any other exposed metal parts.
7
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 287
288 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+)
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
If frequent jump starting is required to start your
vehicle, you should have the battery and
charging system inspected at an authorized
dealer.
REFUELING IN EMERGENCY – IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle is equipped with a refueling funnel.
If refueling is necessary, while using an
approved gas can, please insert the refueling
funnel into the filler neck opening. Take care to
open both flappers with the funnel to avoid
spills.
Refueling Funnel
Inserting Funnel
Emergency Gas Can Refueling
Most gas cans will not open the flapper doors.
A funnel is provided to allow emergency
refueling with a gas can.
See below steps for refueling
1. Retrieve funnel from the spare tire storage
area.
2. Insert funnel into same filler pipe opening
as the fuel nozzle.
3. Ensure funnel is inserted fully to hold
flapper doors open.
4. Pour fuel into funnel opening.
5. Remove funnel from filler pipe, clean off
prior to putting back in the spare tire
storage area.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle power
outlets draw power from the vehicle’s battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular devices,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long enough
without engine operation, the vehicle’s bat-
tery will discharge sufficiently to degrade bat-
tery life and/or prevent the engine from
starting.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not
“top off” the fuel tank after filling.
WARNING!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or
near the vehicle when the fuel door is open
or the tank is being filled.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 288
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 289
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
If the vehicle is overheating, it will need to be
serviced by an authorized dealer.
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating your
engine by taking the appropriate action.
On the highways — slow down.
In city traffic — while stopped, place the trans-
mission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase
engine idle speed.
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition:
If your Air Conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
You can also turn the temperature control to
maximum heat, the mode control to floor and
the blower control to high. This allows the
heater core to act as a supplement to the
radiator and aids in removing heat from the
engine cooling system.
GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE
If a malfunction occurs, and the gear selector
cannot be moved out of the PARK position, you
can use the following procedure to temporarily
move the gear selector:
1. Turn the engine OFF.
2. Apply the park brake.
Never add fuel when the engine is running.
This is in violation of most state and federal
fire regulations and may cause the
“Malfunction Indicator Light” to turn on.
A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always place
fuel containers on the ground while filling.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could dam-
age your vehicle. If the temperature gauge
reads “H,” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle
the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off
until the pointer drops back into the normal
range. If the pointer remains on the “H” and
you hear continuous chimes, turn the engine
off immediately and call for service.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam coming
from under the hood, do not open the hood
until the radiator has had time to cool. Never
try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
7
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 289
290 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
3. Grab the boot material rearward of the gear
selector and pull up to carefully separate
the gear selector bezel and boot assembly
from the center console.
Gear Selector Bezel
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool
down into the gear selector override access
hole (at the right rear corner of the gear
selector assembly), and push and hold the
override release lever down.
Gear Selector Override Access Hole
6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL (N)
position.
7. The vehicle may then be started in
NEUTRAL.
8. Reinstall the gear selector boot.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left to
clear the area around the front wheels. Push
and hold the lock button on the gear selector.
Then shift back and forth between DRIVE (D)
and REVERSE (R) while gently pressing the
accelerator.
NOTE:
Shifts between DRIVE (D) and REVERSE (R) can
only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission
remains in NEUTRAL (N) for more than two
seconds, you must press the brake pedal to
engage DRIVE (D) or REVERSE (R).
Use the least amount of accelerator pedal
pressure that will maintain the rocking motion
without spinning the wheels or racing the
engine.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause damage, or even failure, of the axle
and tires. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle's wheels
faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer
than 30 seconds continuously without stop-
ping when you are stuck and do not let any-
one near a spinning wheel, no matter what
the speed.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 290
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 291
(Continued)
NOTE:
Push the ESC OFF switch (if necessary), to place
the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in
“Partial Off” mode, before rocking the vehicle
Ú page 214. Once the vehicle has been freed,
push the ESC OFF switch again to restore “ESC
On” mode.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels
may lead to transmission overheating and
failure. Allow the engine to idle with the
transmission in NEUTRAL for at least one
minute after every five rocking-motion
cycles. This will minimize overheating and
reduce the risk of clutch or transmission
failure during prolonged efforts to free a
stuck vehicle.
When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting
between DRIVE/SECOND gear and
REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
Revving the engine or spinning the wheels
too fast may lead to transmission over-
heating and failure. It can also damage the
tires. Do not spin the wheels above 30 mph
(48 km/h) while in gear (no transmission
shifting occurring).
CAUTION! (Continued)
7
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 291
292 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing service.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to
prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only tow
bars and other equipment designed for this
purpose, following equipment manufacturer’s
instructions. Use of safety chains is mandatory.
Attach a tow bar or other towing devices to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to
fascia/bumper or associated brackets. State
and local laws regarding vehicles under tow
must be observed.
NOTE:
You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake
feature is disabled before towing this vehicle
to avoid inadvertent Electric Park Brake
engagement. The Auto Park Brake feature is
enabled or disabled via the customer
programmable features in the Uconnect
Settings.
Vehicles with a discharged battery, or total
electrical failure when the Electric Park Brake
(EPB) is engaged, will need a wheel dolly or
jack to raise the rear wheels off the ground
when moving the vehicle onto a flatbed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers,
defrosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN mode.
Note that the Safehold feature will engage the
Electric Park Brake whenever the driver's door
is opened (if the battery is connected, ignition is
ON, transmission is not in PARK, and brake
pedal is released). If you are towing this vehicle
with the ignition in the ON/RUN mode, you must
manually disable the Electric Park Brake each
time the driver's door is opened by pressing the
brake pedal and then releasing the EPB.
If the vehicle’s battery is discharged,
instructions on shifting the automatic
transmission out of PARK so that the vehicle
can be moved Ú page 289.
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground FWD MODELS 4X4 MODELS
Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Rear NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED
Front OK NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD ONLY METHOD
CAUTION!
Do not use sling-type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-
sion components. Damage to your vehicle
may result from improper towing.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 292
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 293
(Continued)
WITHOUT THE KEY FOB
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is
towed with the ignition in the OFF/LOCK mode.
The only approved method of towing without the
key fob is with a flatbed truck. Proper towing
equipment is necessary to prevent damage to
the vehicle.
FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) M ODELS
— W
ITH KEY FOB
FCA US LLC recommends towing your vehicle
with all four wheels OFF the ground using a
flatbed.
If flatbed equipment is not available, this
vehicle must be towed with the front wheels
OFF the ground (using a towing dolly, or wheel
lift equipment with the front wheels raised).
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released,
and remains released, while being towed. The
Electric Park Brake does not need to be
released if all four wheels are OFF the ground.
4X4 MODELS
FCA US LLC requires towing with all four wheels
OFF the ground.
Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a
flatbed, or with one end of the vehicle raised
and the opposite end on a towing dolly.
EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF
E
QUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks, there
will be one in the rear and two mounted on the
front of the vehicle. The rear hook will be
located on the driver's side of the vehicle.
Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is
released, and remains released, while
being towed.
Do not use a fascia/bumper mounted
clamp-on tow bar on your vehicle. The
fascia/bumper face bar will be damaged.
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe engine and/
or transmission damage. Damage from
improper towing is not covered under the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used (if
the remaining wheels are on the ground).
Internal damage to the transmission or
transfer case will occur if a front or rear
wheel lift is used when towing.
Towing this vehicle in violation of the above
requirements can cause severe transmis-
sion and/or transfer case damage.
Damage from improper towing is not
covered under the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
Proper towing or lifting equipment is
required to prevent damage to your vehicle.
Use only tow bars and other equipment
designed for this purpose, following equip-
ment manufacturer's instructions.
Use of safety chains is mandatory. Attach a
tow bar or other towing devices to main
structural members of the vehicle, not to
fascia/bumper or associated brackets.
CAUTION! (Continued)
7
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 293
294 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
(Continued)
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use
both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk
of damage to the vehicle.
Front Tow Hooks Location
Rear Tow Hook Location
Vehicles With Keyless Enter-N-Go
Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position, and
subsequently in OFF/LOCK, without opening the
door. During towing, remember that not having
the aid of the power brakes and the electrome-
chanical power steering will require greater
force when applying the brakes and steering of
the vehicle.
TOW EYE USAGE — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle is equipped with a tow eye that can
be used to move a disabled vehicle.
When using a tow eye, follow the precautions
below.
Tow Eye
Tow Eye Usage Precautions
WARNING!
Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing serious
injury or death.
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with
tow hooks. Tow straps may become disen-
gaged, causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to res-
cue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not use
tow hooks for tow truck hookup or highway
towing. You could damage your vehicle.
CAUTION!
The tow eye must only be used for roadside
emergencies. Use with an appropriate
device in accordance with highway code (a
rigid bar or rope) to maneuver the vehicle in
preparation for transport via a tow truck.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 294
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 295
Tow Eye Warning Label
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE SYSTEM
(EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
This feature is a communication network that
takes effect in the event of an impact
Ú page 252.
EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is
to record data that will assist in understanding
how a vehicle’s systems performed under
certain crash or near crash-like situations, such
as an air bag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle Ú page 255.
The tow eye must not be used to move the
vehicle off the road or where there are
obstacles.
Do not use the tow eyes for tow truck
hookup or highway towing.
Do not use the tow eye to free a stuck
vehicle Ú page 290.
Damage to your vehicle may occur if these
guidelines are not followed.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow
eyes.
Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chains
may break, causing serious injury or death.
Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. Tow
straps may break or become disengaged,
causing serious injury or death.
Failure to follow proper tow eye usage may
cause components to break resulting in
serious injury or death.
7
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 295
296
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil
change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is time to
take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate in the
instrument cluster. This means that service is
required for your vehicle. Operating conditions
such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow and
extremely hot or cold ambient temperatures will
influence when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change
Required” message is displayed. Have your
vehicle serviced as soon as possible, within the
next 500 miles (805 km).
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil change
is performed by someone other than an
authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under
Instrument Cluster Display Ú page 68.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
one year or 350 hours of engine run time,
whichever comes first. The 350 hours of engine
run or idle time is generally only a concern for
fleet customers.
NOTE:
The Oil Change Indicator will not illuminate
under these conditions.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
Check engine oil level.
Check windshield washer fluid level.
Check the tire inflation pressures and look
for unusual wear or damage. Rotate tires at
the first sign of irregular wear, even if it
occurs before the oil indicator system turns
on.
Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir,
and brake master cylinder reservoir, and fill
as needed.
Check function of all interior and exterior
lights.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 296
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 297
MAINTENANCE PLAN
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for the required maintenance intervals.
NOTE:
Using white lithium grease, lubricate the door hinge roller pivot joints twice a year to prevent premature wear.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil Change Indicator System:
Change oil and filter
Rotate the tires
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator system turns on
Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as required
Inspect the CV/Universal joints
Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, and hoses
Inspect engine cooling system protection and hoses
Inspect exhaust system
Inspect engine air cleaner filter if using in dusty or off-road conditions, replace the engine air cleaner filter if necessary
8
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 297
298 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
If using your vehicle in dusty or off-road condi-
tions, inspect the engine air cleaner, and replace
if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace if necessary. X X X X X X X
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and
boot seals, replace if necessary.
X X X X X X X
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Inspect front accessory drive belt, tensioner, idler
pulley, and replace if necessary.
X
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace the cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace spark plugs.
1
X
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 298
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 299
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 10 years
or 150,000 miles (240,000 km) whichever comes
first.
X X
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
1. The spark plug change interval is mileage based only; yearly intervals do not apply.
Mileage or time passed (whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This
could cause an accident.
8
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 299
300 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.4L ENGINE
1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap
2 — Engine Oil Fill 7 — Secondary Battery
3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir Cap 8 — Coolant Pressure Bottle Cap
4 — Battery 9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 300
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 301
(Continued)
CHECKING OIL LEVEL
To ensure proper engine lubrication, the engine
oil must be maintained at the correct level.
Check the oil level at regular intervals, such as
every fuel stop. The best time to check the
engine oil level is about five minutes after a fully
warmed up engine is shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil level
readings.
There are four possible dipstick types:
Crosshatched zone.
Crosshatched zone marked SAFE.
Crosshatched zone marked with MIN at the
low end of the range and MAX at the high end
of the range.
Crosshatched zone marked with dimples at
the MIN and the MAX ends of the range.
NOTE:
Always maintain the oil level within the cross-
hatch markings on the dipstick.
Adding 1 quart (1 liter) of oil when the reading is
at the low end of the dipstick range will raise the
oil level to the high end of the range marking.
ADDING WASHER FLUID
The fluid reservoir is located in the front of the
engine compartment. Be sure to check the fluid
level in the reservoir at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not
radiator antifreeze) and operate the system for
a few seconds to flush out the residual washer
fluid.
When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take
some washer fluid, apply it to a cloth or towel,
and wipe clean the wiper blades; this will help
blade performance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer
system in cold weather, select a solution or
mixture that meets or exceeds the temperature
range of your climate. This rating information
can be found on most washer fluid containers.
MAINTENANCE -FREE BATTERY
Your vehicle is equipped with a
maintenance-free battery. You will never have
to add water, and periodic maintenance is not
required.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will
cause aeration or loss of oil pressure. This
could damage your engine.
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer
solvents are flammable. They could ignite and
burn you. Care must be exercised when filling
or working around the washer solution.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and
can burn or even blind you. Do not allow
battery fluid to contact your eyes, skin, or
clothing. Do not lean over a battery when
attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes
or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water Ú page 285.
8
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 301
302 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PRESSURE WASHING
Cleaning the engine compartment with a high
pressure washer is not recommended.
VEHICLE MAINTENANCE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before
attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could
result in civil penalties being assessed against
you.
ENGINE OIL
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection
under all types of operating conditions, FCA only
recommends engine oils that are API certified
and meet the requirements of FCA Material
Standard MS-6395.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine
Oil Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). FCA only
recommends API Certified engine oils.
This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30,
5W-30 and 10W-30 engine oils.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or any
other booster source with an output greater
than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
Battery posts, terminals, and related acces-
sories contain lead and lead compounds.
Wash hands after handling.
CAUTION!
It is essential when replacing the cables on
the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the nega-
tive cable is attached to the negative post.
Battery posts are marked positive (+) and
negative (-) and are identified on the battery
case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery
is in the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle
battery cables before connecting the
charger to the battery. Do not use a “fast
charger” to provide starting voltage.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Precautions have been taken to safeguard all
parts and connections however, the pres-
sures generated by these machines is such
that complete protection against water
ingress cannot be guaranteed.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service work
for which you have the knowledge and the
proper equipment. If you have any doubt
about your ability to perform a service job,
take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 302
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 303
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the
recommended oil quality requirements are met,
and the recommended maintenance intervals
for oil and filter changes are followed.
Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the
engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE
viscosity grade number should not be used.
Materials Added To Engine Oil
FCA strongly recommends against the addition
of any additives (other than leak detection dyes)
to the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired
by supplemental additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil
Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used
engine oil and oil filters from your vehicle. Used
oil and oil filters, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact
an authorized dealer, service station or
governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely
discarded in your area.
ENGINE OIL FILTER
The engine oil filter should be replaced with a
new filter at every engine oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
A full-flow type disposable oil filter should be
used for replacement. The quality of
replacement filters varies considerably. Only
high quality Mopar certified filters should be
used.
ENGINE AIR CLEANER FILTER
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 297.
NOTE:
Be sure to follow the “Severe Duty Conditions”
maintenance interval if applicable.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement filters varies
considerably. Only high quality Mopar certified
filters should be used.
AIR CONDITIONER MAINTENANCE
For best possible performance, your air
conditioner should be checked and serviced by
an authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning of
the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil
as the chemicals can damage your engine.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehi-
cle Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) can provide a measure of protection in
the case of engine backfire. Do not remove
the air induction system (air cleaner, hoses,
etc.) unless such removal is necessary for
repair or maintenance. Make sure that no
one is near the engine compartment before
starting the vehicle with the air induction sys-
tem (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) removed. Failure
to do so can result in serious personal injury.
8
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 303
304 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a — If Equipped
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is an
ozone-friendly substance. It is recommended
that air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE:
Use only FCA approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil and refrigerants.
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-1234yf — If Equipped
R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a
hydrofluoroolefin (HFO) that is endorsed by the
Environmental Protection Agency and is an
ozone-friendly substance with a low
global-warming potential. It is recommended
that air conditioning service be performed by an
authorized dealer using recovery and recycling
equipment.
NOTE:
Use only FCA approved A/C system PAG
compressor oil, and refrigerants.
Cabin Air Filter
See an authorized dealer for service.
BODY LUBRICATION
Locks and all body pivot points, including such
items as seat tracks, door hinge pivot points
and rollers, liftgate, tailgate, decklid, sliding
doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated
periodically with a lithium-based grease, such
as Mopar Spray White Lube to ensure quiet,
easy operation and to protect against rust and
wear. Prior to the application of any lubricant,
the parts concerned should be wiped clean to
remove dust and grit; after lubricating, excess
oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching
components to ensure proper function. When
performing other underhood services, the hood
latch, release mechanism and safety catch
should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated
twice a year, preferably in the Autumn and
Spring. Apply a small amount of a high quality
lubricant, such as Mopar Lock Cylinder
Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
WARNING!
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubri-
cants approved by FCA for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved
refrigerants are flammable and can
explode, injuring you. Other unapproved
refrigerants or lubricants can cause the
system to fail, requiring costly repairs.
Refer to Warranty Information Book,
located in your owner’s information kit, for
further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrig-
erant under high pressure. To avoid risk of
personal injury or damage to the system,
adding refrigerant or any repair requiring
lines to be disconnected should be done by
an experienced technician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air condi-
tioning system as the chemicals can damage
your air conditioning components. Such dam-
age is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 304
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 305
WIPER BLADES
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and
the windshield and rear window periodically
with a sponge or soft cloth and a mild
nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove
accumulations of salt, waxes, or road film, and
help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using the
wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield or rear window.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or
ice from the windshield or rear window. Make
sure that they are not frozen to the glass before
turning them on to avoid damaging the blade.
Keep the wiper blade out of contact with
petroleum products such as engine oil,
gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies
depending on geographical area and frequency
of use. If chattering, marks, water lines or wet
spots are present, clean the wiper blades or
replace as necessary.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade
off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in the
full up position.
Windshield Wiper Arm And Blade
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, flip up the locking tab.
Wiper Locking Assembly
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade in
place or the glass may be damaged.
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
8
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 305
306 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Tilt the lower end of the wiper blade away
from the arm and use one finger push the
release tab toward the wiper arm.
Wiper Disengaging
4. Slide the wiper blade down towards the
base of the wiper arm.
5. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove
the wiper blade from the wiper arm by
holding the wiper arm with one hand and
separating the wiper blade from the wiper
arm with the other hand (move the wiper
blade down toward the base of the wiper
arm and away from the J hook in the end of
the wiper arm).
Removing Wiper From Wiper Arm
6. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the
wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade under the hook on
the tip of the wiper arm with the wiper
locking tab open.
3. Insert the receiver bracket on the wiper
assembly into the hook on the tip of the arm
through the opening in the wiper blade
under the locking tab.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on
the wiper arm until it is latched
(engagement will be accompanied by an
audible click). Fold down the latch release
tab and snap it into its locked position.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.
1 — Locking Tab
2 — Wiper
3 — Release Tab
1 — Wiper
2 — Locking Tab
3 — Wiper Arm J Hook
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 306
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 307
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from
the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be
raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is
unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the
rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper
arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
Wiper Pivot Cap In Unlocked Position
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
Wiper Blade In Folded Out Position
3. To remove the wiper blade from the wiper
arm, grasp the bottom end of the wiper
blade nearest to wiper arm with your right
hand. With your left hand, hold the wiper
arm as you pull the wiper blade away from
the wiper arm past its stop far enough to
unsnap the wiper blade pivot pin from the
receptacle on the end of the wiper arm.
NOTE:
Resistance will be accompanied by an audible
snap.
4. Still grasping the bottom end of the wiper
blade, move the wiper blade upward and
away from the wiper arm to disengage.
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
5. Gently lower the tip of the wiper arm onto
the glass.
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Arm Pivot Cap
2 — Wiper Blade
3 — Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
3 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
4 — Wiper Arm
8
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 307
308 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
(Continued)
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the rear wiper arm pivot cap away from
the glass to allow the rear wiper blade to be
raised off of the glass.
NOTE:
The rear wiper arm cannot be fully raised off the
glass unless the wiper arm pivot cap is
unsnapped first. Attempting to fully raise the
rear wiper arm without unsnapping the wiper
arm pivot cap may damage the vehicle.
2. Lift the rear wiper arm fully off the glass.
3. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the
opening on the end of the wiper arm. Grab
the bottom end of the wiper arm with one
hand, and press the wiper blade flush with
the wiper arm until it snaps into place.
4. Lower the wiper blade onto the glass and
snap the wiper arm pivot cap back into
place.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the
exhaust system; or if the exhaust fumes can be
detected inside the vehicle; or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have an authorized technician inspect the
complete exhaust system and adjacent body
areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, have the exhaust system inspected
each time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or
oil change. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They
contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is
colorless and odorless. Breathing it can
make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you Ú page 267.
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you
park over materials that can burn, such as
materials might be grass or leaves, and
those items that come into contact with
your exhaust system. Do not park or
operate your vehicle in areas where your
exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
CAUTION!
The catalytic converter requires the use of
unleaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will
destroy the effectiveness of the catalyst as
an emissions control device and may seri-
ously reduce engine performance and
cause serious damage to the engine.
WARNING! (Continued)
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 308
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 309
(Continued)
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic
converter will not require maintenance. However,
it is important to keep the engine properly tuned
to ensure proper catalyst operation and prevent
possible catalyst damage.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
In unusual situations involving grossly
malfunctioning engine operation, a scorching
odor may suggest severe and abnormal catalyst
overheating. If this occurs, stop the vehicle, turn
off the engine and allow it to cool. Service,
including a tune-up to FCA specifications,
should be obtained immediately.
To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter
damage:
Do not interrupt the ignition when the trans-
mission is in gear and the vehicle is in motion.
Do not try to start the vehicle by pushing or
towing the vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any ignition
components disconnected or removed, such
as when diagnostic testing, or for prolonged
periods during very rough idle or malfunc-
tioning operating conditions.
COOLING SYSTEM
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection
every 12 months (before the onset of freezing
weather, where applicable). If the engine
coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled
with fresh engine coolant. Check the front of the
A/C condenser for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying
water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
Damage to the catalytic converter can
result if your vehicle is not kept in proper
operating condition. In the event of engine
malfunction, particularly involving engine
misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced
promptly. Continued operation of your
vehicle with a severe malfunction could
cause the converter to overheat, resulting
in possible damage to the converter and
vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open the
hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.
Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts automati-
cally and may start at any time, whether the
engine is running or not.
When working near the radiator cooling fan,
disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the
ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is
temperature controlled and can start at any
time the ignition is in the ON mode.
WARNING! (Continued)
8
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 309
310 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added to
the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
contains visible sediment, have an authorized
dealer clean and flush with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032).
Refer to the Maintenance Plan for the proper
maintenance intervals Ú page 297.
Selection Of Coolant
For further information Ú page 355.
NOTE:
Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other
than specified Organic Additive Technology
(OAT) engine coolant, may result in engine
damage and may decrease corrosion protec-
tion. OAT engine coolant is different and
should not be mixed with Hybrid Organic
Additive Technology (HOAT) engine coolant or
any “globally compatible” coolant. If a
non-OAT engine coolant is introduced into the
cooling system in an emergency, the cooling
system will need to be drained, flushed, and
refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032), by an authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant products. Do not use addi-
tional rust inhibitors or anti-rust products, as
they may not be compatible with the radiator
engine coolant and may plug the radiator.
This vehicle has not been designed for use
with propylene glycol-based engine coolant.
Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant
is not recommended.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system please contact an authorized
dealer.
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved
engine coolant (OAT coolant conforming to
MS.90032) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can
be used up to 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent
reducing this extended maintenance period, it
is important that you use the same engine
coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032)
throughout the life of your vehicle.
Please review these recommendations for
using OAT engine coolant that meets the
requirements of FCA Material Standard
MS.90032. When adding engine coolant:
We recommend using Mopar Antifreeze/
Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile (240,000 km)
Formula OAT that meets the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine
coolant that meets the requirements of FCA
Material Standard MS.90032 and distilled
water. Use higher concentrations (not to
exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F
(−37°C) are anticipated. Please contact an
authorized dealer for assistance.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or
deionized water when mixing the water/
engine coolant solution. The use of lower
quality water will reduce the amount of corro-
sion protection in the engine cooling system.
NOTE:
It is the owner's responsibility to maintain the
proper level of protection against freezing
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 310
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 311
according to the temperatures occurring in
the area where the vehicle is operated.
Some vehicles require special tools to add
coolant properly. Failure to fill these systems
properly could lead to severe internal engine
damage. If any coolant is needed to be added
to the system, please contact an authorized
dealer.
Mixing engine coolant types is not recom-
mended and can result in cooling system
damage. If HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed
in an emergency, have a authorized dealer
drain, flush, and refill with OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) as soon as
possible.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss
of engine coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure
that engine coolant will return to the radiator
from the coolant expansion bottle/recovery
tank if so equipped.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if
there is any accumulation of foreign material on
the sealing surfaces.
Disposal Of Used Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based coolant (antifreeze)
is a regulated substance requiring proper
disposal. Check with your local authorities to
determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or
children, do not store ethylene glycol-based
coolant in open containers or allow it to remain
in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child
or pet, seek emergency assistance
immediately. Clean up any ground spills
immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant expansion bottle provides a quick
visual method for determining that the coolant
level is adequate. With the engine off and cold,
the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in
the bottle should be between the “MIN” and
“MAX” marks.
As long as the engine operating temperature is
satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be
checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to
the coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Cooling System Notes
NOTE:
When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compart-
ment. This is normally a result of moisture from
rain, snow, or high humidity accumulating on
the radiator and being vaporized when the ther-
mostat opens, allowing hot engine coolant (anti-
freeze) to enter the radiator.
WARNING!
Do not open hot engine cooling system.
Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when
the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated
engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in
the cooling system. To prevent scalding or
injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the
one specified for your vehicle. Personal
injury or engine damage may result.
8
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 311
312 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
If an examination of your engine compartment
shows no evidence of radiator or hose leaks,
the vehicle may be safely driven. The vapor will
soon dissipate.
Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.
Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator
and in the coolant expansion bottle. If engine
coolant needs to be added, the contents of
the coolant expansion bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
If frequent engine coolant additions are
required, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks.
Maintain engine coolant concentration at a
minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which
contains aluminum components.
Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle
overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your
vehicle is equipped with air conditioning,
keep the front of the condenser clean.
Do not change the thermostat for Summer or
Winter operation. If replacement is ever
necessary, install ONLY the correct type ther-
mostat. Other designs may result in unsatis-
factory engine cooling performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
BRAKE SYSTEM
In order to ensure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be
inspected periodically. For the proper
maintenance intervals Ú page 297.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid in the master cylinder should be
checked when performing under hood services
or immediately if the “Brake Warning Light” is
illuminated.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder
area before removing the cap. If necessary, add
fluid to bring the fluid level up to the
requirements described on the brake fluid
reservoir. With disc brakes, fluid level can be
expected to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake
fluid level should be checked when pads are
replaced. However, low fluid level may be
caused by a leak and a checkup may be
needed.
Use only FCA recommended brake fluid
Ú page 356.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your foot
resting or riding on the brake pedal can result
in abnormally high brake temperatures,
excessive lining wear, and possible brake
damage. You would not have your full braking
capacity in an emergency.
WARNING!
Use only FCA recommended brake fluid
Ú page 356. Using the wrong type of brake
fluid can severely damage your brake
system and/or impair its performance. The
proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is
also identified on the original factory
installed hydraulic master cylinder reser-
voir.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 312
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 313
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION — IF
E
QUIPPED
Special Additives
It is strongly recommended against using any
special additives in the transmission. Automatic
Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered
product and its performance may be impaired
by supplemental additives. Therefore, do not
add any fluid additives to the transmission. The
only exception to this policy is the use of special
dyes for diagnosing fluid leaks in six-speed
transmissions. Avoid using transmission
sealers as they may adversely affect seals.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and does
not require adjustment under normal operating
conditions. Routine fluid level checks are not
required; therefore the transmission has no
dipstick. An authorized dealer can check your
transmission fluid level using special service
tools. If you notice fluid leakage or transmission
malfunction, visit an authorized dealer
immediately to have the transmission fluid level
checked. Operating the vehicle with an
improper fluid level can cause severe
transmission damage.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid
installed at the factory will provide satisfactory
lubrication for the life of the vehicle.
Routine fluid and filter changes are not
required. However, change the fluid and filter if
the fluid becomes contaminated (with water,
etc.), or if the transmission is disassembled for
any reason.
To avoid contamination from foreign matter
or moisture, use only new brake fluid or
fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container. Keep the master cylinder reser-
voir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in
a open container absorbs moisture from
the air resulting in a lower boiling point. This
may cause it to boil unexpectedly during
hard or prolonged braking, resulting in
sudden brake failure. This could result in a
collision.
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine
parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire.
Brake fluid can also damage painted and
vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to
avoid its contact with these surfaces.
Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This could
result in a collision.
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your transmis-
sion as the chemicals can damage your trans-
mission components. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe trans-
mission damage may occur. An authorized
dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid
level accurately.
8
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 313
314 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important to use the proper transmission
fluid to ensure optimum transmission
performance and life. Use only FCA specified
transmission fluid Ú page 356. It is important
to maintain the transmission fluid at the correct
level using the recommended fluid.
NOTE:
No chemical flushes should be used in any
transmission; only the approved lubricant
should be used.
FUSES
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery
discharge.
Blade Fuses
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than FCA rec-
ommended fluid may cause deterioration in
transmission shift quality and/or torque con-
verter shudder. For fluid specifications
Ú page 356.
WARNING!
When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with the
same amp rating as the original fuse. Never
replace a fuse with another fuse of higher
amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with
metal wires or any other material. Do not
place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses
may result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the
ignition is off and that all the other services
are switched off and/or disengaged.
If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an
authorized dealer.
If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking system),
power unit systems (engine system, trans-
mission system) or steering system blows,
contact an authorized dealer.
1 — Fuse Element
2 — Blade Fuse with a good/functional fuse ele-
ment
3 — Blade fuse with a bad/not functional fuse el-
ement (blown fuse)
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 314
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 315
Fuse Location
The fuses are grouped into controllers located
in the engine compartment.
Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution
Unit
The engine compartment fuse panel is located
near the battery in the engine compartment.
Fuse Panel & Cover Location
Fuse Panel & Cover
Removing Fuse Cover and Locking Screw
Proceed as follows:
1. Slowly turn the screw counterclockwise.
2. Slowly release the screw.
3. Remove the fuse cover by sliding it upward.
Mounting Fuse Cover and Locking Screw
Proceed as follows:
1. Properly secure the fuse cover to the box,
slide completely from top to bottom.
2. Fully depress the screw, using the special
screwdriver supplied, in the rear cargo area.
3. Slowly turn the screw clockwise.
4. Release the screw.
Battery Fuse Cover Location
1 — Cover Screw
2 — Fuse Cover
1 — Fuse Cover Tabs
2 — Fuse Cover
8
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 315
316 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
F01 70 Amp Tan – – Module Body Computer
F02 70 Amp Tan – –
Module Body Computer, Rear Distribution
Units
F03 –
30 Amp Pink with HID
Lamps
20 Amp Blue without
HID Lamps
– Supply Body Computer, HID Lamps
F04 – 40 Amp Tan – Brake Control Electronics Module
F05 – 40 Amp Tan – PTC Heater
F06 40 Amp Orange – – Starter Relay
F07 40 Amp Orange – – Rear Distribution Unit For Trailer Tow Usage
F08 – 30 Amp Pink – Supply For TCM, AGSM, Steering Control
F09 – – 7.5 Amp Brown ECM, TCM, Radiator Fan Control
F10 – – 20 Amp Yellow Horn
F11 – –
20 Amp Yellow – 1.4L
Gas & Diesel Engines
25 Amp Clear – 2.4 L
Engines/UREA
ECM/PCM/UREA Fuel Injectors
F14 – –
7.5 Amp Brown – Diesel
Engine
15 Amp Blue – Gas
Engine
Diesel Crankcase Heater
Gasoline LTR Cooling Pump
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 316
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 317
F15 40 Amp Orange – – Brake Control Module Pump
F16 – – 10 Amp Red
Engine Control Module Power, Automatic
Transmission
F17 – – 10 Amp Red Engine Secondary Loads
F18 – – 20 Amp Yellow 12 Volt Rear Cargo Outlet Ignition Powered
F19 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioner Compressor
F20 – – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter
F21 – – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump
F22 – –
20 Amp Yellow – Gas
Engine
15 Amp Blue – Diesel
Engine
Gas - Ign Coil/Fuel Injector Diesel- Diesel
Components
F23 – – 30 Amp Green Window Heater Grid
F24 – – 15 Amp Blue
Electronic Unit Supply Automatic Transmis-
sion
F30 – –
20 Amp Yellow (Cus-
tomer Selectable, Move
From F18)
12 Volt Rear Cargo Outlet Constant Battery
Powered
F81
60 Amp Blue — Diesel
Engine
– – Glow Plug Module, DDCT SDU Battery Feed
F82 – 40 Amp Green – Diesel Fuel Filter Heater
F83 – 40 Amp Green – HVAC Fan
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
8
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 317
318 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
The Fuse Box has additional ATO fuse holders installed on the bottom of the box.
Interior Fuses
The interior fuse panel is located in the driver compartment on the left side dash panel under the instrument panel.
F84 – – 30 Amp Green Power Supply All Wheel Drive
F87 – – 5 Amp Tan Gear Selector Automatic Transmission
F88 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Heated Outside Mirrors
F89 – – 30 Amp Green Heated Rear Window
F90 – – 5 Amp Tan IBS Sensor (Battery State Of Charge)
Fxx – –
10 Amp Red
Dual Battery Control Relay With NON DDCT
Trans
7.5 Amp Brown Dual Battery Control Relay With DDCT Trans
Cavity ATO / UNI-VAL Fuse Description
F1 5 Amp Beige Drivetrain Control Module (4x4/AWD)
F2 10 Amp Red ECM — Start Diagnostic Sense
F3 2 Amp Grey Mod Steering Control
Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Mini Fuse Description
Cavity Blade Fuse Description
F31 7.5 Amp Brown Occupant Restraint Controller
F33 20 Amp Yellow Window Motor Passenger
F34 20 Amp Yellow Window Motor Driver
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 318
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 319
F36 20 Amp Yellow
Intrusion Module/Siren, Radio, UCI/USB Port, VSU, Climate Control, Elec-
tronic Steering Lock, Power Folding Mirrors, Security Gateway/DTV
F37 10 Amp Red
Instrument Panel Cluster, Drivetrain Control Module, Adaptive Cruise,
ECC (HVAC) Blower
F38 20 Amp Yellow Door Lock/Unlock, Liftgate Release
F42 7.5 Amp Brown Brake System Module, Electric Power Steering
F43 20 Amp Yellow Washer Pump Front And Rear
F47 20 Amp Yellow Rear Left Window Lifter
F48 20 Amp Yellow Rear Right Window Lifter
F49 7.5 Amp Brown
Park Assist, Blind Spot, Voltage Stabilizer, Humidity Sensor, Electronic
Steering Lock, Temp Sense, Mirror, Heated Seats, Light And Rain Sensor,
Start Stop Switch
F50 7.5 Amp Brown Occupant Restraint Controller
F51 7.5 Amp Brown
Electronic Climate Control, Occupant Classification, Rear View Camera,
Climate Control, Headlamp Leveling, Terrain Select, Heated Rear Window,
Trailer Tow, Haptic Lane Departure
F53 7.5 Amp Brown Keyless Ignition Node Module, Electric Park Brake, RF Hub, Cluster
F94 20 Amp Yellow Lumbar Adjust Driver Seat, Power Outlets
Cavity Blade Fuse Description
8
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 319
320 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit
To access the fuses, remove the access door
from the left rear panel of the rear cargo area.
Rear Cargo Fuse Panel Access Door
To remove fuse cover, press on the tabs and lift
upward.
Rear Cargo Fuse Panel Cover
The fuses may be contained in two units. Fuse
holder No. 1 is located closest to the rear of the
vehicle and fuse holder No. 2 (if equipped with
trailer towing) is located closest to the front of
the vehicle.
Rear Cargo Fuse Cavities
1 — Fuse Holder No. 1
2 — Fuse Holder No. 2
Fuse Holder No. 1
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F1 30 Amp Green Power Inverter
F2 30 Amp Green Memory Seat
F3 20 Amp Yellow Sun Roof – If Equipped
F4 30 Amp Green Power Seat (Passenger Side)
F5 30 Amp Green Power Seat (Driver Side)
F6 7.5 Amp Brown Power Lumbar (Power Seats)
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 320
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 321
On the Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit bracket, there is a Maxi Fuse holder for the Power Liftgate and an ATO / UNI-VAL fuse holder for the
HIFI Audio System.
F7 15 Amp Blue Heated Steering Wheel / Ventilated Seats
F8 20 Amp Yellow Heated Seats
Fuse Holder No. 2
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
F1 10 Amp Red TTM IGN Feed
F5 15 Amp Blue Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Drivers Side)
F6 15 Amp Blue Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Passenger Side)
F7 10 Amp Red TTM Jumper Battery Feed
Cavity Maxi Fuse Description
F01 30 Amp Green Power Liftgate
Cavity ATO / UNI-VAL Fuse Description
F02 25 Amp Clear HIFI Audio System
Fuse Holder No. 1
Cavity Mini Fuse Description
8
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 321
322 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
NOTE:
See an authorized dealer for LED bulb replacement.
Interior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Front Courtesy Light C5W
Front Courtesy Lights (Sun Visors) C5W
Rear Dome Light (Models Without Retractable roof) C5W
Rear Interior Lights (Models With Retractable roof) C5W
Interior Lights HT-168
Dome Light (Glove Box) HT-168
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
Low Beam Headlamps (Halogen) H11LL
High Beam Headlamps (Halogen) 9005LL
Front Position/Daytime Running Lights (DRL) PSX24W
Front Direction Indicator Lamps 7444NA
Front Position – Premium LED LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 322
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 323
High Intensity Discharge (HID) Headlamps
— If Equipped
The headlamps contain a type of high voltage
discharge light source. High voltage can remain
in the circuit even with the headlamp switch off.
Because of this, you should not attempt to
service a HID headlamp light source yourself. If
an HID headlamp light source fails, take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for service.
NOTE:
On vehicles equipped with HID headlamps,
when the headlamps are turned on, there is a
blue hue to the lights. This diminishes and
becomes more white after approximately
10 seconds, as the system charges.
Front Fog Lamps H11LL
Low Beam / High Beam Headlamps (HID) D3S (HID) (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Side Indicators (Front – Halogen) W5W
Side Indicators (Front – HID) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Side Indicators (Side View Mirror) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Tail/Brake Lights
Premium Tail Lights: LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Base Tail Lights: W21/5WLL
Turn Indicators
W21WLL For Premium Tail Lamps
W21/5WLL For Base Tail Lamps
Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
License Plate Lamp LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Liftgate Lamp Reverse W21WLL
Liftgate Lamp Tail LED (Serviced at an authorized dealer)
Exterior Bulbs
Lamps Bulb Number
8
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 323
324 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Replacing Exterior Bulbs
Headlamps
Hi/Lo Beam Light Halogen
The bulbs can be accessed from behind the
front wheel liners with the following procedure:
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Remove the wheel liner.
3. Remove the headlamp bulb cap.
Headlamp
4. Rotate the headlamp bulb socket counter-
clockwise then pull outwards.
5. Push on the locking tab on the headlamp
bulb connector and remove the bulb and
socket.
6. Install the new headlamp bulb making sure
it’s properly locked.
7. Install the headlamp bulb and socket; turn it
clockwise making sure it is properly locked.
8. Reinstall the wheel liner.
NOTE:
We advise referring to an authorized dealer.
Turn Signal Light/Position Lights/Daytime
Running Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Remove the wheel liner.
3. Remove the electrical connectors.
4. For the DRL bulb, grip the bulb at the top
and bottom locking tabs and squeeze to
and remove the bulb.
5. To replace the DRL bulb gently push bulb
towards housing. Be sure to hear both the
top and bottom locking tabs “CLICK” to
ensure the bulb is properly seated.
WARNING!
A transient high voltage occurs at the bulb
sockets of HID headlamps when the head-
lamp switch is turned ON. It may cause seri-
ous electrical shock or electrocution if not
serviced properly. See an authorized dealer
for service.
1 — Low Beam Bulb Cap
2 — High Beam Bulb Cap
WARNING!
Carry out the operation of replacing lamps
only with the engine off. Also make sure that
the engine is cold, to avoid the danger of
burns.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 324
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 325
6. For the turn signal bulb, rotate in a counter-
clockwise direction and remove the bulb
and bulb socket. Pull the bulb axially to
remove it from the socket.
7. Install the bulb and sockets and rotate them
clockwise making sure that it is properly
locked.
8. Reconnect the electrical connectors.
9. Reinstall the wheel liner.
NOTE:
It is advised referring to an authorized dealer.
Front Fog Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Turn the front wheels completely.
2. Remove the wheel liner.
3. By pushing the electrical connector tab
remove the electrical connector.
4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise, and then
replace the bulb.
Fog Lamp Housing
5. Insert the new bulb in the socket, making
sure the bulb is locked into place.
6. Reconnect the electrical connector.
7. Reinstall the wheel liner.
NOTE:
It is advised referring to an authorized dealer.
Side Indicators
The Side Indicators are LED. See an authorized
dealer for replacement.
Rear Body Side Tail Lamps
Contain the following:
Position lights
Stop lights
Direction indicator
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Using a suitable tool remove fasteners.
Body Side Tail Lamp
1 — Bulb
1 — Fasteners Caps
8
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 325
326 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Disconnect the electrical connector by
pushing the release.
4. Remove the rear body side tail lamp, sliding
it away from the back of the vehicle.
Body Side Tail Lamp
5. Replace the bulb as necessary by turning
and removing the bulb housing.
Reverse Side of Tail Lamp
6. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is
properly locked.
7. Reposition the rear body side lamp
assembly on the car.
8. Reconnect the electrical connector.
9. Reinstall the body side lamp making sure to
align the ball studs.
Body Side Tail Lamp
10. Install fasteners and tighten body side lamp
assembly.
11. Finally close the tailgate.
NOTE:
It is advised referring to an authorized dealer.
1 — Rear Body Side Tail Lamp
2 — Ball Stud
1 — Direction Indicator Bulb / Stop Lamp Bulb
2 — Electrical Connector
3 — Ball Studs
1 — Rear Body Side Tail Lamp
2 — Ball Stud
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 326
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 327
Reverse Lamps
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Using a suitable tool remove the access
panel for body side lamps, remove lift gate
access cover for lift gate lamps.
Liftgate
3. Disconnect the electrical connector by
pushing the release.
4. Remove bulb and replace making sure it is
properly locked.
5. Reconnect the electrical connector.
6. Reinstall the access panels making sure
they are locked in correctly.
7. Finally close the tailgate.
3rd Stop Lamp
The CHMSL is LED. See an authorized dealer for
replacement.
License Plate Lights
The License Plate light is LED. See an
authorized dealer for replacement.
Replacing Interior Bulbs
Front Courtesy Light
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Using a suitable tool remove the front
courtesy light assembly.
Front Courtesy Light
2. Release the retainer clips and bulb housing
as shown.
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
1 — Lift Gate Access Covers
1 — Retaining Clips
2 — Bulb Housing
8
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 327
328 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
3. Replace the bulbs by pulling straight out of
bulb housing.
Front Courtesy Bulb Housing
4. Insert the new bulbs, making sure that they
are properly locked.
5. Reassemble the bulb housing and courtesy
light housing making sure that they are
properly locked.
6. Install the front courtesy light, making sure
that it is properly locked.
Dome Light Vanity Mirror — If Equipped
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Lift the cover of the mirror and pull out the
mirror frame with the mirror light cover
attached.
2. Replace the bulb, releasing it from the side
contacts, and then insert the new bulb,
making sure that it is properly locked
between the contacts.
Visor
3. Reinstall the visor mirror light cover making
sure that it is properly locked.
4. Finally lower the visor mirror cover to the
mirror.
Dome Light Glove Compartment
To replace the bulb proceed as follows:
1. Open the glove compartment.
2. Place your fingers inside the light assembly,
pull the bulb to replace it.
Bulb Removal/Installation
3. Insert the new bulb, making sure it is
properly locked.
1 — Visor Mirror Cover
2 — Visor Mirror Light
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 328
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 329
Dome Light
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Lower the handle in the direction shown;
remove the dome light.
Grab Handle/Dome Light
2. Replace the bulb by removing it from the
side contacts.
Bulb
3. Insert the new bulb, locking it between the
contacts.
4. Reinstall the dome light.
Interior Cargo Lights
To replace the bulbs proceed as follows:
1. Using thumb with slight pressure – push
bulb holder to the side.
Bulb Holder
2. Fully disengage the bulb holder from the
housing.
Bulb Holder
8
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 329
330 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
3. Rotate bulb holder to replace bulb.
Bulb
NOTE:
It is recommended to have your bulbs replaced
by an authorized dealer.
TIRES
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire safety information will cover aspects of the
following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
Tire Markings
Tire Markings
WARNING!
Modifications or repair of the electrical
system performed incorrectly and without
taking into account the technical character-
istics can cause malfunctions with the risk
of fire.
Halogen lamps contain gas under pressure,
in the event of breakage be careful of the
projection of fragments of glass.
Halogen lamps must be handled by
touching only the metallic part. If the trans-
parent bulb is in contact with the fingers,
reduces the intensity of the emitted light
and you can also affect the life of the lamp.
In case of accidental contact, rub the bulb
with a cloth dampened with alcohol and
allow to dry.
WARNING! (Continued)
1 — US DOT Safety Standards Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Tempera-
ture Grades
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 330
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 331
NOTE:
P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on
US design standards. P-Metric tires have the
letter “P” molded into the sidewall preceding
the size designation. Example: P215/65R15
95H.
European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded
into the sidewall beginning with the section
width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based
on US design standards. The size designation
for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric
tires except for the letters “LT” that are
molded into the sidewall preceding the size
designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
Temporary spare tires are designed for
temporary emergency use only. Temporary
high pressure compact spare tires have the
letter “T” or “S” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
High flotation tire sizing is based on US
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall. Example:
31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on US design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on US design standards, or
T or S = Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
8
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 331
332 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
R = Construction code
"R" means radial construction, or
"D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
LL = Light load tire or
C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
EXAMPLE:
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 332
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 333
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The Tire Identification Number (TIN) may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white
sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black
sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the US Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
01 means the year 2001
Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:
031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
8
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 333
334 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of
the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-pillar)
Term Definition
B-pillar The vehicle B-pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been
driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a mini-
mum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square
inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure
for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure FCA recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, the
original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 334
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 335
Tire And Loading Information Placard
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not
exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on
your vehicle. You will not exceed the tire's load
carrying capacity if you adhere to the loading
conditions, tire size, and cold tire inflation
pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard Ú page 127.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front
and rear axles must not be exceeded
Ú page 127.
To determine the maximum loading conditions
of your vehicle, locate the statement “The
combined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the
Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage
and trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should
never exceed the weight referenced here.
Steps For Determining Correct Load
Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your
vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg or
XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will
be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage
load capacity calculated in Step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be transferred
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the
available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle.
8
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 335
336 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-340
(5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows examples
on how to calculate total load, cargo/
luggage, and towing capacities of your
vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table
is for illustration purposes only and may not
be accurate for the seating and load carry
capacity of your vehicle.
For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 336
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 337
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the
safe and satisfactory operation of your vehicle.
Four primary areas are affected by improper tire
pressure:
Safety
Fuel Economy
Tread Wear
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Safety Both underinflation and overinflation affect the
stability of the vehicle and can produce a feeling
of sluggish response or over responsiveness in
the steering.
NOTE:
Unequal tire pressures from side to side may
cause erratic and unpredictable steering
response.
Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consumption.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause
abnormal wear patterns and reduced tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a
comfortable ride. Overinflation produces a
jarring and uncomfortable ride.
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Over-
loading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle
handling, and increase your stopping dis-
tance. Use tires of the recommended load
capacity for your vehicle. Never overload
them.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and
can cause collisions.
Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that result
in tire failure.
Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail
suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle
control.
Unequal tire pressures can cause steering
problems. You could lose control of your
vehicle.
Unequal tire pressures from one side of the
vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle
to drift to the right or left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the
recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
8
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 337
338 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver's side B-pillar or rear edge of the
driver's side door.
At least once a month:
Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgment when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are underinflated.
Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are
always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire
inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure
after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)
after sitting for a minimum of three hours. The
cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the
maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a
wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C)
and the outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then
the cold tire inflation pressure should be
increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi
(7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this outside
temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT reduce
this normal pressure build-up or your tire
pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
FCA advocates driving at safe speeds and
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits
or conditions are such that the vehicle can be
driven at high speeds, maintaining correct tire
inflation pressure is very important. Increased
tire pressure and reduced vehicle loading may
be required for high-speed vehicle operation.
Refer to an authorized tire dealer or original
equipment vehicle dealer for recommended
safe operating speeds, loading and cold tire
inflation pressures.
Radial Ply Tires
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve
stem.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to fail.
You could have a serious collision. Do not
drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capac-
ity at continuous speeds above 75 mph
(120 km/h).
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of
tires on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to
handle poorly. The instability could cause a
collision. Always use radial ply tires in sets of
four. Never combine them with other types of
tires.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 338
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 339
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
The tire has not been driven on when flat.
The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repairable).
The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs
and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat tire
of identical size and service description (Load
Index and Speed Symbol). Replace the tire
pressure sensor as well as it is not designed to
be reused.
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a
rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid loss
of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat mode.
A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation
pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a
Run Flat tire reaches the Run Flat mode it has
limited driving capabilities and needs to be
replaced immediately. A Run Flat tire is not
repairable. When a Run Flat tire is changed
after driving with underinflated tire condition,
please replace the TPM sensor as it is not
designed to be reused when driven under Run
Flat mode 14 psi (96 kPa) condition.
NOTE:
TPM Sensor must be replaced after driving the
vehicle on a flat tire condition.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded
at full capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in
the Run Flat mode.
For more information Ú page 227.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice
conditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30
seconds continuously without stopping
Ú page 290.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces
generated by excessive wheel speeds may
cause tire damage or failure. A tire could
explode and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
for more than 30 seconds continuously when
you are stuck, and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
8
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 339
340 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in determining
when your tires should be replaced.
Tire Tread
These indicators are molded into the bottom of
the tread grooves. They will appear as bands
when the tread depth becomes a 1/16 of an
inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be
replaced Ú page 340.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
Driving style.
Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
to develop across the tire tread. These
abnormal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
Distance driven.
Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of
V or higher, and Summer tires typically have
a reduced tread life. Rotation of these tires
per the vehicle scheduled maintenance is
highly recommended.
NOTE:
Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well
when installing new tires due to wear and tear
in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with
as little exposure to light as possible. Protect
tires from contact with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance
of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. FCA strongly
recommends that you use tires equivalent to
the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed Ú page 340.
Refer to the Tire and Loading Information
placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for the
size designation of your tire. The Load Index and
Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the
original equipment tire sidewall.
For more information relating to the Load Index
and Speed Symbol of a tire Ú page 330.
It is recommended to replace the two front tires
or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire
can seriously affect your vehicle’s handling. If
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can result
in sudden tire failure. You could lose control
and have a collision resulting in serious injury
or death.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 340
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 341
(Continued)
you ever replace a wheel, make sure that the
wheel’s specifications match those of the
original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with any
questions you may have on tire specifications or
capability. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
TIRE TYPES
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all seasons
(Spring, Summer, Autumn, and Winter). Traction
levels may vary between different all season
tires. All season tires can be identified by the
M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire
sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;
failure to do so may adversely affect the safety
and handling of your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires — If
Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet and
dry conditions, and are not intended to be
driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold driving
conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle
when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F
(5°C) or if roads are covered with ice or snow.
For more information, contact an authorized
dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol on
the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in sets
of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, or
speed rating other than that specified for
your vehicle. Some combinations of unap-
proved tires and wheels may change
suspension dimensions and performance
characteristics, resulting in changes to
steering, handling, and braking of your
vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and
suspension components. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death. Use only the tire and
wheel sizes with load ratings approved for
your vehicle.
Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity, other than what was originally
equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with
a smaller load index could result in tire
overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have a collision.
Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a differ-
ent size may result in false speedometer and
odometer readings.
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice condi-
tions. You could lose vehicle control, resulting
in severe injury or death. Driving too fast for
conditions also creates the possibility of loss
of vehicle control.
8
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 341
342 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can be
identified by a “mountain/snowflake” symbol
on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires
equivalent in size and type to the
original equipment tires. Use snow
tires only in sets of four; failure to do
so may adversely affect the safety and handling
of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at
sustained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire dealer
for recommended safe operating speeds,
loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of
non-studded tires. Some states prohibit
studded tires; therefore, local laws should be
checked before using these tire types.
SPARE TIRES — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE:
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire Ú page 280.
For restrictions when towing with a spare tire
designated for temporary emergency use
Ú page 131.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire
and wheel equivalent in look and function to the
original equipment tire and wheel found on the
front or rear axle of your vehicle. This spare tire
may be used in the tire rotation for your vehicle.
If your vehicle has this option, refer to an
authorized tire dealer for the recommended tire
rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency
use only. You can identify if your vehicle is
equipped with a compact spare by looking at
the spare tire description on the Tire and
Loading Information Placard located on the
driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of
the tire. Compact spare tire descriptions begin
with the letter “T” or “S” preceding the size
designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
T, S = Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the original
equipment tire should be repaired (or replaced)
and reinstalled on your vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount
a conventional tire on the compact spare wheel,
since the wheel is designed specifically for the
compact spare tire. Do not install more than
one compact spare tire and wheel on the
vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do
not take your vehicle through an automatic
car wash with a compact or limited use tem-
porary spare installed. Damage to the vehicle
may result.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 342
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 343
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emergency
use only. This tire may look like the originally
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. This spare tire may have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use full
size spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is
not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by a
label located on the limited use spare wheel.
This label contains the driving limitations for
this spare. This tire may look like the original
equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited
use spare tire affects vehicle handling. Since it
is not the same as your original equipment tire,
replace (or repair) the original equipment tire
and reinstall on the vehicle at the first
opportunity.
SNOW TRACTION DEVICES
Use of traction devices require sufficient
tire-to-body clearance. Due to limited clearance,
the following snow traction devices are
recommended. Follow these recommendations
to guard against damage:
Snow traction device must be of proper size
for the tire, as recommended by the snow
traction device manufacturer.
No other tire sizes are recommended for use
with the snow traction device.
Please follow the table below for the recom-
mended tire size, axle and snow traction
device:
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for tem-
porary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have lim-
ited tread life. When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the temporary use
spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to
follow the warnings, which apply to your
spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire
affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not
drive more than the speed listed on the lim-
ited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to the
cold tire inflation pressures listed on your Tire
and Loading Information Placard located on
the driver’s side B-pillar or the rear edge of
the driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the
original equipment tire at the first opportunity
and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do
so could result in loss of vehicle control.
8
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 343
344 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
(Continued)
(Continued)
(Continued)
FWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (maximum projection
beyond tire profile or equivalent)
Sport
Latitude
Limited
Front
215/65R16
16 x 6.5 x 40 mm
7 mm Cable Chain
AWD
Trim Level
Axle Tire/Wheel Size
Snow Traction Device (maximum projection
beyond tire profile or equivalent)
Sport
Latitude
Limited
Trailhawk
Front
215/65R16
16 x 6.5 x 40mm
7mm Cable Chain
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type (M+S,
Snow) between front and rear axles can
cause unpredictable handling. You could lose
control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
Because of restricted traction device clear-
ance between tires and other suspension
components, it is important that only trac-
tion devices in good condition are used.
Broken devices can cause serious damage.
Stop the vehicle immediately if noise
occurs that could indicate device breakage.
Remove the damaged parts of the device
before further use.
CAUTION! (Continued)
Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km). Autosock traction devices do not
require retightening.
Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and
large bumps, especially with a loaded
vehicle.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 344
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 345
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform different
steering, handling, and braking functions. For
these reasons, they wear at unequal rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation
of tires. The benefits of rotation are especially
worthwhile with aggressive tread designs such
as those on On/Off Road type tires. Rotation will
increase tread life, help to maintain mud, snow,
and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
For the proper maintenance intervals
Ú page 297. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to
rotation being performed.
The suggested rotation method is the “forward
cross” shown in the following diagram. This
rotation pattern does not apply to some
directional tires that must not be reversed.
Tire Rotation (Forward Cross)
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National
Highway Traffic Safety Administration.
The specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must conform
to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
TREADWEAR
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well on
the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry
pavement.
Observe the traction device manufacturer’s
instructions on the method of installation,
operating speed, and conditions for use.
Always use the suggested operating speed
of the device manufacturer’s if it is less
than 30 mph (48 km/h).
Do not use traction devices on a compact
spare tire.
CAUTION! (Continued)
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type and cir-
cumference on each wheel. Any difference in
tire size can cause damage to the power
transfer unit. Tire rotation schedule should be
followed to balance tire wear.
8
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 345
346 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
TRACTION GRADES
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These grades
represent the tire's ability to stop on wet
pavement, as measured under
controlled conditions on specified
government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
TEMPERATURE GRADES
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the tire's
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat, when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all
passenger vehicle tires must meet
under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance
on the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than
three weeks, we recommend that you take the
following steps to minimize the drain on your
vehicle's battery:
Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out
of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or
more, run the air conditioning system at idle
for about five minutes in the fresh air and
high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction charac-
teristics.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
lished for a tire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat build-up and
possible tire failure.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 346
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 347
NOTE:
When the vehicle has not been started or driven
for at least 30 days, an Extended Park Starting
is required to start the vehicle Ú page 86.
BODYWORK
PROTECTION FROM ATMOSPHERIC
A
GENTS
Vehicle body care requirements vary according
to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals
that make roads passable in snow and ice and
those that are sprayed on trees and road
surfaces during other seasons are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside
parking, which exposes your vehicle to airborne
contaminants, road surfaces on which the
vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather
and other extreme conditions will have an
adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and
underbody protection.
The following maintenance recommendations
will enable you to obtain maximum benefit from
the corrosion resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or
removal of paint and protective coatings from
your vehicle.
The most common causes are:
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near seacoast localities.
Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
BODY AND UNDERBODY MAINTENANCE
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum
and chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned
regularly using mild (neutral Ph) soap and water
to maintain their luster and to prevent
corrosion. Wash wheels with the same soap
solution recommended for the body of the
vehicle and remember to always wash when the
surfaces are not hot to the touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other road
chemicals used to melt ice or control dust on
dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild
soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh
chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the
wheel’s protective coating that helps keep them
from corroding and tarnishing.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including
excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the
selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemicals
CAUTION!
Before removal of the positive and negative
terminals to the battery, wait at least a min-
ute with ignition switch in the OFF position
and close the driver’s door. When reconnect-
ing the positive and negative terminals to the
battery be sure the ignition switch is in the
OFF position and the driver’s door is closed.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes that
use acidic solutions or strong alkaline addi-
tives or harsh brushes. Many aftermarket
wheel cleaners and automatic car washes
may damage the wheel's protective finish.
Such damage is not covered by the New Vehi-
cle Limited Warranty. Only car wash soap,
Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recom-
mended.
8
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 347
348 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
and equipment to prevent damage to the
wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar
Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive,
non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for
an extended period after cleaning the wheels
with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle and apply
the brakes to remove the water droplets from
the brake components. This activity will remove
the red rust on the brake rotors and prevent
vehicle vibration when braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or
Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights
and fog lights that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass
headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wiping
with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash with
a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive
material to clean the lenses.
PRESERVING THE BODYWORK
Washing
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse the
panels completely with water.
If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to
remove.
Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains and to protect your paint finish. Use
precautions to not scratch the paint.
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle
brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. These
products may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car wash
soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is
recommended.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these spe-
cialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,
abrasives, or polishing compounds. They will
permanently damage this finish and such
damage is not covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. HAND WASH ONLY USING
MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH.
Used on a regular basis; this is all that is
required to maintain this finish.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 348
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 349
Special Care
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-
riage at least once a month.
It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
trunk be kept clear and open.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately.
If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle repaired
as soon as possible.
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals,
fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such
materials are well packaged and sealed.
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
INTERIORS
SEATS AND FABRIC PARTS
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric
upholstery and carpeting.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the
following manner:
Remove as much of the stain as possible by
blotting with a clean, dry towel.
Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp
towel.
For tough stains, apply Mopar Total Clean, or
a mild soap solution to a clean, damp cloth
and remove stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to
remove soap residue.
For grease stains, apply Mopar Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove
stain. Use a fresh, damp towel to remove
soap residue.
Do not use any harsh solvents or any other
form of protectants on Stain Repel products.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove the
belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry with a
soft cloth.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn
or if the buckles do not work properly.
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
powder that will scratch metal and painted
surfaces.
Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi
(8,274 kPa) can result in damage or
removal of paint and decals.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning pur-
poses. Many are potentially flammable, and if
used in closed areas they may cause respira-
tory harm.
8
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 349
350 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
PLASTIC AND COATED PARTS
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster
Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution
may be used, but do not use high alcohol
content or abrasive cleaners. If soap is used,
wipe clean with a clean damp cloth. Dry with a
soft cloth.
LEATHER SURFACES
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended
for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved
by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.
Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive
and damage the leather upholstery and should
be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft
cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be
taken to avoid soaking your leather upholstery
with any liquid. Please do not use polishes, oils,
cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or
ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it tends to
show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric dye
transfer more so than darker colors. The leather
is designed for easy cleaning, and FCA recom-
mends Mopar total care leather cleaner applied
on a cloth to clean the leather seats as needed.
GLASS SURFACES
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or any
commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution
when cleaning the inside rear window equipped
with electric defrosters or windows equipped
with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or
other sharp instruments that may scratch the
elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are using.
Do not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a colli-
sion and leave you with no protection. Inspect
the belt system periodically, checking for
cuts, frays, or loose parts. Damaged parts
must be replaced immediately. Do not disas-
semble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision
if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retrac-
tor, torn webbing, etc.).
CAUTION!
Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-
tizers to the plastic, painted, or decorated
surfaces of the interior may cause perma-
nent damage. Wipe away immediately.
Damage caused by these type of products
may not be covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or
Ketone based cleaning products to clean
leather upholstery, as damage to the uphol-
stery may result.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 350
351
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found
on the left front corner of the windshield and is
visible from the outside of the vehicle.
Vehicle Identification Number
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been removed
and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug nuts/
bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a six sided (hex)
deep wall socket.
TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS
**Use only authorized dealer recommended lug nuts/
bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion or
loose particles.
Wheel Mounting Surface
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until
each nut/bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure
that the socket is fully engaged on the lug nut/
bolt (do not insert it halfway).
Torque Patterns
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/
Bolt Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
100 Ft-Lbs
(135 N·m)
M12 x 1.25 19 mm
9
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 351
352 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/bolt
torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are
properly tightened.
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted
brakes as standard equipment. In the event
power assist is lost for any reason (for example,
repeated brake applications with the engine
off), the brakes will still function. However, the
effort required to brake the vehicle will be much
greater than that required with the power
system operating.
If either of the two hydraulic systems lose
normal capability, the remaining system will still
function with some loss of overall braking
effectiveness. This will be evident by increased
pedal travel during application and greater
pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition,
if the malfunction is caused by an internal leak,
as the brake fluid in the master cylinder drops,
the “Brake Warning Light” will light.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a heavy
knocking sound, see a dealer immediately. Use
of gasoline with a lower than recommended
octane number can cause engine failure and
may void or not be covered by the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such
as hard starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you
experience these symptoms, try another brand
of gasoline before considering service for the
vehicle.
2.4L ENGINE
This engine is designed to meet all
emissions regulations and provide
excellent fuel economy and
performance when using high quality
unleaded “regular” gasoline having a octane
rating of 87 using the (R+M)/2 method. The use
of premium gasoline is not recommended, as it
will not provide any benefit over regular
gasoline in these engines.
REFORMULATED GASOLINE
Many areas of the country require the use of
cleaner burning gasoline referred to as
“reformulated gasoline”. Reformulated
gasoline contains oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle
emissions and improve air quality.
The use of reformulated gasoline is
recommended. Properly blended reformulated
gasoline will provide improved performance
and durability of engine and fuel system
components.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the
jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts fully
until the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to
follow this warning may result in personal
injury.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the “Brake Warning
Light” on is dangerous. A significant decrease
in braking performance or vehicle stability
during braking may occur. It will take you lon-
ger to stop the vehicle or will make your vehi-
cle harder to control. You could have a
collision. Have the vehicle checked immedi-
ately.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 352
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 353
GASOLINE/OXYGENATE BLENDS
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline
with oxygenates such as ethanol.
Problems that result from using gasoline
containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) or
gasoline containing methanol are not the
responsibility of FCA and may void the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
E-85 USAGE IN NON-FLEX FUEL
V
EHICLES
Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible
with gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol
(E-15). Gasoline with higher ethanol content
may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with
E-85 fuel, the engine will have some or all of
these symptoms:
Operate in a lean mode.
OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.
Poor engine performance.
Poor cold start and cold drivability.
Increased risk for fuel system component
corrosion.
CNG AND LP FUEL SYSTEM
M
ODIFICATIONS
Modifications that allow the engine to run on
Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or Liquid
Propane (LP) may result in damage to the
engine, emissions, and fuel system
components. Problems that result from running
CNG or LP are not the responsibility of FCA and
may void the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
METHYLCYCLOPENTADIENYL
M
ANGANESE TRICARBONYL (MMT) I N
G
ASOLINE
MMT is a manganese-containing metallic
additive that is blended into some gasoline to
increase octane. Gasoline blended with MMT
provides no performance advantage beyond
gasoline of the same octane number without
MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces
spark plug life and reduces emissions system
performance in some vehicles. FCA
recommends that gasoline without MMT be
used in your vehicle. The MMT content of
gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline
pump, therefore, you should ask your gasoline
retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California
reformulated gasoline.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing metha-
nol, or gasoline containing more than 15% eth-
anol (E-15). Use of these blends may result in
starting and drivability problems, damage criti-
cal fuel system components, cause emissions
to exceed the applicable standard, and/or
cause the Malfunction Indicator Light to illumi-
nate. Please observe pump labels as they
should clearly communicate if a fuel contains
greater than 15% ethanol (E-15).
9
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 353
354 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
(Continued)
MATERIALS ADDED TO FUEL
Besides using unleaded gasoline with the
proper octane rating, gasolines that contain
detergents, corrosion and stability additives are
recommended. Using gasolines that have these
additives will help improve fuel economy,
reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle
performance.
Designated TOP TIER Detergent
Gasoline contains a higher level of
detergents to further aide in
minimizing engine and fuel system
deposits. When available, the usage of TOP
TIER Detergent gasoline is recommended. Visit
www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish
removal may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket
and diaphragm materials.
FUEL SYSTEM CAUTIONS
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with the emissions
control system can result in civil penalties being
assessed against you.
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehi-
cle’s performance:
The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by
Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can
impair engine performance and damage
the emissions control system.
An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or igni-
tion malfunctions can cause the catalytic
converter to overheat. If you notice a
pungent burning odor or some light smoke,
your engine may be out of tune or malfunc-
tioning and may require immediate service.
Contact an authorized dealer for service
assistance.
The use of fuel additives, which are now
being sold as octane enhancers, is not
recommended. Most of these products
contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-
mance problems resulting from the use of
such fuels or additives is not the responsi-
bility of FCA and may void or not be covered
under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
CAUTION! (Continued)
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 354
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 355
FLUID CAPACITIES
ENGINE FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
US Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
All Engines 13.5 Gallons 51 Liters
Engine Oil With Filter
2.4L Gasoline Engine 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters
Cooling System*
2.4L Gasoline Engine 6.8 Quarts 6.5 Liters
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant
We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Miles (240,000 Kilo-
meters) Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) meeting the requirements of FCA Mate-
rial Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine
We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the requirements
of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to
your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter
We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter. If a Mopar Engine Oil Filter is unavail-
able, only use filters that meet or exceed SAE/USCAR-36 Filter Performance Require-
ments.
Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine 87 Octane (R+M)/2 Method, 0-15% ethanol.
9
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 355
356 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CHASSIS FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Six-Speed Automatic Transmission (FWD Models) – If
Equipped
Use only Mopar AW-1 Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the cor-
rect fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Nine-Speed Automatic Transmission (4WD Models) – If
Equipped
Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure
to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped
We recommend you use Mopar Front Axle/PTU Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90 (API
GL-5).
Rear Differential (RDM) – If Equipped
We recommend you use Mopar Rear Axle/RDM Synthetic Axle Lubricant SAE 75W-90
(API GL-5).
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 356
357
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE
FOR YOUR VEHICLE
PREPARE FOR THE APPOINTMENT
All work to be performed may not be covered by
the warranty. Discuss additional charges with
the service manager. Keep a maintenance log
of your vehicle's service history. This can often
provide a clue to the current problem.
PREPARE A LIST
Make a written list of your vehicle's problems or
the specific work you want done. If you've had
an accident or work done that is not on your
maintenance log, let the service advisor know.
BE REASONABLE WITH REQUESTS
If you list a number of items and you must have
your vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the
situation with the service advisor and list the
items in order of priority. At many authorized
dealers, you may obtain a rental vehicle
(additional charges may apply). If you need a
rental, it is advisable to make these
arrangements when you call for an
appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
FCA US LLC and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to
be happy with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an
authorized dealer. We strongly recommend that
you take the vehicle to an authorized dealer.
They know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high quality
service. FCA US LLC’s authorized dealers have
the facilities, factory-trained technicians,
special tools, and the latest information to
ensure the vehicle is fixed correctly and in a
timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer’s service manager first. If for
some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to
the general manager or owner of the authorized
dealer. They want to know if you need
assistance. If an authorized dealer is unable to
resolve the concern, you may contact the FCA
US LLC's Customer Assistance center.
Any communication to FCA US LLC’s customer
center should include the following information:
Owner's name and address
Owner's telephone number (home, mobile,
and office)
Authorized dealer name
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC C USTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA CANADA INC. CUSTOMER CENTER
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French
10
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 357
358 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
MEXICO
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: (800) 505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52) 55 50817568
PUERTO RICO AND US VIRGIN ISLANDS
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE FOR THE
H
EARING OR SPEECH IMPAIRED (TDD/
TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing
difficulties, FCA US LLC has installed special
Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf (TDD)
equipment at its customer center. Any hearing
or speech impaired customer, who has access
to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter (TTY)
in the United States, can communicate with FCA
US LLC by dialing 1-800-380-2479.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that
require assistance can use the special needs
relay service offered by Bell Canada. For TTY
teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for Voice
callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with a
Bell Relay Service operator.
SERVICE CONTRACT
You may have purchased a service contract for
a vehicle to help protect you from the high cost
of unexpected repairs after FCA US LLC's New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires. The Mopar
Vehicle Protection plans are the ONLY vehicle
extended protection plans authorized,
endorsed and backed by FCA US LLC to provide
additional protection beyond your vehicle’s
warranty. If you purchased a Mopar Vehicle
Protection Plan, you will receive Plan Provisions
and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date.
If you have any questions about the service
contract, call the FCA US LLC’s Service Contract
National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922
(Canadian residents, call (800) 465-2001
English / (800) 387-9983 French).
FCA US LLC is not responsible for any service
contract you may have purchased from another
manufacturer. If you require service after the
FCA US LLC New Vehicle Limited Warranty
expires, please refer to the contract documents,
and contact the person listed in those
documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle. An
authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines
only), some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemi-
cals known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects, or other reproduc-
tive harm. In addition, certain fluids con-
tained in vehicles and certain products of
component wear contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause can-
cer and birth defects, or other reproductive
harm.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 358
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE 359
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA US LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.mopar.com/om for further information.
See the Warranty Information for the terms and
provisions of FCA Canada Inc. warranties
applicable to this vehicle and market. Refer to
www.owners.mopar.ca/en/ for further
information.
Use this QR code to access your
digital experience.
MOPAR® PARTS
Mopar® original equipment parts &
accessories and factory filled fluids are
available from an authorized dealer. They are
recommended for your vehicle to keep it
operating at its best and maintain its original
condition.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
IN THE 50 UNITED STATES AND
W
ASHINGTON , D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) in
addition to notifying FCA US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of
vehicles, it may order a recall and
remedy campaign. However, NHTSA
cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, an authorized
dealer, or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY:
1-800-424-9153); or go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey
Avenue, SE., West Building, Washington,
D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other
information about motor vehicle safety
from http://www.safercar.gov.
IN CANADA
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department
immediately. Canadian customers who
wish to report a safety defect to the
Canadian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect
Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-Sec-Sur/7/
PCDB-BDPP.
10
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 359
360 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use
either the website or the phone numbers listed
below.
Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide
a complete working knowledge of the vehicle,
system, and/or components and is written in
straightforward language with illustrations,
diagrams, and charts.
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with
diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations.
These manuals make it easy to find and fix
problems on computer-controlled vehicle
systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems, using step-by-step
troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all
tools and equipment.
Owner's Manuals
These Owner's Manuals have been prepared
with the assistance of service and engineering
specialists to acquaint you with specific FCA US
LLC vehicles.
To access your Owner's Information online, visit
www.mopar.com/om
To order a hard copy of your Owner’s
Information, visit:
www.techauthority.com (US)
Or
Call Tech Authority toll free at:
1-800-890-4038 (US)
1-800-387-1143 (Canada)
GENERAL INFORMATION
The following regulatory statement applies to all
Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this
vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and
Economic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR
d`Innovation, Science and Economic
Development applicables aux appareils radio
exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée
aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de
brouillage, et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout
brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le
brouillage est susceptible d'en compro-
mettre le fonctionnement.
La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las
siguientes dos condiciones:
1. es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no
cause interferencia perjudicial y
2. este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar
cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que
pueda causar su operación no deseada.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to operate
the equipment.
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 360
361
INDEX
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone
............................................................172
WARRANTY INFORMATION ......................359
A
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)
........................104
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) ...............310
Additives, Fuel ...............................................354
Advance Phone Connectivity .........................179
Air Bag ...........................................................242
Air Bag Operation ......................................243
Air Bag Warning Light ...................... 241 , 243
Driver Knee Air Bag ...................................248
Enhanced Accident Response ......... 252, 295
Event Data Recorder (EDR) .......................295
Front Air Bag .............................................243
If Deployment Occurs ................................251
Knee Impact Bolsters ................................248
Maintaining Your Air Bag System ..............254
Maintenance .............................................254
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light .............241
Side Air Bags .............................................248
Transporting Pets ......................................267
Air Bag Light ........................................ 241 , 267
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner
Filter)
.............................................................303
Air Conditioner Maintenance .........................303
Air Conditioner Refrigerant .................. 303 , 304
Air Conditioner System ................................. 303
Air Conditioning Filter ..............................51 , 304
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips .......................50
Air Filter ........................................................ 303
Air Pressure
Tires
......................................................... 338
Alarm
Arm The System
..........................................20
Disarm The System .....................................21
Security Alarm ...................................... 20 , 77
Alarm System
Security Alarm
.............................................20
Alterations/Modifications
Vehicle........................................................... 9
Android Auto ........................................ 181 , 183
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ................. 310 , 355
Disposal ................................................... 311
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ...................... 212
Anti-Lock Warning Light ...................................78
Apple CarPlay ....................................... 181 , 185
Arming System
Security Alarm .............................................20
Assist, Hill Start ............................................. 219
Audio Settings ............................................... 165
Audio Systems (Radio) .................................. 138
Auto Down Power Windows .............................55
Automatic Dimming Mirror ...............................37
Automatic Door Locks ......................................25
Automatic Headlights .......................................41
Automatic High Beams .....................................40
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) ..............49
Automatic Transaxle ........................................93
Automatic Transmission ...................................94
Adding Fluid ..................................... 313 , 356
Fluid And Filter Change ............................. 313
Fluid Change ............................................. 313
Fluid Level Check ...................................... 313
Fluid Type ........................................ 314 , 356
Special Additives ...................................... 313
Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode ......25
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet (Power Outlet) ..........53
Axle Fluid....................................................... 356
Axle Lubrication ............................................ 356
B
Battery ................................................... 76 , 301
Charging System Light .................................76
Keyless Key Fob Replacement ....................14
Belts, Seat .................................................... 267
Blind Spot Monitoring ................................... 221
Bluetooth
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Au-
dio Device After Pairing
........................ 174
11
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 361
362
Body Mechanism Lubrication
........................304
B-Pillar Location .............................................334
Brake Assist System ......................................213
Brake Control System, Electronic ..................213
Brake Fluid ....................................................356
Brake System ...................................... 312 , 352
Anti-Lock (ABS) ..........................................352
Fluid Check ..................................... 312 , 356
Master Cylinder .........................................312
Parking ........................................................89
Warning Light .............................................. 74
Brake/Transmission Interlock ......................... 94
Brightness, Interior Lights ......................... 42 , 43
Bulb Replacement .........................................322
Bulbs, Light ....................................................269
C
Camera, Rear
................................................124
Capacities, Fuel .............................................355
Caps, Filler
Fuel ...........................................................126
Oil (Engine) ................................................300
Radiator (Coolant Pressure) ......................311
Car Washes ...................................................348
Carbon Monoxide Warning .................. 269 , 270
Cargo Area Cover ............................................. 62
Cargo Load Floor ............................................. 62
Cargo Tie-Downs ....................................... 62 , 63
CD..................................................................167
Cellular Phone .............................................. 210
Certification Label ......................................... 127
Chains, Tire ................................................... 343
Change Oil Indicator ........................................68
Changing A Flat Tire ...................................... 275
Chart, Tire Sizing ........................................... 331
Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator
Light)
................................................................84
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety ................. 267
Checks, Safety .............................................. 267
Child Restraint .............................................. 255
Child Restraints
Booster Seats
........................................... 258
Child Seat Installation .............................. 265
How To Stow An unused ALR Seat Belt .... 263
Infant And Child Restraints ....................... 257
Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children .. 260
Older Children And Child Restraints ......... 257
Seating Positions ...................................... 259
Child Safety Locks ...........................................25
Clean Air Gasoline ......................................... 352
Cleaning
Wheels
..................................................... 347
Windshield Wiper Blades .......................... 305
Climate Control ................................................46
Automatic ....................................................46
Coin Holder ......................................................52
Cold Weather Operation ..................................87
Compact Spare Tire ...................................... 342
Computer, Trip/Travel ......................................74
Connected Services ...................................... 186
Connected Services FAQ ............................... 204
Connected Services Features ....................... 190
Connected Services, Getting Started ............ 188
Connected Services, Introduction ................. 186
Connector
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
.............52
Console ............................................................52
Floor ............................................................52
Contract, Service ........................................... 358
Controls ........................................................ 159
Cooling Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) ............ 311
Cooling System ............................................. 309
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) ...................... 310
Coolant Level ...................................309 , 311
Cooling Capacity ....................................... 355
Disposal Of Used Coolant ......................... 311
Drain, Flush, And Refill ............................. 309
Inspection ................................................. 311
Points To Remember ................................ 311
Pressure Cap ............................................ 311
Radiator Cap ............................................. 311
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) ..... 310, 355
Corrosion Protection ..................................... 347
Cruise Control (Speed Control) ...................... 104
Cruise Light ........................................82 , 83, 84
Customer Assistance .................................... 357
Cybersecurity ................................................ 138
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 362
363
D
Daytime Running Lights
................................... 40
Dealer Service ...............................................302
Defroster, Windshield ....................................268
Deleting A Phone ...........................................174
Diagnostic System, Onboard ........................... 84
Dimmer Switch
Headlight
.....................................................40
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine)
................................................301
Disabled Vehicle Towing ................................292
Disc Drive ......................................................167
Disconnecting ................................................174
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant)
.......................311
Disturb...........................................................177
Door Ajar................................................... 76 , 77
Door Ajar Light .......................................... 76 , 77
Drag & Drop ...................................................157
Driver Memory Presets ..................................164
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ..................................... 28
Driving ...........................................................134
E
Easy Entry Seats
.............................................. 32
Electric Brake Control System .......................213
Anti-Lock Brake System .............................212
Traction Control System .................. 217 , 220
Electric Parking Brake ..................................... 89
Electrical Power Outlets ...................................53
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .................. 214
Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light .........76
Emergency Gas Can Refueling ...................... 288
Emergency, In Case Of
Hazard Warning Flasher
........................... 271
Jacking ..................................................... 275
Jump Starting ........................................... 285
Tow Hooks ................................................ 293
Towing ...................................................... 292
Emission Control System Maintenance ...........84
Engine........................................................... 300
Air Cleaner ................................................ 303
Block Heater ................................................88
Break-In Recommendations ........................89
Checking Oil Level .................................... 301
Coolant (Antifreeze) .................................. 355
Cooling ..................................................... 309
Exhaust Gas Caution ....................... 269 , 270
Fails To Start ...............................................88
Flooded, Starting .........................................88
Jump Starting ........................................... 285
Oil .................................................... 302 , 355
Oil Filler Cap ............................................. 300
Oil Filter .................................................... 303
Oil Selection .................................... 302 , 355
Oil Synthetic ............................................. 303
Overheating .............................................. 289
Starting........................................................86
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature ................................................ 252 , 295
Ethanol.......................................................... 353
Exhaust Gas Cautions ..........................269 , 270
Exhaust System ................................... 269 , 308
Exterior Lighting ...............................................40
Exterior Lights ........................................ 40 , 269
F
Family Alerts ................................................. 203
Filters
Air Cleaner
................................................ 303
Air Conditioning ................................. 51 , 304
Engine Oil ........................................ 303 , 355
Engine Oil Disposal ................................... 303
Flashers
Hazard Warning
........................................ 271
Turn Signals ......................... 40 , 42, 82, 269
Flash-To-Pass ............................................40 , 41
Flat Tire Changing ................................330 , 342
Flat Tire Stowage ................................. 330 , 342
Flooded Engine Starting ...................................88
Floor Console ...................................................52
Fluid Capacities ............................................ 355
Fluid Leaks.................................................... 269
Fluid Level Checks
Brake
........................................................ 312
Engine Oil ................................................. 301
Fluid, Brake ................................................... 356
11
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 363
364
Fog Lights
................................................. 40 , 42
Fold-Flat Seats ................................................. 28
Folding Rear Seats .......................................... 30
Forward Collision Warning .............................225
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle .................................290
Fuel ...............................................................352
Additives ...................................................354
Clean Air ....................................................352
Ethanol ......................................................353
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ...................................126
Gasoline ....................................................352
Light ............................................................ 79
Materials Added ........................................354
Methanol ...................................................353
Octane Rating ................................. 352 , 355
Specifications ............................................355
Tank Capacity ............................................355
Fuses .............................................................314
G
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ...............................126
Gasoline, (Fuel) .............................................352
Gasoline, Clean Air ........................................352
Gasoline, Reformulated .................................352
Gear Ranges .................................................... 95
Gear Selector Override ..................................289
Glass Cleaning ...............................................350
Gross Axle Weight Rating ...............................128
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating ..........................128
GVWR ............................................................127
H
Hazard Warning Flashers .............................. 271
Head Restraints ...............................................34
Head Rests ......................................................34
Headlights .......................................................40
Automatic ....................................................41
Cleaning ................................................... 348
Delay ...........................................................41
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch ..........40
Lights On Reminder ..............................40 , 41
Passing .................................................40 , 41
Switch..........................................................40
Time Delay............................................40 , 41
Heated Mirrors ..........................................37 , 39
Heated Seats ...................................................33
Heater, Engine Block .......................................88
High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer)
Switch
..............................................................40
Hill Descent Control ...................................... 218
Hill Descent Control Indicator ....................... 218
Hill Start Assist .............................................. 219
Holder, Coin .....................................................52
Hood Prop ........................................................59
Hood Release ..................................................59
I
Ignition
.............................................................16
Switch..........................................................16
Inside Rearview Mirror ............................37 , 271
Instrument Cluster .............................65 , 67, 68
Descriptions.................................................82
Display ...........................................67 , 68, 69
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning ................... 350
Interior Appearance Care .............................. 349
Interior Fuses ................................................ 318
Interior Lights ...................................................42
Inverter
Power...........................................................54
iPod/USB/MP3 Control ....................................52
J
Jack Location
................................................ 276
Jack Operation ..................................... 275 , 277
Jacking Instructions ...................................... 277
Jump Starting ................................................ 285
K
Key Fob
Arm The Alarm
.............................................20
Disarm The Alarm ........................................21
Programming Additional Key Fobs ...............15
Remote Keyless Entry ..................................13
Key Fob Battery Service (Remote Keyless
Entry)
...............................................................14
Key Fob Programming (Remote Keyless
Entry)
...............................................................15
Keyless Enter-N-Go ...................................13 , 22
Keys .................................................................13
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 364
365
L
Lane Change And Turn Signals
................. 40, 42
Lane Change Assist .................................. 40 , 42
LaneSense ....................................................120
Lap/Shoulder Belts .......................................233
Latches..........................................................269
Hood ...........................................................59
Leaks, Fluid ...................................................269
Life Of Tires ...................................................340
Liftgate ..................................................... 59 , 60
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer ....................... 45
Light Bulbs.....................................................269
Lights.............................................................269
Air Bag............................................. 241 , 267
Automatic Headlights .................................. 41
Battery Saver...............................................42
Brake Assist Warning ................................217
Brake Warning ............................................ 74
Bulb Replacement .....................................322
Cruise ............................................ 82 , 83, 84
Daytime Running ......................................... 40
Dimmer Switch, Headlight ........................... 40
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Indicator.................................................. 76
Exterior ......................................................269
Fog .............................................................. 42
Headlight Switch .........................................40
Headlights ................................................... 40
High Beam .................................................. 40
High Beam/Low Beam Select ..................... 40
Hill Descent Control Indicator ................... 218
Instrument Cluster .......................................40
Intensity Control ...................................42 , 43
Interior.........................................................42
Lights On Reminder ..............................40 , 41
Low Fuel ......................................................79
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) ..........79
Park .............................................................82
Passing .................................................40 , 41
Seat Belt Reminder .....................................75
Security Alarm .............................................77
Service ..................................................... 322
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) .............. 227
Traction Control ........................................ 217
Turn Signals .........................40 , 42, 82, 269
Vanity Mirror ................................................38
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions
.....................................76 , 82
Load Floor, Cargo .............................................62
Load Shed Battery Saver Mode .......................72
Load Shed Battery Saver On ............................72
Load Shed Electrical Load Reduction ..............72
Load Shed Intelligent Battery Sensor ...............72
Loading Vehicle ............................................ 127
Tires ......................................................... 334
Locks
Auto Unlock .................................................25
Child Protection ...........................................25
Power Door ..................................................22
Low Tire Pressure System ............................. 227
Lubrication, Body .......................................... 304
Lug Nuts/Bolts .............................................. 351
Luggage Carrier ................................................64
M
Maintenance ....................................................58
Maintenance Free Battery ............................ 301
Maintenance Schedule ................................. 296
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) .....79
Manual
Service
...................................................... 360
Media Mode .................................................. 167
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) .....................27
Memory Seat ....................................................27
Memory Settings ..............................................27
Methanol....................................................... 353
Mini-Trip Computer ..........................................74
Mirrors .............................................................37
Automatic Dimming .....................................37
Heated ..................................................37 , 39
Outside .................................................37 , 38
Rearview ............................................ 37 , 271
Vanity...........................................................38
Modifications/Alterations
Vehicle
........................................................... 9
Monitor, Tire Pressure System ...................... 227
Mopar Parts .................................................. 359
Multi-Function Control Lever ............................40
11
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 365
366
N
New Vehicle Break-In Period
............................ 89
O
Occupant Restraints
......................................231
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) ............ 352, 355
Oil Filter, Change ...........................................303
Oil Filter, Selection .........................................303
Oil Pressure Light ............................................77
Oil, Engine ........................................... 302 , 355
Capacity ....................................................355
Checking ...................................................301
Dipstick .....................................................301
Disposal ....................................................303
Filter ................................................ 303 , 355
Filter Disposal ...........................................303
Identification Logo .....................................302
Materials Added To ...................................303
Pressure Warning Light ............................... 77
Recommendation ............................ 302 , 355
Synthetic ...................................................303
Viscosity ....................................................355
Onboard Diagnostic System ............................ 84
Operating Precautions ..................................... 84
Operator Manual
Owner's Manual ........................................360
Outlet
Power .......................................................... 53
Outside Rearview Mirrors .........................37 , 38
Overheating, Engine ...................................... 289
P
Paddle Shifters
................................................97
Paint Care ..................................................... 347
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone
..................................................... 172
Parking Brake ..................................................89
ParkSense System, Rear .............................. 116
Personalized Main Menu Bar ........................ 157
Pets .............................................................. 267
Phone Mode ................................................. 169
Placard, Tire And Loading Information .......... 334
Power
Door Locks ..................................................22
Inverter ........................................................54
Liftgate ........................................................60
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) ................53
Sunroof........................................................56
Windows ......................................................55
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .................. 238
Preparation For Jacking ................................ 275
Presets ......................................................... 164
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ................................................. 238
R
Radial Ply Tires .............................................. 338
Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) ............ 311
Radio
Presets
..................................................... 164
Radio Controls .............................................. 159
Radio Mode................................................... 159
Radio Operation ...................................159 , 210
Radio Remote Controls ................................. 158
Rain Sensitive Wiper System ...........................44
Rear Camera ................................................. 124
Rear Cross Path ............................................ 223
Rear ParkSense System ................................ 116
Rear Seats, Folding ..........................................30
Rear Wiper/Washer .........................................45
Recreational Towing ...................................... 133
Reformulated Gasoline ................................. 352
Refrigerant .................................................... 304
Registering SiriusXM Guardian ..................... 187
Release, Hood ..................................................59
Reminder, Lights On .................................40 , 41
Reminder, Seat Belt ...................................... 232
Remote Control
Starting System ...........................................17
Remote Features, Door Lock/Unlock ...194, 205
Remote Features, Horn And Lights ............... 195
Remote Features, Starting ................... 194 , 207
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 366
367
Remote Keyless Entry
...................................... 13
Arm The Alarm ............................................. 20
Disarm The Alarm ........................................ 21
Programming Additional Key Fobs .............. 15
Remote Sound System (Radio) Control .........158
Remote Starting
Exit Remote Start Mode .............................. 18
Uconnect Customer Programmable
Features.................................................. 19
Uconnect Settings ....................................... 19
Remote Starting System .................................. 17
Replacement Tires .........................................340
Reporting Safety Defects ...............................359
Restraints, Child ............................................255
Restraints, Head .............................................. 34
Roadside Assistance ........................... 195 , 206
Roll Over Warning .............................................. 8
Roof Type Carrier ............................................. 64
Rotation, Tires ...............................................345
S
Safety
............................................................157
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .........................267
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ......................269
Safety Defects, Reporting ..............................359
Safety Features .............................................157
Safety Information, Tire .................................330
Safety Tips .....................................................267
Safety, Exhaust Gas .......................................269
Satellite Radio ...............................................160
Saved Radio Stations ................................... 164
Schedule, Maintenance ................................ 296
Seat Belt Reminder ..........................................75
Seat Belts ............................................ 232 , 267
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......................... 236
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage ..... 236
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage
............................................ 236
Child Restraints ........................................ 255
Energy Management Feature ................... 239
Extender ................................................... 238
Front Seat...............................232 , 233, 235
Inspection................................................. 267
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .................... 235
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting ................... 236
Lap/Shoulder Belts .................................. 233
Operating Instructions .............................. 235
Pregnant Women ...................................... 238
Pretensioners ........................................... 238
Rear Seat ................................................. 233
Reminder.................................................. 232
Seat Belt Extender .................................... 238
Seat Belt Pretensioner ............................. 238
Untwisting Procedure ............................... 236
Seat Belts Maintenance ............................... 349
Seats ...............................................................28
Adjustment ..................................................28
Easy Entry ....................................................32
Head Restraints ...........................................34
Heated.........................................................33
Memory .......................................................27
Rear Folding .........................................28 , 30
Seatback Release ........................................30
Tilting ...........................................................28
Ventilated ....................................................33
Security Alarm ...........................................20 , 77
Arm The System ...........................................20
Disarm The System ......................................21
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) .................. 355
Send & Go ............................................196 , 206
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) ..................................15
Service Assistance ........................................ 357
Service Contract ............................................ 358
Service Manuals ........................................... 360
Settings, Audio .............................................. 165
Shift Lever Override ...................................... 289
Shifting
Automatic Transmission
..............................94
Shoulder Belts .............................................. 233
Side View Mirror Adjustment .....................37, 38
Signals, Turn ............................ 40 , 42, 82, 269
Sirius Satellite Radio ..................................... 160
Favorites ................................................... 162
Replay....................................................... 162
SiriusXM Satellite Radio
Browse in SXM
.......................................... 163
Favorites ................................................... 162
Replay....................................................... 162
Smart Watch ................................................. 203
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) ............................ 343
11
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 367
368
Snow Tires
.....................................................342
SOS Call............................................... 190 , 205
Spare Tires .......................................... 342 , 343
Spark Plugs ...................................................355
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline)
..........................................355
Oil..............................................................355
Starting ..................................................... 17 , 86
Automatic Transmission .............................. 86
Button ......................................................... 16
Cold Weather .............................................. 87
Engine Fails To Start ................................... 88
Remote ....................................................... 17
Starting And Operating .................................... 86
Starting Procedures ......................................... 86
Steering
Column Controls .......................................... 40
Tilt Column .................................................. 26
Wheel, Heated ............................................. 26
Wheel, Tilt ................................................... 26
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ......................158
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System .......158
Stolen Vehicle Assistance .................... 200 , 206
Storage ............................................................ 52
Storage, Vehicle ............................................... 50
Store Radio Presets .......................................164
Stuck, Freeing ...............................................290
Sun Roof ................................................... 56 , 58
Sun Visor ......................................................... 38
Supplemental Restraint System – Air Bag .....242
Sway Control, Trailer ..................................... 220
Synthetic Engine Oil ...................................... 303
System, Remote Starting .................................17
T
Telescoping Steering Column ..........................26
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) .............49
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo .............................62 , 63
Tilt Steering Column ........................................26
Time Delay
Headlight
..............................................40 , 41
Tire And Loading Information Placard ........... 334
Tire Markings ................................................ 330
Tire Safety Information ................................. 330
Tire Service Kit .............................................. 280
Tires...................................269 , 337, 342, 345
Aging (Life Of Tires) .................................. 340
Air Pressure .............................................. 337
Chains ...................................................... 343
Changing .................................................. 275
Compact Spare ......................................... 342
General Information ........................ 337 , 342
High Speed ............................................... 338
Inflation Pressure ..................................... 338
Jacking ..................................................... 275
Life Of Tires .............................................. 340
Load Capacity .................................. 334 , 335
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ..80, 227
Quality Grading ......................................... 345
Radial ....................................................... 338
Replacement ............................................ 340
Rotation .................................................... 345
Safety ..............................................330 , 337
Sizes ......................................................... 331
Snow Tires ................................................ 342
Spare Tires ...................................... 342 , 343
Spinning ................................................... 339
Trailer Towing ........................................... 131
Tread Wear Indicators .............................. 340
Wheel Nut Torque ..................................... 351
To Open Hood ..................................................59
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight ...................... 130
Tow Hooks
Emergency
................................................ 293
Towing........................................................... 128
Disabled Vehicle ....................................... 292
Guide ........................................................ 129
Recreational ............................................. 133
Weight ...................................................... 129
Towing Behind A Motorhome ........................ 133
Towing Eyes .................................................. 294
Traction Control ...................................217 , 220
Trailer Sway Control (TSC) ............................. 220
Trailer Towing ................................................ 128
Minimum Requirements ........................... 130
Tips ........................................................... 133
Trailer And Tongue Weight ........................ 130
Wiring ....................................................... 132
Trailer Towing Guide ..................................... 129
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 368
369
Trailer Weight
................................................129
Transaxle
Automatic
.................................................... 93
Operation .................................................... 93
Transfer Case
Fluid
..........................................................356
Transmission ................................................... 94
Automatic ...........................................94 , 313
Fluid ..........................................................356
Maintenance .............................................313
Transporting Pets ..........................................267
Tread Wear Indicators ...................................340
Turn Signals ....................................... 40 , 42, 82
U
Uconnect
Phone Call Features
..................................176
Things You Should Know About Your Uconnect
Phone ...................................................179
Uconnect Settings ....................................... 19
Uconnect App ................................................188
Uconnect Phone ......................... 171 , 172, 173
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — Call Cur-
rently In Progress
..................................177
Answer Or Ignore An Incoming Call — No Call Cur-
rently In Progress ..................................177
Bluetooth Communication Link .................181
Call Continuation .......................................178
Call Controls ..............................................176
Call Termination ........................................178
Cancel Command ..................................... 172
Connecting To A Particular Mobile Phone Or Au-
dio Device After Pairing
........................ 174
Help Command ......................................... 172
Join Calls .................................................. 178
Making A Phone Or Audio Device A
Favorite ................................................ 175
Making A Second Call While Current Call Is In
Progress ............................................... 178
Managing Your Favorites .......................... 176
Natural Speech ......................................... 171
Operation ................................................. 171
Overview ................................................... 169
Pair (Link) Uconnect Phone To A Mobile
Phone
................................................... 172
Pair A Bluetooth Streaming Audio
Device .................................................. 173
Phonebook Download .............................. 175
Place/Retrieve A Call From Hold .............. 178
Power-Up .................................................. 181
Recent Calls ............................................. 177
Redial ....................................................... 178
To Remove A Favorite ............................... 176
Toggling Between Calls ............................. 178
Touch-Tone Number Entry ........................ 177
Transfer Call To And From Mobile
Phone................................................... 179
Voice Command ....................................... 179
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable Features ..............19
Uconnect System .......................................... 155
Uniform Tire Quality Grades .......................... 345
Universal Consumer Interface (UCI)
Connector
........................................................52
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .................... 236
V
Vanity Mirrors ...................................................38
Vehicle Finder ......................................198 , 206
Vehicle Health Alert ....................................... 201
Vehicle Health Report ................................... 201
Vehicle Loading .................................... 127 , 335
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations ...................... 9
Vehicle Notifications ..................................... 202
Vehicle Security Alarm .....................................20
Vehicle Storage ................................................50
Ventilated Seats ...............................................33
Voice Command ............................ 35 , 183, 185
Voice Recognition System (VR) ........................35
W
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions)
....................................................78
Warnings, Roll Over ............................................ 8
Warranty Information .................................... 359
WARRANTY INFORMATION ..................... 359
Washers, Windshield ............................. 43 , 301
11
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 369
370
Washing Vehicle
............................................348
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ...........................347
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ............................347
Wi-fi ...............................................................199
Wind Buffeting ................................................. 56
Window Fogging .............................................. 50
Windows .......................................................... 55
Close ........................................................... 55
Down ........................................................... 55
Open ...........................................................55
Power .......................................................... 55
Up................................................................ 55
Windshield Defroster .....................................268
Windshield Washers ...............................43 , 301
Fluid ..........................................................301
Windshield Wiper Blades ...............................305
Windshield Wipers ........................................... 43
Wipers Blade Replacement ...........................305
Wipers, Rain Sensitive ..................................... 44
21_MP_OM_EN_USC_t.book Page 370
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-
highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon
monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause
cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid
breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a
well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your
vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual illustrates and describes the operation of features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this
vehicle. This manual may also include a description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on
this vehicle. Please disregard any features and equipment described in this manual that are not on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves
the right to make changes in design and specifications, and⁄or make additions to or improvements to its products without imposing
any obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
With respect to any vehicles sold in Canada, the name FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA Canada Inc.
used in substitution therefore.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty Booklet by
calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
This Owner’s Manual is intended to familiarize you with the important features of your vehicle. Your most up-to-date Owner’s
Manual, Navigation⁄Uconnect manuals and Warranty Booklet can be found by visiting the website on the back cover. U.S.
residents can purchase replacement kits by visiting www.techauthority.com and Canadian residents can purchase replacement
kits by calling 1-800-387-1143.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in an accident and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using
any device or feature that may take their attention o the road. Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones,
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices, by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could
lead to a serious accident. Texting while driving is also dangerous and should never be done while the vehicle is moving. If you
find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s responsibility to
comply with all local laws.
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared to help you get acquainted with your new Jeep
®
brand vehicle and to provide a
convenient reference source for common questions.
Not all features shown in this manual may apply to your vehicle. For additional information, visit www.mopar.com (U.S.),
www.mopar.ca (Canada) or your local Jeep
®
brand dealer.
Drunk driving is one of the most frequent causes of accidents. Your driving ability can
be seriously impaired with blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking driver, call a cab, a friend or
use public transportation.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your
reflexes are slower and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
WARNING!
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your vehicle’s
heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident or scheduling your next appointment, we know
you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep
brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride. To get this app, go directly to the App Store®
or Google Play® Store and enter the search keyword “JEEP” (U.S. residents only).
2021 COMPASS
OWNER’S MANUAL
21_MP_OM_EN_USC
Second Edition
© 2020 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. Tous droits réservés.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC. Jeep est une marque déposée de FCA US LLC.
App Store is a registered trademark of Apple Inc. Google Play Store is a registered trademark of Google.
2021 COMPASS
mopar.com/om owners.mopar.ca
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY OF THE MOST UP-TO-DATE
OWNER’S MANUAL, UCONNECT AND WARRANTY BOOKLETS
U. S. Canada
